Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Smart Power User Manual PDF
Smart Power User Manual PDF
UNILOG B6
HB6GBV07.3_0515
www.wittmann-group.com
1..................................................................................Machine in general
1.1................................................................................................................................................................ General
1.1.1..........................................................................................................................................General / Start page
1.1.2........................................................................................................................................ General / Information
1.1.3................................................................................................................................... General / Screw change
1.1.4............................................................................................................................................. General / Settings
......................................................................................................................................................... System of units
............................................................................................................................................................... Text system
..................................................................................................... User-specific limiting input value system (option)
1.1.5.................................................................................................................................. General / System control
............................................................................................................................................................Date and time
.......................................................................................................................................................... System control
1.1.6......................................................................................................................................General / touch screen
1.2..................................................................................................................................................................Setting
1.3............................................................................................................................................................. Zerorising
1.3.1.............................................................................................................................................Zeroizing / Page 1
1.3.2...................................................................................................................... Zeroizing / Page 2 (MicroPower)
1.4............................................................................................................................................................Calibration
1.5.....................................................................................................................................................................Drive
1.5.1......................................................................................................................................... Drive / Pump system
1.5.2........................................................................................................................... Drive / Hydraulic accumulator
1.5.3................................................................................................................................Drive / Pump configuration
1.6...................................................................................................................................................................Safety
1.6.1................................................................................................................................................ Safety / General
1.6.2........................................................................................................................................ Safety / Maintenance
1.6.3........................................................................................................................ Safety / Danger zone boundary
.......................................................................................................................... Explanation of the interface signals
.................................................................................................................... Signal bridges in the DAB dummy plug
1.6.4.................................................................................................................. Safety / External collision detection
1.6.5.................................................................................................................................. Safety / Injection plunger
2.......................................................................................... Temperatures
2.1................................................................................................................................................... Cylinder heating
2.1.1.................................................................................................................Barrel heating / Barrel temperatures
..........................................................................................................................Overview (option of special barrels)
2.1.2......................................................................................................................Barrel heating / Controller values
2.1.3........................................................................................................................... Barrel heating / Configuration
2.1.4................................................................................................................................Barrel heating / Monitoring
2.2......................................................................................................................................... Mould heating (option)
2.2.1................................................................................................................ Mould heating / Mould temperatures
2.2.2....................................................................................................................................Mould heating / General
2.2.3................................................................................................................................. Mould heating / Overview
HB6GBI3L
0515MC
Index - 1
List of contents
2.2.4..................................................................................................................... Mould heating / Controller values
2.2.5........................................................................................................................... Mould heating / Configuration
2.2.6................................................................................................................... Mould heating / Start-up programs
2.3....................................................................................................................... Temperature control units (option)
2.3.1................................................................................................................................. Temperature control units
2.3.2..................................................................................................................Temperature control units / General
2.3.3........................................................................................... Temperature control units / Configuration - analog
2.3.4............................................................................................ Temperature control units / Configuration - digital
2.3.5...............................................................................................................Temperature control units / Diagnosis
2.3.5.1.............................................................................................. Temperature control units / Diagnostic - digital
2.3.5.2.........................................................................................................Temperature control units / Diagnosis 2
2.3.6.................................................................................................. Temperature control units / COM Parameters
2.3.7.......................................................................................................Temperature control units / VARIOMOULD
2.3.8..........................................................................................................................................TEMPRO integrated
2.3.8.1........................................................................................................................................................TEMPRO
2.3.8.2.................................................................................................................................. TEMPRO configuration
2.4..................................................................................................................... Temperature control zones (option)
2.4.1............................................................................................................................... Temperature control zones
2.4.2...........................................................................Temperature control zones / Controller values (optimisation)
2.4.3............................................................................................................Temperature control zones / Monitoring
2.5................................................................................................................... Integrated Wittmann dryer (optional)
2.5.1................................................................................................................................................................. Dryer
2.6........................................................................................................................ WFC Water Flow Control (option)
2.6.1................................................................................................................................................ WFC / Overview
2.6.2.............................................................................................................................................. WFC / Monitoring
2.6.3......................................................................................................................................... WFC / Channel 1 (2)
2.6.4......................................................................................................................................... WFC / Configuration
2.6.5.......................................................................................................................................... WFC / Valve circuits
2.7............................................................................................................................ FLOWCON integrated (option)
2.7.1......................................................................................................................................... FLOWCON / Display
2.7.2............................................................................................................................... FLOWCON / Configuration
2.8............................................................................................................................ Gammaflux integrated (option)
2.8.1.........................................................................................................................................Gammaflux / Display
2.8.2............................................................................................................................... Gammaflux / Configuration
HB6GBI3L
Index - 2 0515MC
List of contents
4............................................................................................Injection unit
4.1................................................................................................................................................................ General
4.1.1...............................................................................................................................................General / Page 1
4.1.2...............................................................................................................................................General / Page 2
4.1.3......................................................................................................................................General / EES (option)
5...................................................................................................Injection
5.1................................................................................................................................................................ General
5.1.1...............................................................................................................................................General / Page 1
5.1.2...............................................................................................................................................General / Page 2
5.1.2.1.....................................................................................Page 2 for all machine types except for MicroPower
5.1.2.2.................................................................................................................................. Page 2 for MicroPower
5.1.3...............................................................................................................................................General / Page 3
5.2 ................................................................................................................................................................ Integral
5.3 ............................................................................................................................................. Flow figure (option)
5.4.................................................................................................................................................................Purging
5.4.1..............................................................................................................................................................Purging
5.4.2..................................................................................................................................... Purging / Configuration
5.4.3........................................................................................................................................... Purging / Cold plug
5.5..................................................................................................................................................... Shut-off nozzle
5.6.......................................................................................................................................................PressureMold
6.....................................................................................Holding pressure
6.1................................................................................................................................................................ General
6.1.1............................................................................................................................... General / Holding pressure
6.1.2...................................................................................................... General / Change over to holding pressure
6.1.3............................................................................................................................ General / Slave change-over
6.1.4.......................................................................................................................General / Slave change-over (2)
6.1.5.................................................................................................................................... General / CPT selection
6.2.................................................................................................................................. Cavity pressure transducer
8.....................................................................................................Ejector
8.1...............................................................................................................................General (upper parts ejector)
8.1.1...............................................................................................................................................General / Page 1
8.1.2...............................................................................................................................................General / Page 2
8.1.3...............................................................................................................................................General / Page 3
8.2................................................................................................................................................ Air valves (option)
HB6GBI3L
0515MC
Index - 3
List of contents
8.2.1.......................................................................................................................................................... Air valves
8.2.2...........................................................................................................................................Air valves / General
8.3.......................................................................................................................................... Screw-off unit (option)
8.3.1.................................................................................................................................... Screw-off unit / Settings
8.3.2................................................................................................................................. Screw-off unit / Diagnosis
8.3.3...................................................................................................................................... Screw-off unit / Setting
8.4.......................................................................................................................Station ejector (vertical machines)
8.4.1.....................................................................................................................................Station ejector / Page 1
8.4.2.....................................................................................................................................Station ejector / Page 2
HB6GBI3L
Index - 4 0515MC
List of contents
10.7.1.........................................................................................................................Handling interface 1 / settings
10.7.2......................................................................................................................Handling interface 1 / settings 2
10.7.3.............................................................................................................. Handling interface 1 / signal group 1
10.8................................................................................................................................. Image processing (option)
10.8.1................................................................................................................................... Image processing 1 (2)
10.8.2...................................................................................................................................................... Description
10.8.2.1................................................................................................................ Introduction to Image Processing
10.8.2.2..................................................................................................................................................... Principles
10.8.2.3..................................................................................................................................................... The Lens
10.8.2.4...................................................................................................................................................Illumination
10.8.2.5................................................................................................................................................. The Camera
10.8.3.............................................................................................................. Hardware and software components
10.8.3.1..................................................................................................................................................... Hardware
10.8.3.2................................................................................................................................................ IP addresses
10.8.4.............................................................................Setting of camera, measuring instruments and tolerances
HB6GBI3L
0515MC
Index - 5
List of contents
HB6GBI3L
Index - 6 0515MC
List of contents
15.10.............................................................................................................................. External servo unit (option)
15.10.1........................................................................................................................ External servo unit / General
15.10.2........................................................................................................ External servo unit / Core puller setting
15.10.3.......................................................................................................................... External servo unit / Setting
15.10.4......................................................................................................................... External servo unit / Service
15.11 ..................................................................................................................................................Scale (option)
18.....................................................................................Production data
18.1..................................................................................................................................................Production data
18.1.1................................................................................................................................ Production data / Page 1
18.1.2................................................................................................................................ Production data / Page 2
18.1.3................................................................................................................................ Production data / Page 3
18.1.4................................................................................................................. Production data / Large scale view
18.2................................................................................................................................................................. Times
18.2.1................................................................................................................................................ Times / Page 1
18.2.2................................................................................................................................... Times / Mould / Station
18.2.3........................................................................................................................................ Times / Demoulding
18.3...........................................................................................................................................Monitoring functions
18.3.1......................................................................................................................... Monitoring functions / Page 1
18.3.2......................................................................................................................... Monitoring functions / Page 2
.......................................................................................................................... Monitoring of the injection pressure
.........................................................................................................................Evaluation of the slave change-over
......................................................................................................................Evaluation of the envelope monitoring
18.3.3.............................................................................................................Monitoring functions / Mould / Station
18.3.4..................................................................................................................Monitoring functions / Demoulding
18.4............................................................................................................................................ Cycle time analysis
18.4.1............................................................................................................Cycle time Analysis / Analysis 1 and 2
18.4.2....................................................................................................Cycle time Analysis / Configuration 1 and 2
18.5.................................................................................................................................. Display of energy (option)
18.6.................................................................................................................................Start-up programs (option)
HB6GBI3L
0515MC
Index - 7
List of contents
18.7.................................................................................................................................... Process control (option)
18.7.1 .......................................................................................................................................................PRIAMUS
........................................................................................................... Signals from the PRIAMUS BlueLine system
........................................................................................................................................................ Machine signals
18.7.2 ............................................................................................................................................ PRIAMUS config
20.......................................................................................................Help
20.1............................................................................................................................................................... Manual
20.1.1.................................................................................................................................................... Manual 1 / 2
20.2............................................................................................................................................................... Manual
20.2.1............................................................................................................................... Miscellaneous / Selection
22............................................................................................. Diagnostic
22.1........................................................................................................................................................ PV Monitor.
22.2.................................................................................................................................................................Scope
22.2.1........................................................................................................................................... Scope / Curve 1-8
22.2.2..................................................................................................................................... Scope / Configuration
22.3.................................................................................................................................................................... PLC
22.3.1................................................................................................................................................. PLC / General
22.3.2.....................................................................................................................................................PLC / Pump
22.3.3....................................................................................................................................................... PLC / Axis
22.3.4........................................................................................................................................................ PLC / Log
22.3.5 .....................................................................................................................................PLC / Error diagnosis
22.4........................................................................................................................................................... Hardware
22.5......................................................................................................................................................NC diagnosis
22.5.1 ...................................................................................................................................NC diagnosis / general
22.5.2................................................................................................................................... NC diagnostic / Page 1
22.6 .................................................................................................................................................. CAN diagnosis
22.7 ............................................................................................................................. CAB/MB/PM/E67 (CAN IOs)
22.8 ........................................................................................................................................................ CAN pump
22.8.1.......................................................................................................................................CAN pump / DFEC 1
22.8.2.......................................................................................................................................CAN pump / DFEC 2
22.8.3....................................................................................................................CAN Pump / Emergency Objects
23........................................................................................APS (Option)
23.1....................................................................................................................................................APS operation
23.1.1..................................................................................................................................APS operation / general
23.1.2...............................................................................................................................APS operation / general 1
23.1.3...............................................................................................................................APS operation / general 2
23.1.4...............................................................................................................................APS operation / general 3
HB6GBI3L
Index - 8 0515MC
List of contents
27................................................................................................... Printer
27.1...................................................................................................................................................... Data printout
27.2.............................................................................................................................................Alarm / log printout
27.3.......................................................................................................................................... Quality table printout
HB6GBI3L
0515MC
Index - 9
List of contents
28...................................................................................................Alarms
28.1 ....................................................................................................................................................... Interrupt list
28.2................................................................................................................................................... Alarm statistics
28.3..................................................................................................................................................................... Log
28.4 ............................................................................................................................................................ Log filter
28.5.............................................................................................................................................................NC erros
28.5.1......................................................................................................................................... NC error / overview
28.5.2............................................................................................................................................ NC error / page 1
HB6GBI3L
Index - 10 0515MC
The Unilog B6 control system
A.1 Preface
Safety measures
This manual is part of the technical documentation on the injection moulding machine. Before
operating the control system, make sure you are familiar with all the safety measures required
for the operation of the injection moulding machine.
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 1
The Unilog B6 control system
The digital control unit UNILOG B6 has been developed from the control unit UNILOG B4.
All functions of the injection moulding machine may be controlled via the display menus. The
functions are classified according to the subassemblies or the respective activities.
For the manual operation, the machines disposes of 10 given keys operating the main functions
of the machine (drive, heating, and operating mode). Another 48 keys are assigned other
functions, depending on the machine type (e.g. opening/closing the mould).
The control system comes with a dust-proof easy to clean membrane keyboard and a
touchscreen.
Cleaning note
Clean the touchscreen with a moistened non-fibrous cloth. Only use water with a washing-up
liquid, screen cleaner, or alcohol (ethanol) for moistening the cloth. Do not spray the cleaning
agent directly on the touchscreen but spray it on the cloth! Under no circumstances use
aggressive solvents, chemicals, or scouring agents. When cleaning is carried out while the
machine is running, the touchscreen should be deactivated (see System control / Touchscreen,
chapter 1).
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 2 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
1 Screen
Touchscreen. Numbers and texts are entered via touchpads displayed on the screen.
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 3
The Unilog B6 control system
Function keys for machine operation (main functions)
They are used to switch on the drive and the heating as well as to select the operating mode.
The selected function is displayed by means of luminous rings in red, green, and yellow.
Drive Stop
The red luminous ring will be lit up if the drive has been switched off manually (using the "Stop"
key).
The red luminous ring will flash if the drive has been switched off using either a monitoring
program or the weekly time switch.
Drive Start
The green luminous ring will flash if the drive is in the start-up phase and will be lit up if the drive
runs.
The green luminous ring is lit up when the oil heating starts or the drive is ready for operation.
The yellow luminous ring will flash if, in the automatic mode, acknowledgement is required for
starting or continuing the cycle.
The green luminous ring will flash if an acknowledgeable error is active in the manual mode.
Setting mode
Manual mode
Semiautomatic mode
Automatic mode
• Operating mode activated (green)
• Operating mode activated, safety device can be opened (yellow)
• Operating mode activated, safety device opened or safety device must be
acknowledged (plusating in yellow)
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 4 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
Cylinder heating
• off (red)
• on (green)
• lower (yellow)
Mould heating
• off (red)
• on (green)
• lower (yellow)
Pressing the "Heater on" key once again will change the setting to "Lower heater".
Use the keys for the barrel heating to activate the barrel heating and the temperature control
units (option).
CAUTION
The temperature control units must be activated in the respective displays (see chapter 2).
Heater off
The red luminous ring will be lit up if the heater has been switched off manually (using the
"Heater off" key).
The red luminous ring will flash, if the heater has been switched off using either a monitoring
program or the weekly time switch.
Heater on
The green luminous ring will be lit up if the heater is switched on.
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 5
The Unilog B6 control system
Movement keys
Material conveyor
Air valve
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 6 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
Move in / out core puller
Cycle start
Manual end of production (also refer to this chapter under "Program sequence")
Airmould
Function test of the Airmould® injection module: Is it possible that nitrogen can
escape from the needle of the Airmould® injection module; can the needle of the
Airmould® injection module be moved freely (with the mould open).
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 7
The Unilog B6 control system
NC QUIT - NC error acknowledgement (with electric drives)
Tandem Mould - Open mould half 2 (nozzle side) / mould half 1 (ejector side)
Tiebar pulling
(see chapter 10, Special description Tiebar pulling)
Screw-off unit
Unipick
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 8 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
Activate / deactivate start-up parameter
Use this key to activate and deactivate the second injection parameter record in the
manual mode (setting mode) (see chapter 18, Start-up programs).
Purging
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 9
The Unilog B6 control system
External servo unit back (closing, moving out) / forward (opening, moving in)
Manual mode: Pulse control. i.e. a short pressing of the key causes the external
servo unit to move into position with the set profile data. If the external servo unit is
in an undifined position, the setting values are used for movement.
Setting mode: Touch control operation with setting values.
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 10 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
Key-operated switch
CAUTION
At the end of installation work, for safety reasons, the keys should be removed from all key-
operated switches and kept in a safe place.
Mouldfix
Unlock mould. The key-operated switch enables the movements of the
"Mouldfix
system".
Cellmould® (optional)
Ejector forward/back and Move in / out core puller or Ejector forward and
Move in / out core puller with open safety gate
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 11
The Unilog B6 control system
Tie-bar pulling
(see chapter 10, Special description Tiebar pulling)
Zylinder maintenance
(see Chapter 6, Strucuture and Function)
Lock drive
The hydraulic drive cannot be started if the key-operated switch is activated.
In case of a vertical injection assembly, the switch has to be activated and the key
to be removed before carrying out any work (cleaning the nozzle, refilling material
...) at the assembly.
Oscillation on / off
Switch Program Rotary table oscillation on / off. If the Rotary table oscillation is
activated, an oscillation range has to be preselected (Setting see "Rotary table
Page 1").
Magnetic platens
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 12 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
2-hand operation On
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 13
The Unilog B6 control system
Acknowledgement key
Ejector forward/back and Move in / out core puller or Ejector forward and Move
in / out core puller with open safety gate
Cycle start
Selector button
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 14 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
BNC socekts
p v s p
1 2 3 4
1 Injection pressure
2 Injection speed
3 Screw stroke
4 Cavity pressure
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 15
The Unilog B6 control system
Via the menus shown on the display, you may obtain all the information required for the
operation of the machine.
2 1 4 5 6 7 14
13
10
9
12.2
12.1 11
F06-Allgemein_Nachdruck_04
1 Screen photo
An activation of the symbol opens the window for for the screen photo. The currently
selected page can be printed as a picture in different formats and saved as file. All pages
marked for page printout (for marking the pages see paragraph 4) can be printed once or
cyclically.
Procedure for printing selected pages once:
• Activate program preselection "All selected pages"
• Acknowledgement -> The selected pages are printed.
• If the program preselection "Saving into file" was selected, another window is opened.
• Here, the data carrier and the prestring are entered. The file name is composed of the
prestring, the title of the corresponding page and a consecutive number.
• Acknowledgement -> The selected pages are saved as a file.
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 16 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
Procedure for cyclically printing selected pages:
• Activate program preselection „All selected pages“ and „Random sampling of selected
pages“. To the right of the program preselection, enter the desired printout interval. The
set path, the prestring and the file format can be read by pressing the „Path“ button.
• Confirmation -> the selected pages are printed. When the printout interval is reached
(indicated below the screen photo symbol), the next printout is started.
• With program preselection „Saving into file“, another window is opened.
• Enter here the storage device (data carrier) and the prestring.
The file name is composed of the prestring, the heading of the respective page, the
number of copies and a consecutive number.
• Confirmation -> the selected pages are saved in file format. When the next printout
interval is reached, the selected pages are again saved in file format.
NOTE
If program preselection „Random sampling of selected pages“ is activated and the
„Printout interval“ is entered, the interval is recalculated upon the next printout.
If the pages cannot be stored, e.g. because no memory stick is connected or no storage
space is available on the selected medium, message „No memory available“ is displayed.
2 Headline
The headline indicates the current menu (e.g. holding pressure).
A click on the title displays the help of the current menu.
In the case of multicolour machines, the injection unit is additionally shown if the menu
is related to injection units. The menus of the individual injection units are changed by
activating this button. Additionally, the colour of the title is changed.
If the option "Multiple data records" is selected, the injection parameter record (injection
parameter record 1..P1, injection parameter record 2..P2) is additionally shown. The
menus of the individual injection parameter records are changed by activating this button.
On the very right in the title line, time and date will be displayed. An activation of the time
and date opens the setting window (see chapter 1, too).
3 Alarm line
If an error (alarm) occurs, an alarm line will be displayed below the headline in which the
current error will be indicated.
When clicking on alarm, a change to the alarm list menu is made. Here, all currently
pending alarms are displayed.
4 Page printout
An activation of the symbol activates/deactivates the page printout for this page
(description see chapter 27).
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 17
The Unilog B6 control system
5 Languages
A language can be selected here. An activation of the symbol opens the window for
"Change language" (see present chapter).
6 User level
Here the user level of your login will be indicated. An activation of the symbol opens the
window for "System password" (see present chapter).
7 Status displays
The following statuses are displayed here:
USB device plugged in when the green LED will be lit up (e.g. USB stick)
Active note available when the green LED will be lit up (see also notepad,
chapter 21).
8 Status bar
In the status bar, the states, strokes of the axes and other states of the machine will
be displayed. Use the tabs in the lower part of the status bar to change between three
different status bars (description see chapter 21).
9 Input fields
An activation of the input fields will display an input pad (numpad for the input of
numbers, alphapad when entering texts).
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 18 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
11 Navigation bar
Direct selection of the individual functions. Tabs can be used in the function to call up
submenus. The selected menu of the function is stored and jumped too again when
pressing the navigation bar again.
The menus are divided in 4 groups: Machine sequence, injection process, process
monitoring of data and special functions (see function key MENU).
Machine sequence:
Injection process:
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 19
The Unilog B6 control system
Function keys (this navigation key is only visible if the option is available on the
machine, see chapter 14)
Service (this navigation key is only visible if your are in the service level).
Pressing the navigation key MENU will call up the 4th group with the special
function.
Special functions
SmartEdit (see chapter 13)
Site map
Select this function to display an overview of all menus in the order of the menu keys.
Direct jumps to the individual menus and submenus are possible.
Additionally, a printer symbol is displayed in that menus in which a page printout is
activated.
Special keys
The last 20 selected menus are stored. Use this key to page up the last menus selected. The
menus paged up can also be paged down again.
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 20 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
13 Program preselection (check box and radio button)
The program preselections distinguish between two types:
Program is active
CAUTION
If you want to close an opened pull down menu without any selection, activate an area outside
the pull down menu.
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 21
The Unilog B6 control system
16 Pull down menu for changing pages
A pull down menu for changing pages is displayed on some pages in the uppermost part of the
input range. A message is displayed if no further pages are available. A message is displayed if
no further pages are available.
Pull down menus for changing pages are, for instance, on the following pages, too:
• Mould heating.
• Temperature control units.
• Air valves.
• Cooling water valves.
• Core puller
• ...
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 22 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
A.5 Numpad
7 8 9
1 min / max
Display of the input range (limit value).
On top a bar is displayed representing the input range. When entering values outside the
input range, the bar is displayed in red and an error symbol is displayed to the left of the
input range of the numpad.
Set values with user-specific input limits are marked by the symbol (option) in the
NumPad.
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 23
The Unilog B6 control system
2 Old value
The old value of the input is displayed here.
3 Clipboard
The last correctly entered value is automatically stored in the clipboard. This stored value
can be inserted into the numpad input field by activating the "Insert key".
4 Backspace
Cancel the last number entered
5 Cancel
Cancel the complete entry
6 Acknowledgement
Acknowledgement of the entry.
7 Insert
Insert the clipboard value.
8 Increment
Increment the value (value + 1).
9 Decrement
Decrement the value (value - 1).
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 24 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
A.6 Alphapad
3 2 1 7 8 9
10 11
1 Number of characters
Here, the remaining, current, and maximum number of characters for entering the text is
displayed.
2 old text
The old text of the input is displayed here.
3 Clipboard
The last correctly entered text is automatically stored in the clipboard. This stored value
can be inserted into the alphapad input field by activating the "Insert key".
4 Backspace
Cancel the last number entered
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 25
The Unilog B6 control system
5 Cancel
Cancel the complete entry
6 Acknowledgement
Acknowledgement of the entry.
7 Insert
Insert the clipboard text.
10 Caps lock
Activation of upper case letters. Upper case letter remain activated until they are
deactivated.
11 Caps
Activation of upper case letters. Upper case letters remain activated for entering a
character.
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 26 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
For the initial operation procedure of the machine, a password has been assigned ex works.
This password enables the operator of the machine or the person adjusting the machine to carry
out the initial operation procedure.
USER: bat
PASSWORD: 2006
Please note the use of small initial letters when entering the user.
CAUTION
To prevent the machine from interventions by non-authorised persons, the user should assign a
new password.
An activation of the user level symbol opens the window for "System password". In these
menus, the following actions can be carried out:
• Login and logout on the machine.
• Create users.
• Delete existent users (limited possibility).
• Change passwords and assign new passwords.
• Assign a USB stick to a user. By plugging the assigned USB stick you will be
automatically logged in on the machine.
• Determine a user name for the service level.
The actions carried out will be entered in the log. A message is displayed when wrong entries
are made.
The access to the control system is protected on several levels (user levels) by means of a
password.
If no password has been entered, most of the user menus may be selected; however, the input
of set values is not possible.
There are different user levels with different rights for the users, depending on their status.
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 27
The Unilog B6 control system
User level
90 No rights for data input, pages may only be viewed (the user will be assigned this level
after the start-up or logout).
40 Loading and printing of data records (see chapter 25 and 27).
Print quality table and SPC (see also chapter 16).
ASCII high-speed printout (see chapter 27).
30 Customer (user may change all data contained in the production data record).
20 Customer service (In addition to the production data record, the user may also change
the bar. parameters and perform the calibration of the stroke transducers).
15 Customer service IT level
Change system settings (see chapters 1.1.5 and 29
Change address for Wille system, WebCam and Browser, see chapter 26.7 to 26.9
External collision deteection, see chaper 1.6.4
For save/load user list refer to "User list" in the present chapter.
Login
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 28 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
Logout
If you want to interrupt or finish your work at the control unit, you will have to logout first. This
procedure prevents unauthorised input at the control unit.
• Select the "Logout" key.
If the logout is successful, the window is automatically closed. As an acknowledgement, user
level 90 is displayed in the "User level symbol".
Automatic LOGOUT
This program can be used to activate the "Automatic LOGOUT". Set the wished "Waiting time"
at which an automatic logout from the machine should take place. The "Automatic logout"
occurs if during a set period (waiting time) no actions are made on the monitor.
You may create new users having different rights at the machine and thus different user levels.
CAUTION
The user level of the new user may not be lower than your own user level.
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 29
The Unilog B6 control system
• Select the "User name" input field.
• Enter user name (15 characters at the most).
• Select the "User password" input field.
• Enter password (minimum 3 and maximum 15 characters).
• Enter the password again in line "Password confirmation".
• Enter user level.
• Select the "Create user" key.
The input fields are deleted if "Create user" was successful. The user is now displayed in the
"User list".
CAUTION
You may only delete users in the same or a higher user level (i.e. having less rights than you
have).
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 30 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
Change password
If you want to change your own password, you have to be logged on with your user name first,
see login function.
• Select the "User password" input field.
• Enter the new password.
• Enter the same password again in line "Password confirmation".
• Select the "Change password" key.
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 31
The Unilog B6 control system
User list
You can view the possible users of the control unit in this menu. The respective user level will be
displayed for each user.
User level 15 shows two buttons for saving and loading the user list (UserInfo). You can transfer
the user list to other machines.
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 32 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
Access control
Login is carried out automatically by plugging an assigned USB stick.
CAUTION
For a login, the USB stick must be assigned to a user on the machine.
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 33
The Unilog B6 control system
Password forgotten?
If you forgot your password and do not have any possibility to log in, please contact the
Battenfeld Customer service and ask for a password for the service level. You can then assign
passwords again in this user level.
User name
Activating the function selection "Determine user name for service level" calculates and displays
a user name by chance. Please contact the Battenfeld customer service to obtain the user
password.
You must give the following information to the Battenfeld customer service:
• User name.
• Machine order number.
• Order version number of the machine.
• RPS master number.
• RPS submaster number.
The user name is automatically entered in the "Login" menu. You can now login using the
requested user password.
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 34 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
You may change the language of the control system if necessary. An activation of the user
language symbol opens the window for "Change language".
• Select language.
• The language is changed automatically and the window is closed.
Each machine has been set up in terms of a language as to fulfill the customer’s needs.
Ask your BATTENFELD customer contact in case you require further information.
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 35
The Unilog B6 control system
Manual mode
The respective membrane keys at the manual control panel may carry out all movements. The
set strokes will be triggered and controlled at the respective speeds and forces.
The manual movement of Injection plunger back will become self-locking after 2 sec., i.e. you
can release the key and the movement will be continued. Pressing the key again will interrupt
the movement again.
Setting mode
If this program is activated, all movements [Except for "Spring-loaded mould" (option), see
chapter 3 "Clamping unit"] are performed at reduces speed, reduced force, and reduced
pressure. The specifications for speed, force and pressure will be entered in the "Setting" menu.
The setting mode is activated using the "Setting mode" key at the manual control panel.
The set limit positions defined by the profiles will be approached. After reaching this limit
position press the respective keys at the manual control panel to approach the mechanical limit
positions of the movements.
After the minimum position of the respective movement has been reached (e.g. Mould closed),
the new zero point may be accepted.
Zerorising is neither possible in the automatic nor in the semiautomatic mode.
If the machine is equipped with the option "Setting movements during oil heating", it is possible
to carry out movements in the setting mode already while the oil heating is active.
CAUTION
If you open the safety gate during a movement, the machine has to be moved back to the
starting position. Only then may the working cycle be resumed.
Fully-automatic mode
If the "Fully automatic mode" program has been switched on, the machine will be operated in
the fully automatic mode. The "Automatic" key has to be pressed (LED on). Press the "Close"
key to start the first cycle.
Starting from size 10000 / -, first press the "Mould Closing" and then (within 3 seconds) the
"Close safety gate" key. If the safety gate is completely closed, hold down the "Mould closing"
key (approx. 1 sec.) to start the cycle.
Semi-automatic
If the "Semiautomatic mode" program has been switched on, the machine will be operated in
the semiautomatic mode. The "Semiautomatic" key must be pressed. Press the "Close" key to
start the new cycle. 2 ejector programs can be preselected for the semiautomatic mode. Setting
is made in the menu "Ejector / General information / Page 2" (also refer to chapter 8).
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 36 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
Semiautomatic and "Ejector forward -> Parts removal / insertion -> Ejector back"
• Close safety gate.
"Close safety gate" key in case of a power-operated safety gate (option).
• Press the "Mould Closing" key.
Not present in the program "Cycle start with Close safety gate" (Option).
• The cycle starts (Nozzle forward, Injection, etc.) up to "Mould opened"
• The ejector moves forward to the stroke marker "Ejector in front position"
The "Ejector forward" start depends on the respective selection in the "Ejector" menu.
• Safety gate open. Power-operated safety gates are automatically opened.
• The moulding can be removed.
• Close safety gate.
"Close safety gate" key in case of a power-operated safety gate (option).
• The ejector moves back
• Press the "Mould Closing" key. The next cycle is started.
Not present in the program "Cycle start with Close safety gate" (Option).
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 37
The Unilog B6 control system
Semiautomatic and "Ejector forward -> Parts removal / insertion -> Ejector back" and manual
removal of moulded articles" (option)
• Close safety gate.
"Close safety gate" key in case of a power-operated safety gate (option).
• Press the "Mould Closing" key.
Not present in the program "Cycle start with Close safety gate" (Option).
• The cycle starts (Nozzle forward, Injection, etc.)
• The safety gate can be opened with "Mould open".
Power-operated safety gates are automatically opened.
Semiautomatic mode and „ejector forward -> removal -> ejector back -> insertion“
• Close safety gate.
„Close safety gate“ button with mechanically operated safety gate (optional).
• Press „Close mould“ button.
Omitted with program „Cycle start with safety gate closing“ (optional).
• The cycle is started (nozzle forward, injection, etc.) until „Mould opened“.
• The ejector moves forward until it reaches the „Ejector in front position“ mark.
The start of „Ejector forward“ depends on the actual selection in the „Ejector“ menu.
• Open safety gate. Mechanically operated safety gates are opened automatically.
• The injection moulding can be removed.
• Close safety gate.
„Close safety gate“ button with mechanically operated safety gate (optional).
• Press „Close mould“ button.
Omitted with program „Cycle start with safety gate closing“ (optional).
• The ejector is moved back.
• Open safety gate. Mechanically operated safety gates are opened automatically.
• The insert part can be inserted.
• Close safety gate.
„Close safety gate“ button with mechanically operated safety gate (optional).
• Press „Close mould“ button. The next cycle is started.
Omitted with program „Cycle start with safety gate closing“ (optional).
CAUTION
Risk of injury! If the ejector or core pullers are operated with the safety gate open, it must be
ensured that there are no pinching and / or crushing points on the mould.
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 38 0115MC
The Unilog B6 control system
This program must be deactivated before switching off the machine!
• Press the acknowledgement key or the key-operated switch "Ejector forward and Move
out core puller for opened safety gate".
The "Ejector forward" start depends on the respective selection in the "Ejector" menu.
• The moulding can be removed.
• Close safety gate.
"Close safety gate" key in case of a power-operated safety gate (option).
• The ejector moves back
• Press the "Mould Closing" key. The next cycle is started.
Not present in the program "Cycle start with Close safety gate" (Option).
HB6GB00K
0115MC
Chapter A - 39
The Unilog B6 control system
Shut-down sequence
Machines with mould table:
Insertion stations will no longer be approached. The injection procedure will only completed
for those lower moulds which contain insert parts. The machine cycle will be continued until
all injection mouldings are ejected (demoulded). If the shut-down sequence is caused by a
monitoring which blocks a new injection cycle (e.g. material monitoring), production will continue
only until all injection mouldings will have been ejected (demoulded).
Machines without mould table:
The machine cycle will be continued until all injection mouldings are ejected (demoulded).
CAUTION
If the photoelectric barrier remains interrupted during the entire cycle (e.g. if ejected parts
project into the drop-out area of the machine), the next closing procedure will also be disabled.
HB6GB00K
Chapter A - 40 0115MC
Machine in general
1 Machine in general
1.1 General
1.1.1 General / Start page
F01-Allgemein-Startseite_02
The start page is displayed when switching on the machine. You can read the machine size
here.
An activation of the symbol "Contact" in the right lower part of the picture shows a list of all
Battenfeld agencies.
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 1
Machine in general
Functions of the QuickLookApp
• Quick overview in the device lists due to coloured coding of the operating conditions.
• Display of operating data, alarms and user-specific program values in the detailed views
of the individual devices.
• Grouping of devices.
• The listed devices can be sorted manually.
• Alternative grid view with automatic sorting of the device by condition.
• Simple setting by entering the IP addresses of the wished devices.
• Simple passing of settings by email.
Prerequisites
• The App can be reached from Wittmann R8 robots and Wittmann Battenfeld B6 injection
moulding machines in the LAN/WLAN of the injection moulding operation.
• Wittmann R8 robot, software version 8.20.15 or higher.
• Wittmann Battenfeld B6 injection moulding machines, software version V07.2 or higher.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 2 0515MC
Machine in general
F01-Allgemein-Info_03
Different version of the machine and the control unit are displayed in this menu. Furthermore,
you can read the total shot number in the automatic mode and the total operating hours of the
machine since its first start-up.
Machine designation
Here, a designation of the respective machine can be entered. This designation is displayed on
the "Start page".
Available memory:
The available memory can be seen by pressing the button above the memory display.
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 3
Machine in general
F01-Allgemein-Schneckenwechsel_02
In the upper part of the menu, the screw diameter currently set on the machine is displayed.
Screw change
Procedure:
• Select function selection "Change-over to new screw diameter".
• The input field for the screw diameter and the function selection "ABORT" will be
displayed.
• Enter the new screw diameter.
• The function selection "Change screw diameter" is displayed.
• The new screw diameter is accepted with the activation of the "Change screw diameter"
function selection.
• The process is aborted by activating the "ABORT" function selection.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 4 0515MC
Machine in general
The current product data are temporarily stored after having selected the "Schange screw
diameter" function selection. Then, the screw diameter is changed and the temporary product
data loaded again. The instruction "Please wait!" will be displayed during this time!
The Min./Max. limits will be changed when changing the screw diameter. Thus, it may happen
that, when loading the temporary product data, some values are no longer within the permitted
range. If one of the set values is not within the permitted range, it will be limited to min./ max.
and entered into the log. This will be indicated by the instruction "Values were limited, see log".
CAUTION
If data are limited by a change of the screw diameter, you must load again the original data
record (see chapter 25) if the screw diameter is reset again.
CAUTION
Only change the screw diameter value if the machine has been retrofitted with a screw barrel
with a different screw diameter.
You may only enter the screw diameters listed below:
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 5
Machine in general
Screw barrel coding (option)
The machine is equipped with a screw barrel coding and thus, the screw diameter will be sent
to the machine via the coding plug on the screw barrel. If the "Screw barrel coding" does not
match die "Screw diameter (injection plunger" set on the machine, an error message will be
displayed. You will then be requested to change the screw diameter. Additionally, the screw
diameter set on the machine is displayed in "red".
NOTE
"Screw barrel coding" = 0 ....No screw barrel coding plug is connected or the screw barrel
coding is not known.
CAUTION
In the case of multi-component machines, Caution must be paid that the injection unit change-
over is correctly set in the headline before changing the screw diameter.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 6 0515MC
Machine in general
F01-Allgemein-Einstellungen_03
System of units
General
In this pull down menu, you set the respective system of units of the machine. Usually, the
metric system of units will be set.
In the following, you find a list of the metric and the US units (SPI) with the respective
conversion factors:
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 7
Machine in general
Temperatures
In this pull down menu, you set the system of units for temperatures. Celsius [C] and Fahrenheit
[F] can be selected.
Temperature conversion
x °C = (x 1.8 + 32) °F absolute (set temperature values)
x °C = (x 1.8) °F (set tolerance values)
Injection piston
In this pull down menus, you set the system of units of the injection piston. The injection pistion
stroke can be selected in [ccm] / [cuin] or in [mm] / [in]. The injection pression can be set
specifically or hydraulically. For information, ps and/or ph is displayed for the profile specifications
for injection (chapter 5.1.1), holding pressure (chapter 6.1.1) and metering (chapter 7.1.1).
ps ... specific injection pressure (pressure of the moulding compound in the cylinder)
ph ... hydraulic injection pressure (injection pressure in the hydraulic cylinder)
Integral
The unit of the injection and metering integral is determined in this pull down menu. For the
integral settings refer to the "Metering / Integral" function (see chapter 7).
Text system
Use this text system to change the texts of the input range. All texts which more often appear in
the visualisation will be changed.
Ex.: If the text "move in" on the core puller page will be changed into "hold", the new text is then
displayed in the complete visualisation.
CAUTION
If a text, which should be changed, is displayed in the alphapad with the replacement character
{00}, {01}, or {02}, these replacement characters must be kept in the changed text. They are
used to serialize the texts.
Ex.:
Text "Air valve 1" is to be changed to "Air core puller 1". Display in alphapad "Air valve {00}".
The text must now be changed to "Air core puller {00}". The text "Air core puller 1" or "Air core
puller 2" etc. is now displayed on that page.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 8 0515MC
Machine in general
Activate customer texts
If this program preselection is active, the entered customer texts are displayed. Additionally, the
editing of the customer texts can be activated. In the area of the status displays, a status for
activation and editing of the customer texts is displayed.
Customer texts active (blue), edit customer texts (blue flashing)
By means of the user-specific limiting input value system, the input limits (user level greater
than 20) can be limited for the user and program preselections can be blocked.
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 9
Machine in general
Starting with the user level, defined under "User-specific input limiting value system for user
levels", all set values can be edited, however, only within the previously set user-specific input
limits. Set values with user-specific input limits are marked by the symbol in the NumPad.
The normal machine limits are valid for all set values without user-specific limits. The user-
specific input limits are not active in user level 20.
CAUTION
If this limiting value system is deactivated, the machine limits will then be active as the input
limits again. However, the input values will not be lost - they are only not valid!
CAUTION
After having limited all set values, the product data record should be stored again. When loading
this product data record, the new user-specific limiting values will then be loaded, too.
CAUTION
If this is wished to be permanent for the loaded data record, the data record must be stored
again.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 10 0515MC
Machine in general
Special features
If limiting values are set and the respective set values are already outside the wished limiting
input values, the set values are not affected! Only if a new value is entered, the input limiting will
become active and informs the user correspondingly.
If existing product data records are loaded which do not show any user-specific limits, the
machine limits will be valid.
In user level 20, the machine limits are, in general, valid for the set value input!
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 11
Machine in general
F01-Allgemein-Systemsteuerung_03
Time zone
An activation of the button calls up the window for the time zone setting. Before setting the time,
you should be sure at any rate that the correct time zone is set. Date and time can also be set in
this window.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 12 0515MC
Machine in general
System control
CAUTION: BEFORE MAKING ANY CHANGES TO THE SYSTEM CONTROL, YOU MUST READ
THE INFORMATION REGARDING THE SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE CHAPTER 29).
To read the system control information, click this button. A new window is opened.
After having carefully read the system control information, click the “Information system control
read” button. The system control can now be edited.
Network connections
Computer name
Internet options
Press the respective button to edit the system control dialog to change the network connections,
computer name or internet options (only available with motor stop and from user level 15 (customer
service IT level)).
Network connections: Here, you can edit the IP address of the machine.
Computer name: Here, you can edit the computer name of the machine.
Internet options: Here, you can edit the proxy server settings.
NOTE
To make changes in the system control, you must use an external keyboard.
Upon calling up the network connections, the RPS (AR010) is stopped for safety reasons.
CAUTION
For information regarding the changing of settings, refer to chapter 29.
Explanation:
The operating system including its settings are installed on a write-protected drive. To
permanently save changes made to the system control, you must execute COMMIT (transfer of
change to write-protected system) and RESTART the system.
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 13
Machine in general
F01-Allgemein-Touchscreen_02
darker / lighter
Pressing the button will change the lightness of the touchscreen.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 14 0515MC
Machine in general
Screensaver
This program preselection can be used to activate the screensaver. Set the wished "Waiting
time" at which the screensaver is to be activated. The screensaver occurs if during a set period
(waiting time) no actions are made on the monitor.
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 15
Machine in general
1.2 Setting
F01-Einrichten-Seite1_03
In this menu you define the parameters for the setup of the machine.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 16 0515MC
Machine in general
Close Setting-v to Decompression Setting-Q
If the setting mode is active, all movements are performed at the reduced set values set in this
field.
For a description of the setting mode, please refer to "Programs in general" in chapter A.9.
CAUTION
To avoid the risk of damage to the mould the ejector movements should only be checked with
the mould open!
Purged material must not be touched. Burns hazard!
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 17
Machine in general
1.3 Zerorising
1.3.1 Zeroizing / Page 1
F01-Nullung-Seite1_05
The profiles for Close, Open, Nozzle forward, Nozzle back, Ejector forward, Ejector back are
always entered from "0" to "Desired stroke". I.e. the new zero points of the respective mould
have to be determined.
The individual axes are either zerorised in setting or in the manual mode. After reaching this
limit position, the new zero point ("Mould closed", "Nozzle contact point", and "Ejector is back")
can be accepted for the respective movement by pressing the respective screen button.
If, due to a new zerorising procedure, a movement exceeded the maximum absolute stroke, the
"Error Zerorising ..." error message would be displayed. The respective movement can only be
performed in the setting mode.
CAUTION
In other menus, stroke transducers, as e.g. for station ejectors (in the case of vertical machines)
can be zeroized additionally.
A stroke measuring system can be zeroized only via the „Automatic determination of the zero
value“ (description see present chapter) with:
• Movement keys via the touchscreen
• Zeroising of the clamping unit in the case of MacroPower
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 18 0515MC
Machine in general
Zerorising Injection unit
Use this function to zerorise the stroke measuring system of the injection unit to the nozzle
contact point value. The actual value in this line indicates the absolute stroke for the nozzle;
i.e. if the nozzle is at the mechanical nozzle contact point, the nozzle immersion depth will be
indicated.
Activation of this button accepts this actual value as the new zero point for the stroke measuring
system of the nozzle.
The value by which the stroke measuring system has been zerorised (nozzle immersion depth)
will be indicated in the set value field. The actual value on the status bar will now indicate the
relative stroke from "0" to "Desired stroke".
Zerorising Ejector
Use this function to zerorise the stroke measuring system of the ejector to the desired stroke
for "Ejector is back". The actual value in this line indicates the absolute stroke for the ejector,
i.e. if the ejector is, for example, mechanically coupled to the mould, the value for Ejector
mechanically back will be indicated here.
Activation of this button accepts this actual value as the new zero point for the stroke measuring
system of the ejector.
The value by which the stroke measuring system has been zeroized (Stroke Ejector is back)
will be indicated in the set value field. The actual value on the status bar will now indicate the
relative stroke from "0" to "Desired stroke".
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 19
Machine in general
Procedure:
- Program activation:
- A query is made whether core pullers are installed.
- After acknowledgement by the respective button, the automatic zeroising will be
continued.
- Clamping unit is closing
- If no stroke change is recognised any longer, zeroising is carried out and the position of
the pressure box will be determiend.
- Then, the pressure boxes move to the determined pressure box positions
- The pressure boxes are locked and clamping force will be built up
- Then, the second mould half can be screwed tight.
- Automatic zeroising completed, the program preselection is reset.
Zero value determined (black/yellow colour) - the axis can now be zeroized.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 20 0515MC
Machine in general
F01-Nullung-Seite2_02
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 21
Machine in general
1.4 Calibration
F01-Kalibrieren_01
In this menu, the stroke transducers of the following units will be calibrated:
• Clamping unit.
• Injection unit.
• Ejector.
• Injection piston.
CAUTION
The stroke transducers can only be calibrated in the setting mode.
In other menus it is additionally possible to calibrate stroke transducers such as, e.g., for the
excentric injection system EES (option), station ejector (in the case of vertical machines).
If there are CAN stroke transducers on the machine, the calibration of the respecive axis is
changed to the CAN referencing. When referencing CAN stroke transducers, only a set value
must be specified.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 22 0515MC
Machine in general
Procedure (for stroke transducers):
• Switch machine to the setting mode.
• Activate the "Start Calibration" program of the desired stroke transducer (e.g.: Clamping
unit).
• Now approach the minimum value (e.g.: Mould closed). Enter the measured minimum
value (e.g. distance between nozzle platen and clamping platen) and confirm it with "OK".
• Now approach the maximum value (e.g. Mould opened). Enter the measured maximum
value (e.g. distance between nozzle platen and clamping platen) and confirm it with "OK".
• To recalibrate the stroke transducer trigger the "Calibration" switch.
Clamping unit
Expand the toggle completely. Now measure the distance between clamping platen and nozzle
platen. Open clamping unit up to more than 2/3 of the maximum stroke. Measure this value
again. Enter the difference between the two measured values as the set value for calibration.
Ejector
Measure the distance between ejector plate and mechanical end stop. Substract a safety
tolerance of 3mm (3.05 mm) from the measured value. Enter this value as the set value for
calibration.
Injection unit
Measure the distance between the mould mounting surface of the nozzle platen and the nozzle
point. Enter this value as the set value for calibration.
injection piston
Heat up the barrel. Move the injection unit into the hindmost position. Move the injection piston
manullay into the foremost position. For this, the front-side guarding panel must be removed.
Screw in an M16 screw with locking nuts into the driving spindle and fasten it by means of the
locking nut. Now put the scew to the mechanicla front stop by turning the screw clockwise. Enter
-3 mm (-0.12 inch) as the set value for the calibration.
CAUTION
Remove the screw with locking nut after successful calibration and put the guarding panel in
place again.
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 23
Machine in general
1.5 Drive
1.5.1 Drive / Pump system
F01-Antrieb-Pumpensystem_04
Oil temperature
Here, the oil temperature is displayed for your information. The set value can be changed within
a range of 35-45 °C / 95-113 °F. A change of the oil temperature improves the energetic setting
of the machine (see also Mechancial description, chapter 8 Maintenance)
Also depending on the type of oil used:
HLP32 35-40 °C / 95-104 °F
HLP46 40-45 °C / 104-113 °F
If the drive is switched on the hydraulic oil will be heated up to 5 °C / 9 °F below the specified
set value.. Afterwards the tolerance range is spread by 5 °C / 9 °F, i.e. when falling short by 10
°C / 18 °F, the hydraulic oil will be heated up again. While the oil is being heated, all movements
of the machine will be disabled. An exceeding of this value by 15 °C / 27 °F will cause a
prewarning, an exceeding by 20 °C / 36 °F will switch off the machine. When reaching the
maximum temperature of 70 °C / 158 °F the machine cannot be started again.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 24 0515MC
Machine in general
Pump rinsing program (machines with DFE hydraulics only)
Activation of the pump rinsing program for the respective system. If there is air present in the
pump system, e.g. due to a pump or oil change, activate this program to eliminate the air from
the system.
The pump rinsing program is to be activated for 20 minutes approx. The program must be
deactivated afterwards.
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 25
Machine in general
F01-Antrieb-Hydraulikspeicher_02
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 26 0515MC
Machine in general
Charge hydraulic accumulator permanent
The loading of the hydraulic accumulator is performed permanently. By means of this setting the
total cycle time will be reduced, the energy consumption, however, will increase.
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 27
Machine in general
F01-Antrieb-Pumpenkonfig_GB03
The pump configuration and program preselections are determined by the scope of equipment
of the machine.
Rapid movement
Activation of the high speed for the respective movement. The maximum values of the
respective movement are raised and displayed in the left part of the picture. Then, the higher
speed of the respective movement can be entered in the speed profile.
Parallel movement
If parallel movements are wished, this pump configuration must be activated. Additinally, the
corresponding program must be activated on the setting pages.
Ex.: "Start ejector for open stroke" (see chapter 8.1.1) -> the parallel "Ejector" movement" must
be activated during "Opening".
Tthe right column shows the pump configuration numbers with the activated pumps for the
respective movement.
NOTE
If the customer selects an invalid combination, "Please wait" will be displayed and then the
combination will be cancelled.
Eco-mode servodrive
Active the energy-saving mode. Explanation: The pump motor speed will be reduced at low
profile velocities of the axes movements (variablespeed mode).
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 28 0515MC
Machine in general
1.6 Safety
1.6.1 Safety / General
F01-Sicherheit-Allgemein_06
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 29
Machine in general
Mould table enabled for continuous rotary movement
If this program is activated, the mould table is released for continuous operation only. Oszillation
(setting in the "Mould table / General" menu) must be deactivated.
If this program is deactivated, the mould table is released for oscillating operation only. An
oszillation range (setting in the "Mould table / General" menu) must be selected.
CAUTION
This setting is not saved in the data record.
NOTE
Additionally, more preselections can be made via the program preselections "Swich off heating
for motor stop" or "Decrease heating for Motor Stop" (see monitorings, chapter 18).
CAUTION
This setting is not saved in the data record.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 30 0515MC
Machine in general
Open shut-off nozzle at production stoppage
With activated program preselection, the timer "Open shut-off nozzle at production stoppage in
xx [min]" is started in the case of production stoppage. After the timer has run down, the shut-off
nozzle is opened if the corresponding safety devices are closed (safety opening due to pressure
discharge).
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 31
Machine in general
F01-Sicherheit-Wartung_01
Machine maintenance
Maintenance work on the machine must be carried out in specified intervals (see also Manual 1,
Chapter 8 Maintenance).
If a maintenance interval has run out, the error message "Carry out machine maintenance" will
be displayed for information. Additionally, the actual time is displayed in red. The work indicated
in the maintenance table (see Manual 1, Chapter 8.5) under the respective maintenance interval
must now be carried out. The maintenance carried out must be acknowledged by pressing the
respective button "Machine maintenance Interval xxx carried out". The maintenance interval
starts runnung only after that action.
The first two machine maintenance intervals can be deactivated by entering "Interval = 0".
General maintenance
Two maintenance intervals can be defined here. If a maintenance interval has run out, the error
message "Carry out general maintenance" will be displayed for information. For the remaining
procedure please refer to the machine maintenance.
By entering "Interval = 0", the general maintenance will be deactivated.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 32 0515MC
Machine in general
CAUTION
Two hours before the end of the maintenance interval, a yellow warning triangle is shown to the
left as a note.
If maintenance is carried out before the end of a maintenance interval, it must also be
acknowledged by pressing the button "Machine maintenance Interval xxx carried out", so that
the interval will start again.
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 33
Machine in general
F01-Sicherheit-Gefahrenberechsabgrenzung_03
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 34 0515MC
Machine in general
DZB modes for cycle start (for DZB interface only)
• Restart cycle of IMM.
• Restart cycle of DBZ.
• Restart cycle of DBZ or IMM.
• Cycle restart automatically after acknowledgement.
This mode is set in the factory and cannot be changed.
Note: IMM is the synonym for injection moulding machine.
DBZ signals
An exact description of the DAB and machine signals is given in the "Explanation of the
interface signals" under the respective interface pin.
System stopped
(Pin C8 of the Euromap 67 interface)
EMERGENCY STOP ok
(Pin 5 of the DAB interface)
Cycle start
(Pin 32 of the DAB interface)
Login
(Pin 33 of the DAB interface)
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 35
Machine in general
Machine signals
Stop/continue system
(Pin ZC8 of the Euromap 67 interface)
NOTE
If the DZB is the safety device of the injection moulding machine (safety gate, safety doors/
maintenance doors, purge guard) for personal safety with electromechanical tumbler and simple
filing/acknowledgement system, only the relevant signals are displayed. The safety devices
cannot be deactivated.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 36 0515MC
Machine in general
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 37
Machine in general
Pins 6-7: DZB access door - EM 67 channel 1
For transfer to the robot interface "Euromap 67" (floating break contact)
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 38 0515MC
Machine in general
Pin 25: DZB not connected
(wire bridge in dummy plug, if no DZB is connected)! HIGH -> deactivated!
The EMERGENCY STOP function remains activated, with the exception of the check routine
(mandatory check of EMERGENCY STOP button after „Main switch ON“.
CAUTION
The above-mentioned measure must not be carried out in the DAB plug!
CAUTION
The above-mentioned measure must not be carried out in the dummy plug of the IMM!
If no DAB has been connected, the safety device of the IMM (safety door / maintenance
door) is always active and ensures the protection of the mould area.
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 39
Machine in general
Pins 29-30: Deactivate safety door/maintenance door IMM channel 2
Pins 29-30: Deactivate light barriers channel 2
(Hardware circuit channel 2)
Pin 31: DZB access door locked
Full safety is ensured in combination with signals 14-19 and 24. Is used as acknowledgement
that the locking / unlocking procedure of the DAB access door was successful.
HIGH Signal if locked! This signal is created by means of a door position switch with
electromechanical locking (at least 1 kN locking force)!
The acknowledgement signal (integrated in the DAB by means of key-operated switch
1 - activated on the RIGHT side) directly acts on the safety switching device which is then
connected to the IMM (signals to pins 14 - 19 and 24) as soon as the access door has been
closed.
At this moment, the machine can at once initiate locking!
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 40 0515MC
Machine in general
Pin 35: Status "green" (Status information of the DZB safety door)
Signal from the IMM SPC (illuminated pushbutton 1 GREEN - make-contact non-floating, 24
VDC, 0.5 A max.).
Illuminated pushbutton LIT UP: Safety door unlocked, safe access possible
Illuminated pushbutton DARK: Safety door locked
Illuminated pushbutton FLASHING 1 Hz: Login for opening the safety door carried out
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 41
Machine in general
If a dummy plug is connected, the safety-relevant signals (EMERGENCY STOP and safety
devices) at the Euromap 67 handling interface are interrupted (required for safety reasons).
Handling operation is thus not possible!
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 42 0515MC
Machine in general
F01-Sicherheit-Kollission_01
Collision detection
Movements can be made up to this monitoring stroke.
Levelling mounts
Here, the height of the machine levelling mounts can be set. This stroke is added to the current
monitoring stroke of all monitored vertical axes.
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 43
Machine in general
Clamping unit height
Nozzle assembly height A (B, C)
Injection assembly height A (B, C)
Display of the top points of the corresponding axis. If one of the axes exceeds the set
monitoring stroke, the corresponding axis is blocked and an error message will be displayed.
NOTE
The entries on this page are only enabled in user level 15 (customer service IT level).
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 44 0515MC
Machine in general
F01-Sicherheit-Spritzkolben_01
The "Injection volume monitoring" is used to monitor an excessive deviation from the specified
metering stroke.
Injection volume monitoring
With the monitoring being activated, the set hysteresis is automatically corrected to the
standard values after "Load data record" if the standard values were set outside the maximum
range. Additionally, the "Max. monitoring in manual and automatic mode" is activated if it was
deactivated before.
2 different types of injection volume monitoring are available:
• with relative volume hysteresis.
The volume hysteresis is entered in the set unit of the injection plunger.
• with volume hysteresis in percentages.
The volume hysteresis is entered in %.
Min./max. monitoring
Options:
• in automatic mode.
The injection volume is monitored in the automatic mode only.
• in manual and automatic mode.
The injection volume is monitored both in manual and automatic mode.
HB6GB01L
0515MC
Chapter 1 - 45
Machine in general
Adopting the monitoring profile during automatic mode
Options:
• permanent.
The monitoring value is adopted at once when changing the metering volume.
• at the start of metering and decompression.
When changing the metering volume, the monitoring value is adopted at the start of
metering, i.e. a change of the metering volume after the start of metering does not trigger
an "Injection volume monitoring".
Status
Here, the kind of monitoring (min./max.) which responded to any of the injection units (A, B, C)
and injection parameter records (P1, P2) is displayed.
HB6GB01L
Chapter 1 - 46 0515MC
Temperatures
2 Temperatures
F02-Zylinderheizung-Zylindertemp_04
In the "Barrel temperatures" menus, you specify the set and tolerance values for the
temperature control zones of the screw barrel.
The upper part of the display shows an overview of the barrel.
If an error has been recognised by the heating relay, it will be shown by an error symbol in the
respective zone (optional for barrel heating with SOLID state relay).
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 1
Temperatures
Delay Release-Tolerance Barrel heating
Specify the time in [min] after which the injection cylinder is to be released. After the first heating
procedure, the injection cylinder will only be released at the end of the set time "Delay Release
Tolerance Barrel heating".
Explanation: To guarantee an optimum homogeneous heating of the material of the screw
barrel, the release of the injection cylinder is delayed.
Guide value: 5 - 15 min., depending on the barrel size
CAUTION
A barrel heating zone can be switched off by deactivating the program preselection or by
entering the set value "0".
If all barrel heating zones are switched off, the barrel heating is deactivated. For your
information a heating symbol crossed out in red will be displayed in the status bar.
If the barrel heating is deactivated, tolerances will no longer be requested. This will be
necessary if one of the production cycles is exclusively run with the mould heating (LIM).
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 2 0515MC
Temperatures
CAUTION
Inactive temperature sensor inputs have to be bridged.
ED (on-period)
Display of the on-period of the respective zone in [%] (related to the scanning time of the
controller). If the scanning time amounts to 16 s and the on-period is set to 50 %, the on-period
amounts to 8 s and the off-period amounts to 8 s as well.
CAUTION
In the manual mode, material may be injected despite exceeding the tolerance.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 3
Temperatures
Temperature profile decrease/increase
The two function buttons for decrease (arrow down) and increase (arrow up) are used to set the
temperature profile increase/decrease.
By activating the respective function, the temperature profile of the zones shown on this page is
shifted by the value set in “ T in [°C] / [°F]”.
Requirement: The set value of the zone must not be “0”.
CAUTION
If the temperature profile increase results in a situation where the maximum mould temperature
is exceeded, the function is deactivated and a red exclamation mark is shown in the affected
zones.
If the temperature profile increase results in a situation where the maximum mould temperature
is exceeded, the function is deactivated and a red exclamation mark is shown in the affected
zones.
Melt (option)
If there is a melt temperature sensor available, enter the respective temperature in [°C] / [°F] in
the "Melt" column.
Cool (option)
In case there is a cooling ring (material feed section) with temperature probe available, enter the
respective temperature in [°C] / [°F] in the "Cool" column.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 4 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-Zylinderheizung-Reglerwerte_02
In these menus, you enter the parameters for temperature control of the respective temperature
zones of the barrel. You may enter your own values or those established and displayed after
optimisation.
CAUTION
Before starting the optimisation, the heater has to be switched off, i.e. the actual values of the
barrel or mould temperatures have to be nearly identical to the ambient temperature to achieve
an ideal learning result.
Back up the current control parameters (refer to the data records, chapter 25). If the optimisation
does not provide any satisfying results, you careload the former data.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 5
Temperatures
Learning
You select the optimisation by means of this option.
Sensor breakage
The sensor breakage will be indicated here.
1 = Sensor breakage
0 = No sensor breakage
Act. mode%
Enter "1" in the "Sensor breakage behaviour" field to activate the actuator mode in order to
maintain the production despite the sensor breakage. The entry of "Act.mode%" determines the
heating capacity for this zone.
Setting:
0% Zone switched off
10 % Low heating capacity
50 % Half heating capacity
100 % Maximum heating capacity
Learn.stat
The learning status will be displayed in this field. The following values have the following
meaning:
0 Wait until the set values of all zones are big enough. Wait for the correct input of all
zones. In this state, the heating main switch must be in the "OFF" position and must be
switched on as soon as all zones have reached the appropriate set temperatures. You
must enter the set temperatures in this state or preferably beforehand. Any of the set
temperatures has to exceed the current actual temperature of the zone by at least 70 °C /
158 °F.
1 Wait until the starting temperature has been determined. Initialisation of all values.
2 Switching on the heating capacity to 100 %. After the temperature (set value = 60 °C /
140 °F) has been reached, the first point for the inflectional tangent (= slew rate) will be
saved. - Switch over to status 3.
3 The gradient of the inflectional tangent up to the temperature (set value = 50 °C / 122 °F)
will be established. In addition, checking of the inflectional tangent by establishing the
real point of inflection and the values for the point of inflection no. 3. Switching off (2-step
controller) or cooling of the distance (3-step controller) and calculation of the gradient of
the inflectional tangent takes place.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 6 0515MC
Temperatures
4 Establishment of the temperature maximum (max. overshoots) after having switched off. -
Switch over to status 8.
7 Calculation of the parameters and the scanning time.
8 If there is a 3-step controller, the cooling parameters will be calculated here.
10 Optimisation correctly terminated. End of optimisation and automatic start of the
controlling to set temperature with the former controller parameters, or by pressing the
"Acceptance" switch for each zone, the new parameters will control to set temperature.
20 Error in the optimisation process
- Set temperature too low.
- The switch-off temperature of 50 °C / 122 °F (set value) has not been reached.
- Overflow of the internal counter due to time-out. In case of error, switch off the
optimisation and restart later after the temperatures have cooled down.
P- Fraction
Proportional action factor [%] Set and actual value each
I-Fraction
Reset time [s] Set and actual value each
D- Fraction
Rate time [s] Set and actual value each
CAUTION
The set values will be used by the controller. The actual values have been gained from the
optimisation.
Scan.time
Scanning time [s] (is derived from the optimisation).
Acceptance
Use this selection to accept the set values from the optimisation.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 7
Temperatures
Tol.range C
Tolerance range [°C] / [°F].
The tolerance limits are expanded by the value entered here. This tolerance range spread is
active in the manual mode and during the first ten minutes after changing over to the automatic
mode.
During the first ten minutes of operation, an expanded tolerance range is valid to be able to
compensate for measurement inaccuracies.
Corr Tmp C
Correction temperature [°C] / [°F]
In this field, the temperature measured via an external measuring instrument (e.g. 205 °C /
401 °F) will be entered.
Correction
Use this field to calculate and send the correction value to the control unit.
Act C
Actual temperature [°C] / [°F].
The corrected actual temperature is indicated here. The temperature has to correspond to the
entered "Corr Tmp C" after correction.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 8 0515MC
Temperatures
Important information on the optimisation
CAUTION
After finishing the optimisation procedure, the controlling on the basis of the new set values
starts automatically. If the parameters are not automatically transferred, undesirable actions
(e.g. overshooting) might occur.
Select set values within the range of temperatures applied during normal operation.
Ensure that all sensors provide correct temperature values during optimisation.
If one of the control zones heats up faster than the neighbouring zones,
• the control parameters are probably incorrect or
• they depend on the heating section or the arrangement of the zones.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 9
Temperatures
F02-Zylinderheizung-Konfiguration_01
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 10 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-Zylinderheizung-Überwachungen_01
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 11
Temperatures
Monitoring of the individual heating zone
In this version, the learning and monitoring process can be activated for each individual heating
zone. An error is displayed separately for each heating zone and a more exact diagnosis will
become possible.
Learning
With this program preselection, the current is recorded for all monitored heating zones. With
activating this program, a signal is sent to all monitored solid-state relays. All solid-state relays
are switched to full load for the time of the current registration. The program preselection is
automatically deactivated after the current registration has been finished.
Reset
With this program preselection, a pulse for resetting the error is sent for all available solid-
state relays. The program preselection will be deactivated again after having reset the error. If,
however, the error still exists, the error message is set again.
Monitoring
With these program preselections, the monitoring of the solid-state relay for each heating
zone is activated, the learning process is also carried out only for heating zones with activated
monitoring.
This program can only be activated if the monitoring of the individual zones has been released.
When monitoring the complete heating group, the programs do not exist and all available solid-
state relays will be monitored.
Status
This line shows the current error of the solid-state relays for each heating zone. When
monitoring the complete group, a separate evaluation for each zone is not possible and thus an
error will be displayed for all monitored heating zones. When monitoring the individual heating
zones, a more exact diagnosis of each individual heating zone can be made.
Status description:
0 no error
1 Error given on zone
2 Error undervoltage or thyristor does not switch
3 Error heating capacity too low
4 Error solid-state relay overtemperature or measured current exceeds monitoring range of
the device
5 Error thyristor short-circuit
99 unknown error
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 12 0515MC
Temperatures
Status display Solid-state relay
Two light emitting diodes (one red and one green) are on the solid-state relay to indicate the
device status.
Both light emitting diodes are flashing at the same time:
No current set value has been recorded or the last learning process was not correctly
completed.
Red light emitting diode:
A fault of this heating zone or the solid-state relay was detected, the light emitting diode is
cleared during a reset.
Both light emitting diodes are flashing once alternatively: Learning process carried out and
completed, stored current set value is now monitored.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 13
Temperatures
F02-Werkzeugheizung-Werkzeugtemp_03
In the "Mould heating" menu, you specify the set and toerlance values for the temperature
control zones of the mould.
Mould heating
When activating this program preselection, the mould heating will be switched on or off using
the mould heating switch.
Only if the "Motor stop and Heater stop" menu has been activated, will the heater be switched
off for a switched-off drive motor. The decrease of the mould heating will be carried out together
with the decrease of the barrel heating.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 14 0515MC
Temperatures
CAUTION
To obtain a better overview, an info text can be assigned to each mould heating zone. This info
text can be entered in user level 20 only.
On
An activation of the program preselection will activate the respective mould heating zone.
Set 2 C (option)
Enter the set value for the "Hot runner start-up circuit (option)" or the "Variothermal process
control (option)" for each temperature sensor used. If the "Hot runner start-up circuit" or the
"Variothermal process control" is active, the "Set 2" colour is changed to "magenta".
Start-up circuit hot runner (option)Enter a set value (Set 2) for the start-up circuit for each
temperature sensor used. This set value is then active until there is a change-over to production
temperature (Set). The change-over between start-up temperature and production temperature
can be made dependent on cycle or time (see chapter 18, Start-up programs).
Prerequisite is that the start-up temperature (Set 2) is always higher than the production
temperature (Set). In the automatic mode, the start-up circuit is active until the production
temperature has been reached. At the end of the start-up circuit and after having reached again
the production temperature, the tolerance expansion is activated again for the hot runner.
CAUTION
Inactive temperature sensor inputs have to be bridged.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 15
Temperatures
Act C (Actual values Temperature control zones)
Display of the current temperature of the respective temperature control zone of the mould. In
the graphics above the actual value will be represented in a bar diagram.
green = Actual values within tolerance
blue = Insufficient temperature
red = Excess temperature
red arrow = + tolerance
blue arrow = - tolerance
ED (on-period)
Display of the on-period of the respective zone in [%] (related to the scanning time of the
controller). If the scanning time amounts to 16 s and the on-period is set to 50 %, the on-period
amounts to 8 s and the off-period amounts to 8 s as well.
CAUTION
In the manual mode, material may be injected despite exceeding the tolerance.
CAUTION
In the manual mode, material may be injected despite falling short of the tolerance, if the
injection unit has gone back.
Low. C (Decrease)
Enter the lowered temperature in [°C] / [°F] in this field. The decrease will be activated pressing
the mould heating switch at the operator panel or via the selected program "Decrease Heater
for Motor Stop".
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 16 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-Werkzeugheizung-Allgemein_02
Soft start
If the mould is to be heated up slowly, select the "Soft start" option. After all zones have reached
the starting temperature the start-up time (soft start time ) will start to run. At the end of this time
the zones will be heated up to the preset set value.
Set the desired start-up time (soft start time) for the mould heating in minutes in the right input
field.
The currently expired start-up time (soft start time) can be seen on the left of this input field.
CAUTION
If hot runner controllers are connected via the CAN bus interface (EUROMAP 66-2), the
"Softstart" function cannot be selected.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 17
Temperatures
Starting temperature
Enter the desired temperature for the soft start in this field.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 18 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-Werkzeugheizung-Übersicht_02
In the „Mould heating overview“ menu, the status of 48 mould heating zones is indicated (
(temp.ok...green, overtemperature...red, undertemperature...blue). In addition, the set value can
be changed on this page.
If the heating relay detects an error, an error symbol is displayed at the respective zone (option
with mould heating equipped with SOLID state relay).
The two function buttons for decrease (arrow down) and increase (arrow up) are used to set the
temperature profile for increase/decrease.
By activating the respective function, the temperature profile of the zones shown on this page is
shifted by the value set in “ T in [°C] / [°F]”.
Requirements: The set value of the zone is not “0” and program preselection “ T” of the zone
is activated.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 19
Temperatures
CAUTION
If the temperature profile increase results in a situation where the maximum mould temperature
is exceeded, the function is deactivated and a red exclamation mark is shown in the affected
zones.
If the temperature profile increase results in a situation where the maximum mould temperature
is exceeded, the function is deactivated and a red exclamation mark is shown in the affected
zones.
Press the 3 buttons to activate, deactivate or invert the program preselection “ T” for all shown
zones.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 20 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-Werkzeugheizung-Reglerwerte_02
In these menus, you enter the parameters for the temperature control of the respective
temperature zones of the mould. You may enter your own values or those established and
displayed after optimisation.
CAUTION
Before starting the optimisation the heater has to be switched off.
Back up the current control parameters (refer to the data records, chapter 25). If the optimisation
does not provide any satisfying results, you careload the former data.
Learning
You select the optimisation by means of this option.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 21
Temperatures
Sensor breakage
The sensor breakage will be indicated here.
1 = Sensor breakage
0 = No sensor breakage
Act. mode%
Enter "1" in the "Sensor breakage behaviour" field to activate the actuator mode in order to
maintain the production despite the sensor breakage. The entry of "Act.mode%" determines the
heating capacity for this zone.
Setting:
0% Zone switched off
10 % Low heating capacity
50 % Half heating capacity
100 % Maximum heating capacity
Learn.stat
The learning status will be displayed in this field. The following values have the following
meaning:
0 Wait until the set values of all zones are big enough. Wait for the correct input of all
zones. In this state, the heating main switch must be in the "OFF" position and must be
switched on as soon as all zones have reached the appropriate set temperatures. You
must enter the set temperatures in this state or preferably beforehand. Any of the set
temperatures has to exceed the current actual temperature of the zone by at least 70 °C /
158 °F.
1 Wait until the starting temperature has been determined. Initialisation of all values.
2 Switching on the heating capacity to 100 %. After the temperature (set value = 60 °C /
140 °F) has been reached, the first point for the inflectional tangent (= slew rate) will be
saved. - Switch over to status 3.
3 The gradient of the inflectional tangent up to the temperature (set value = 50 °C / 122 °F)
will be established. In addition, checking of the inflectional tangent by establishing the
real point of inflection and the values for the point of inflection no. 3. Switching off (2-step
controller) or cooling of the distance (3-step controller) and calculation of the gradient of
the inflectional tangent takes place.
4 Establishment of the temperature maximum (max. overshoots) after having switched off. -
Switch over to status 8.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 22 0515MC
Temperatures
7 Calculation of the parameters and the scanning time.
8 If there is a 3-step controller, the cooling parameters will be calculated here.
10 Optimisation correctly terminated. End of optimisation and automatic start of the
controlling to set temperature with the former controller parameters, or by pressing the
"Acceptance" switch for each zone, the new parameters will control to set temperature.
20 Error in the optimisation process
- Set temperature too low.
- The switch-off temperature of 50 °C / 122 °F (set value) has not been reached.
- Overflow of the internal counter due to time-out. In case of error, switch off the
optimisation and restart later after the temperatures have cooled down.
In case of error, switch off the optimisation and restart later after the temperatures have cooled
down.
P- Fraction
Proportional action factor [%] Set and actual value each
I-Fraction
Reset time [s] Set and actual value each
D- Fraction
Rate time [s] Set and actual value each
CAUTION
The set values will be used by the controller. The actual values have been gained from the
optimisation.
Scan.time.
Scanning time [s] (is derived from the optimisation).
Acceptance
Use this selection to accept the set values from the optimisation.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 23
Temperatures
Tol.range C
Tolerance range [°C ] / [°F]
The tolerance limits are expanded by the value entered here. This tolerance range spread is
active in the manual mode and during the first ten minutes after having changed over to the
automatic mode.
Since there will naturally be larger variations in temperature during the start-up phase than
in the stable operating state, an expanded tolerance range will be active during the first ten
minutes.
Corr Tmp C
Correction temperature [°C] / [°F]
In this field, the temperature measured via an external measuring instrument (e.g. 205 °C /
401 °F) will be entered.
Correction
Use this field to calculate and send the correction value to the control unit.
Act C
Actual temperature [°C] / [°F]
The corrected actual temperature is indicated here. The temperature has to correspond to the
entered "Corr Tmp C" after correction.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 24 0515MC
Temperatures
Important information on the optimisation
CAUTION
After finishing the optimisation procedure, the controlling on the basis of the new set values
starts automatically. If the parameters are not automatically transferred, undesirable actions
(e.g. overshooting) might occur.
Select set values within the range of temperatures applied during normal operation.
Ensure that all sensors provide correct temperature values during optimisation.
If one of the control zones heats up faster than the neighbouring zones, the control parameters
are probably incorrect.
To optimise the temperature control, proceed as follows:
• Switch off the heater ("Heater off" key)
• Enter the set values of the temperature control zones on the pages "Mou. Para 1" and
Mou. Para 2". The set values have to exceed the actual values by at least 70 °C / 158 °F!
• Select the "Learning" fied
• Switch on the heater ("Heater on" key).
The optimisation starts. Depending on the machine, this procedure make take an hour or even
longer.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 25
Temperatures
F02-Werkzeugheizung-Konfiguration_01
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 26 0515MC
Temperatures
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 27
Temperatures
F02-Temperiergeräte-Temperiergeräte_02
If one or more temperature control units is / are connected to your machine, you may enter the
set and the tolerance values via the input fields in this menu.
On
An activation of the program preselection will activate the respective heater.
The activated temperature control units are switched on or off depending on the set "OnMODE".
OnMODE
0 Activated temperature control units are switched on using the barrel heating switch.
1 Activated temperature control units are switched on using the drive.
2 Activated temperature control units are always switched on.
3 Activated temperaure control units are switched on by the external device
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 28 0515MC
Temperatures
Set
Enter the set value of the temperature control unit. The actual value is displayed below. In the
graphics above the actual value will be represented in a bar diagram
green = Actual values within tolerance
blue = Insufficient temperature
red = Excess temperature
red arrow = + tolerance
blue arrow = - tolerance
+Tol.
You may specify by how many degrees the selected set value may be exceeded.
When exceeding the tolerance, the "Tolerance Temperature control units" error message will
immediately be displayed and the time limit will be started.
CAUTION
The tolerances directly set at the temperature control unit will not be monitored by the machine.
-Tol.
You may specify by how many degrees the selected set value may be fallen short of.
When falling short of the tolerance, the "Tolerance Temperature control units" error message will
immediately be displayed and the time limit will be started.
Low.
Enter the lowered temperature in [°C] / [°F] in this field. The decrease will be activated pressing
the barrel heating switch at the operator panel or via the selected program "Decrease Heater for
Motor Stop".
Q
Display of the current flow rate of the temperature control unit, as far as it is supported by the
temperature control unit.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 29
Temperatures
F02-Temperiergeräte-Allgemein_01
Monitoring time
Input of the monitoring time and indication of the time already expired in [s].
If an error occurs at the temperature control unit, the monitoring time will be started. At the end
of this time, the machine cycle will be stopped before clamping force build-up.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 30 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-Temperiergeräte-Konfiguration-analog_01
If temperature control units are connected to your machine via an analog interface, this menu
can be used to scale the temperature control units.
Temperature range
Input of the temperature range according to the name plate of the heater; e.g.: 0-400 —> input
400.
corresponds to
Input of the voltage range according to the name plate of the heater; e.g.: 0-10 V —> input 10.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 31
Temperatures
Max. operating temperature
Input of the maximum operating temperature range. Corresponds to the input limit at the user
level.
Max. temp
Input of the maximum temperature. When reaching this temperature, the temperature control
unit will be switched off. The temperature control unit may be reactivated by switching on and off
the mould heating switch.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 32 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-Temperiergeräte-Konfiguration-digital_03
If temperature control units are connected to your machine via a serial interface with TTY/CL or
EUROMAP 66 communication protocol (20 mA interface), this menu can be used to scale the
temperature control units.
The device interface (9-pole D-sub socket, pin 2 and 3) was configured according to the TTY/CL
communication protocol:
(4,800 bauds, 8 data bits, 1 start and stop bit, even parity).
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 33
Temperatures
Cooling, switch-off
Cool the temperature control unit down to pump after-running temperature and then switch off
the temperature control unit.
Safety discharge
Cool the temperature control unit below safety limit (open system) and extract heating medium
and then switch off the temperature control unit.
Network name
This setting is preset in the factory and cannot be changed.
"CAN-OPEN" will be displayed on heaters which are connected via the EUROMAP 66
communication protocol.
Note
The network name is stored in the service data record.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 34 0515MC
Temperatures
Device address
TTY/CL communication protocol: Enter the device address. This entry has to correspond to the
setting on the respective temperature control unit.
EUROMAP 66: Can-Open node number. This setting is preset in the factory and must not be
changed.
This entry has to correspond to the setting on the respective temperature control unit.
Mould type
TTY/CL communication protocol: Enter the mould type to assign different control parameter
records. Any mould type from 0 to 10 may be entered.
EUROMAP 66: without meaning
Explanation of the mould types:
0 freely selectable parameter record (automatic optimisation)
1 Parameter record 1, small mould
to
10 Parameter record 10, large mould
Max. temp
Input of the maximum temperature. When reaching this temperature, the temperature control
unit will be switched off. The temperature control unit may be reactivated by switching on and off
the mould heating switch.
Internal sensor
Control is carried out via the internal sensor of the temperature control unit (Main_Line_Mode).
External sensor
Control is carried out via en external sensor (External_Sensor_Mode).
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 35
Temperatures
CAUTION
Proper working of the external sensor for the TTY/CL interface is only possible in combination
with a Wittmann temperature control unit. Additionally, "Wittmann" must be set as the telegram.
Telegram: default
Telegram: Wittmann
Telegram: Regloplas
The external sensor can be used for TTY/CL interfaces in combination with a Wittmann
temperature control unit and the setting: "Wittmann Telegram". With all other interfaces and
heaters, use setting „Telegram: default“. There is no external sensor installed.
Log: alternating
The system switches between the default and extension log.
Log: default
The temperature and the duty cycle time are read and transferred.
Log: extension
The temperature, the duty cycle time and the flow rate are read and transferred.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 36 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-Temperiergeräte-Diagnose_01
If temperature control units are connected to your machine via a serial interface with TTY/CL
communication protocol (20 mA interface) or EUROMAP 66 communication protocol, a detailed
information concerning the individual temperature control units is displayed via this menu.
CAUTION
A detailed alarm evaluation will only be displayed for the temperature control unit displayed
under "Diagnosis for temperature control unit no.".
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 37
Temperatures
Diagnosis for temperature control unit no.
Enter the "Temperature control unit no" to have the status and the alarms of the respective
temperature control unit displayed.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 38 0515MC
Temperatures
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 39
Temperatures
F02-Temperiergeräte-COM_02
If temperature control units are connected to your machine via a serial interface with TTY/CL
communication protocol (20 mA interface) or EUROMAP 66 with CanOpen communication
protocol, information concerning the COM parameters is displayed via this menu.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 40 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-Temperiergeräte-VARIOMOULD_01
As is known, the cavity surface precisely appears when injecting plastic material into a hot
mould which, on the one hand, is of advantage for the parts quality. However, thermoplastics
must be cooled down again to low temperatures for hardening. On the other hand, this
circumstance normally causes longer cycle times.
When using BFMOLDTM, mould areas near the cavity will be heated. This means that both
heating and cooling of the cavity surface can be made very quickly and energy-saving when
using water. For this, special temperature control units, such as WITTMANN TEMPRO plus
C160 VARIO will be used.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 41
Temperatures
Heating time Variotherm process
Entry of the heating time for the temperature control unit. At the end of this time, cooling of the
temperature control unit is started.
When preselecting "Stop signal, Heating with" -> "Start Injection" or "Change-over to holding
pressure"
Input of the monitoring time. In case the monitoring time ends before "Start Injection" or
"Change-over to holding pressure, the "Delay time stop heating" will be started.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 42 0515MC
Temperatures
2.3.8.1 TEMPRO
F02-Temperiergeräte-TEMPRO_GB00
This menu is used to preset the set values for the integrated Wittmann TEMPRO. The
description of settings and error numbers can be found in the Wittmann TEMPRO manual.
Note
The TEMPRO setting data can be stored in the product data record (see chapter 25.3 Data
records / Integration Wittmann periphery).
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 43
Temperatures
F02-Temperiergeräte-TEMPROKonfig_GB01
IP address
Enter the IP address of the Wittmann TEMPRO.
Info
This field displays the version number of the UpdateControl. The UpdateControl is responsible
for establishing the connection and displaying the TEMPRO on the machines.
on
An activation of the program preselection will activate the respective temperature control unit.
The activated temperature control units are switched on or off depending on the set "OnMODE".
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 44 0515MC
Temperatures
Note
If a TEMPRO circuit has be deactivated, the error analysis of the respective TEMPRO circuit is
disconnected, i.e. no display of or reaction on a TEMPRO alarm (alarms 1193 to 1195) will be
given.
OnMODE
0 Activated temperature control units are switched on using the barrel heating switch.
1 Activated temperature control units are switched on using the drive.
2 Activated temperature control units are always switched on.
3 Activated temperaure control units are switched on by the external device
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 45
Temperatures
F02-Temperierzonen-Temperierzonen_0!
In this menu, you specify the set and tolerance values for the independent temperature control
zones.
• Heating circuits: an independent group of heating zones which do not belong to any
existing group;
• Cooling circuits: an indenpendent group of cooling circuits;
• Monitoring circuits: an independent group of temperature monitoring zones without
heating or cooling function.
The individual zones are released and assigned to a group according to the required function.
This required assignment can change according to the machine.
Heating circuits
An indenpendent group of heating circuits. The heating zones can be recognised by a red text
and the red numbering of the individual zones.
When activating this program preselection, the heating circuint will be switched on or off using
the heating switch.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 46 0515MC
Temperatures
Cooling circuits
An indenpendent group of cooling circuits. The cooling zones can be recognised by a blue text
and the blue numbering of the individual zones.
When activating this program preselection, the cooling circuit will be switched on or off using the
heating switch.
Monitororing circuits
An indenpendent group of temperature monitoring circuits. The monitoring zones can be
recognised by a magenta text and the magenta numbering of the individual zones.
When activating this program preselection, the monitoring circuit will be switched on or off using
the heating switch.
CAUTION
To obtain a better overview, an info text can be assigned to each zone. This info text can be
entered in user level 20 only.
CAUTION
Inactive temperature sensor inputs have to be bridged.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 47
Temperatures
Actual C (actual values for heating, cooling, and monitoring circuits)
Display of the current temperature of the respective zone. In the graphics above the actual
value will be represented in a bar diagram
green = Actual values within tolerance
blue = Insufficient temperature
red = Excess temperature
red arrow = + tolerance
blue arrow = - tolerance
ED (on-period)
Display of the on-period of the respective zone in [%] (related to the scanning time of the
controller). If the scanning time amounts to 16 s and the on-period is set to 50 %, the on-period
amounts to 8 s and the off-period amounts to 8 s as well.
Cooling circuits display a negative on-period.
Low. C (Decrease)
Enter the lowered temperature in [°C] / [°F] in this field.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 48 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-Temperierzonen-Reglerwerte_02
Use these menus to enter the parameters for the temperature control of the respective heating
and/or cooling zones. You may enter your own values or those established and displayed after
optimisation.
For the monitoring zones, no adjustment of the controller parameters is required.
CAUTION
Before starting the optimisation, the heating has to be switched off, i.e. the actual values of the
heating and/or cooling zones have to be nearly identical to the ambient temperature to achieve
an ideal learning result.
Back up the current control parameters (refer to the data record management chap. 25). If the
optimisation does not provide any satisfying results, you careload the former data.
Learning
You select the optimisation by means of this option.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 49
Temperatures
Sensor breakage
The sensor breakage will be indicated here.
1= Sensor breakage
0= No sensor breakage
Actuator mode
To be able to maintain the production despite the sensor breakage, the heating capacity the
heating of this zone is to be continued with must be stated here.
For cooling circuits, a negative actuator mode must be entered.
Learn.stat
The learning status will be displayed in this field. The following values have the following
meaning:
0 Wait until the set values of all zones are big enough. Wait for the correct input of all
zones. In this state, the heating main switch must be in the "OFF" position and must be
switched on as soon as all zones have reached the appropriate set temperatures. You
must enter the set temperatures in this state or preferably beforehand. Any of the set
temperatures has to exceed the current actual temperature of the zone by at least 70 °C /
158 °F.
1 Wait until the starting temperature has been determined. Initialisation of all values.
2 Switching on the heating capacity to 100 %. After the temperature (set value = 60 °C /
140 °F) has been reached, the first point for the inflectional tangent (= slew rate) will be
saved. - Switch over to status 3.
3 The gradient of the inflectional tangent up to the temperature (set value = 50 °C / 122 °F)
will be established. In addition, checking of the inflectional tangent by establishing the
real point of inflection and the values for the point of inflection no. 3. Switching off (2-step
controller) or cooling of the distance (3-step controller) and calculation of the gradient of
the inflectional tangent takes place.
4 Establishment of the temperature maximum (max. overshoots) after having switched off. -
Switch over to status 8.
7 Calculation of the parameters and the scanning time.
8 If there is a 3-step controller, the cooling parameters will be calculated here.
10 Optimisation correctly terminated. End of optimisation and automatic start of the
controlling to set temperature with the former controller parameters, or by pressing the
"Acceptance" switch for each zone, the new parameters will control to set temperature.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 50 0515MC
Temperatures
20 Error in the optimisation process
- Set temperature too low.
- The switch-off temperature of 50 °C / 122 °F (set value) has not been reached.
- Overflow of the internal counter due to time-out. In case of error, switch off the
optimisation and restart later after the temperatures have cooled down.
P- Fraction
Proportional action factor [%] Set and actual value each
I-Fraction
Reset time [s] Set and actual value each
D- Fraction
Rate time [s] Set and actual value each
CAUTION
The set values will be used by the controller. The actual values have been gained from the
optimisation.
Scan.time.
Scanning time [s] (is derived from the optimisation).
Acceptance
Use this selection to accept the set values from the optimisation.
Tol.range C
Tolerance range [°C] / [°F].
The tolerance limits are expanded by the value entered here. This tolerance range spread is
active in the manual mode and during the first ten minutes after changing over to the automatic
mode.
During the first ten minutes of operation, an expanded tolerance range is valid to be able to
compensate for measurement inaccuracies.
Corr Tmp C
Correction temperature [°C] / [°F]
In this field, the temperature measured via an external measuring instrument (e.g. 205 °C /
401 °F) will be entered.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 51
Temperatures
F02-Temperierzonen-Überwachng_0!
This menu is used to set the machine behaviour during errors caused by the temperature
control zones. This assignment can be set separately for the heating, cooling, and monitoring
zones.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 52 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-Trockner_0!
In this menu, enter the set values for the integrated Wittmann dryer. For a description of the
settings and error numbers, please refer to the Wittmann dryer manual.
Error number
0-99 Dryer error (see Wittmann dryer manual)
200 Dryer communication error (no connection)
255 No error
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 53
Temperatures
F02-WFC_Übersicht_02
An overview of the WFC zones (Water Flow Control) is displayed under status. The current
state of the WFC zones can be seen here. Pressing the button to the right of the status display
causes a direct change to the monitoring menu.
Outside - tolerance ... BLUE
Temperature ok. ... green
Overtemperature ... red
max. working area exceeded
Diagnosis muxx board (WFC single step mode), channel stopped
The statuses are stored in the automatic mode and represented in this menu.
The errors are acknowledged by pressing the key „Cycle start“ (automatic mode) or the key
„Drive Start“ (manual mode).
The valve circuit configured for the respective group (option).
Explanation of the valve circuit statuses see chapter 2.6.5 WFC valve circuits.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 54 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-WFC_Überwachung_02
In this menu, he WFC (Water Flow Control) zones can be activated and set value specified.
No monitoring of WFC
The tolerances for the respective WFC group are not evaluated.
Info
To obtain a better overview, an info text can be assigned to each WFC zone. This info text is
also displayed on the overview page.
On
An activation of the program preselection will activate the respective WFC zone.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 55
Temperatures
Set
Enter the set value of the WFC zone. The actual value is displayed below. In the graphics above
the actual value will be represented in a bar diagram
green = Actual values within tolerance
blue = Outside - tolerance
red = Outside + tolerance
red arrow = + tolerance
blue arrow = - tolerance
+/-Tol.
You may specify by how many degrees (or l/min) the selected set value may be exceeded (or
fallen short of).
When exceeding the tolerance, an error message will be displayed and the machine stopped at
cycle end.
Offset
Entry of a correction value.
Status
The valve circuit (option) configured for the respective group is displayed above the zone
information. The valve circuit statuses are displayed to the right. Explanation of the valve circuit
statuses see chapter 2.6.5 WFC valve circuits.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 56 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-WFC_Kanal1_02
Info
To obtain a better overview, an info text can be assigned to each WFC group. This info text is
also displayed on the channel page and the overview page.
Unit
Here setting is made as to whether the WFC group displays a temperature or the flow.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 57
Temperatures
Assignment Temperature control unit
Assignment of the temperature control unit connected to the machine via the interface. Here,
the zone number is entered.
corresponds to
Input of the voltage range according to the name plate of the temperature control unit;
e.g. min. 0, max. 10 V
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 58 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-WFC_Konfiguration_01
In this menu, the configuration of the error analysis from the temperature and flow channels will
be made.
Additionally, a single step mode can be activated for the diagnosis of the muxx board.
Diagnostic
Start diagnosis muxx board (WFC single step mode)
Activating the program preselection will activate the single step mode. Additionally, a button for
switching on the the next channel and addresses are displayed.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 59
Temperatures
F02-WFC_Ventilkreise_01
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 60 0515MC
Temperatures
Setting for each valve circuit
Info
To obtain a better overview, an info text can be assigned to each WFC valve circuit.
Operating mode
The setting of operating mode for each valve circuit is effective only if the "Operating mode of all
valve circuits" was set to "Automode".
Possible settings:
• Off
The supply and return flow of the respective valve circuit is blocked.
• Automode
The operating mode is set by the respective WFC group (see "Assignment of groups" in
the right status display).
• Cooling mode
The respective WFC group is switched to cooling
• Heating mode
The respective WFC group is switched to heating
• Safety mode
The safety mode setting has utmost priority, i.e. it is independent of the "Operating mode
of all valve circuits" setting.
Priority
The priority activation is signalled by highlighting the text.
The priority is active if the following settings were made:
• Valve circuits mus be set to Automode
• "No monitoring of WFC" of the assigned WFC group must not be activated (see
chapter 2.6.2 WFC / Monitoring)
• "Activate cooling circuit" of the assigned WFC group must not be activated (see
chapter 2.6.2 WFC / Monitoring)
Possible settings:
• none
• Cooling.
Switching is made to cooling if a WFC zone within this valve circuit is smaller than/equal
to the flow temperature.
• Heating
Switching is made to heating if a WFC zone within this valve circuit is greater than the
flow temperature.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 61
Temperatures
Safety mode
Setting is made as to which valves remain open in the safety mode. The safety mode is
activated if
• the safety mode of all valve circuits or of the respective valve circuit is activated manually.
• if a safety device in the mould area (e.g. safety gate) is opened.
Note: If a temperature control unit is installed in the valve circuit, it is set to "Start suction".
Possible settings:
• Off
Supply and return flow for heating and cooling circuit are blocked.
• Heating circuit
Supply and return flow for heating circuit are opened.
Assignment of groups
Display of the assigned WFC groups for the respective valve circuit. Assignment is done under
WFC channel 1 or 2 (see chapter 2.6.3).
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 62 0515MC
Temperatures
Valve circuit diagnosis
Heating circuit closed / safety mode active and heating circuit closed
Heating circuit opened / safety mode active and heating circuit opened
Cooling circuit closed / safety mode active and cooling circuit closed
Cooling circuit opened / safety mode active and cooling circuit opened
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 63
Temperatures
F02-FLOWCON_Anzeige_GB00
This menu is used to preset the set values for the integrated Wittmann FLOWCON. The
description of settings and error numbers can be found in the Wittmann FLOWCON manual.
Note
The FLOWCON setting data can be stored in the product data record (see chapter 25.3 Data
records / Integration Wittmann periphery).
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 64 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-FLOWCON_Konfiguration_GB01
Info
This field displays the version number of the UpdateControl. The UpdateControl is responsible
for establishing the connection and displaying the FLOWCON on the machines.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 65
Temperatures
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 66 0515MC
Temperatures
F02-Gammaflux_Anzeige_GB00
This menu is used to preset the set values for the integrated Gammaflux. The description of
settings and error numbers can be found in the Gammaflux manual.
Note
The operation of the Gammaflux surface is locked in user level 90 (Logout). You must at least
have user level 30 (user can change all data from the product data record) to be able to operate
the Gammaflux via the IMM.
HB6GB02L
0515MC
Chapter 2 - 67
Temperatures
F02-Gammaflux_Konfiguration_GB00
Note
VNC is used to establish the connection to the Gammaflux (tested with Real VNC® Server
5.2.1). The Real VNC server is not pre-installed on the Gammaflux. Please contact the
Gammaflux manufacturer.
When installing the VNC server, the password query must be deactivated. This can also be set
after having installed the VNC server.
HB6GB02L
Chapter 2 - 68 0515MC
Clamping unit
3 Clamping unit
3.1 General
3.1.1 General / Page 1
F03-Allgemein-Seite1_03
In the "Clamping unit" menu, you enter the set values for the closing movement of two fixed and
three stroke positions which may be activated. You can assign separate speeds, strokes, and
forces to these stroke markers.
Enter the set values for the speeds in [mm/s]/[inch/s], the set values for the strokes in [mm]/
[inch], and the set values for the forces in [kN]/[shtn]. The appropriate maximum values can be
read off next to the diagram axes.
Open (example)
Up to 25 mm (1.96 inch), the
movement will be performed at a speed
464.0 464.0 636.0 663.0 464.0 of 150 mm/s (5.90 inch/s) and at a
350.0 90.0 50.0 40.0 10.0 force of 10 kN (1.12 shtn). For the first
60.0 70.0 89.0 70.0 10.0 stroke (which has to be entered), you
should make the clamping unit open at
a smaller force than for the rest of the opening stroke.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 1
Clamping unit
In the example, two of the three strokes which may be activated have been selected. The
clamping platen is opened at speeds and forces which may be set in stages while the strokes
increase.
• Up to 490 mm (19.29 inch), the movement will be performed at a speed of 450 mm/s
(17.71 inch/s) and at a force of 85 kN (9.95 shtn).
• Up to 510 mm (20.07 inch), the movement will be performed at a speed of 350 mm/s
(13.77 inch/s) and at a force of 70 kN (7.900 shtn).
• Up to 550 mm (21.65 inch) (Mould is opened), the movement will be performed at a
speed of 150 mm/s (5.91 inch/s) and at a force of 30 kN (3.38 shtn).
Close (example)
The velocity profile for the clamping procedure
is similiar to that of the opening procedure of the
445.0 636.0 636.0 445.0 125.0
clamping unit. It is important that you reduce the
120.0 100.0 20.0 20.0 0.0
speeds in stages and set increasingly shorter
80.0 92.0 92.0 70.0 5.0 strokes the more the clamping unit approaches
the closed status.
CAUTION
Move the clamping unit in the mould safety zone at reduced force (in our example 20 kN / 2.30
shtn) and a very low speed to prevent the mould from being damaged.
Rapid opening
Rapid closing
If the machine is equipped with the "Rapid closing / opening" option, a second pump will also be
activated for high speeds. At present no parallel movement of the ejector is possible. (Example:
if the opening movement is not additionally made with the second pump, a movement of the
ejector parallel to the opening movement is not possible).
Addition of the second pump is displayed by two yellow arrows above the diagram. The limit
value at which the second pump is added is displayed above the diagram under vmax2.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 2 0515MC
Clamping unit
Mould protection programs
Starting from stroke marker "Mould safety device Stroke", the movement of the clamping unit is
monitored. If the clamping unit stops inbetween this stroke position, the mould protection time
will run. If the clamping plate does not move within this period, the mould protection program
selected in "Mould safety strokes" will automatically be activated. 10 mould protection programs
are available. Program "0" just interrupts the closing movement, programs 1 through 9 carry out
the respective number of opening strokes. A maximum of 9 multiple strokes may be selected.
CAUTION
In the case of vertical machines, the mould safety strokes are limited with "1".
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 3
Clamping unit
Mould safety device Stroke [mm] / [inch]
Entry of the mould safety device stroke. The set mould safety device stroke is shown in the
diagram by a red vertical line.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 4 0515MC
Clamping unit
F03-Allgemein-Seite2_04
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 5
Clamping unit
Stroke Spring-weighed mould [mm] / [inch]
This set value determines the relative stroke of the spring assembly where the activation of the
force and speed for the spring-weighed mould will start.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 6 0515MC
Clamping unit
Time Open safety gate [s] (option pneumatic safety gate)
This set value determines the time for opening the safety gate on the operating side. Use this
value to specify how far the safety gate will be opened.
Open / close safety gate speed [%] (option electrical safety gate)
This set value will determine the speed with which the electrical safety gate is opened and
closed with in the setting mode, the manual mode, and the automatic mode.
Safety gate opening stroke [mm] / [in] (option electrical safety gate)
This set value determines the opening stroke of the electrical safety gate in the manual and
automatic mode. In the manual mode, the safety gate is completely opened by pressing the key
"Open safety gate" again. In the setting mode, this entry has no effect. I.e., the safety gate will
always be opened completely.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 7
Clamping unit
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 8 0515MC
Clamping unit
F03-Allgemein-Werkzeugsicherung_03
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 9
Clamping unit
Expert mode
The view of the recorded curves is changed by activating the expert mode. Additionally, the
"Ideal curve" and "Basic protection" function is activated.
Expert mode on:
• Curve view: light blue Tolerance
green Force curve of current cycle
dark blue Force curve of previous cycle
magenta Ideal curve
• Ideal curve: Storing and displaying an ideal curve
• Basic protection active
Start-up tol.
Entry of the start-up tol in [%] (related to the maximum torque / pressure of the drive). The start-
up tolerance is generally active in the manual mode. In the automatic mode, it is active until
"Cycles start-up tol." will be reached.
Permissible tol.
Entry of the permissible tol in [%] (related to the maximum torque / pressure of the drive).
The permissible tol. is active in the automatic mode only if the "Cycles start-up tol." has been
reached.
TIP: Specify the displayed maximum value slightly increased as the set value after several
hours or press "Reset" to carry out another determination of the setting suggestion.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 10 0515MC
Clamping unit
Basic protection (in the export mode only)
Entry of the maximum change in force during the mould protection in [%]. This monitoring is only
active from cycle 0 with activated expert mode, in addition to the start-up tolerance. This setting
is of special importance for cycle 0, thus for the protection during the recording of the reference
curve.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 11
Clamping unit
F03-Allgemein-Schließkraftaufbau_03
In the „Clamping force build-up“ menu, you specify the set values for the clamping force build-
up of two fixed and four time or injection volume markers which may be activated. The time
markers must be entered with continuous increase, and the volume markes with continuous
decrease (see picture). You can assign separate forces to these markers.
The program preselection to the left of the marker entries can be used to change between
clamping force build-up via time or injection volume.Enter the set force values in [kN] / [shtn].
The appropriate maximum values can be read off next to the diagram axes.
If the machine is equipped with the “Injection parallel to clamping force build-up, without
hydraulic accumulator” option, the rate Q for the clamping force build-up must be pre-set.
CAUTION
If the machine is equipped with the “Injection parallel to clamping force build-up, without
hydraulic accumulator” option, the rate Q for the clamping force build-up must be pre-set.
The clamping force can be recorded in the actual value graphics.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 12 0515MC
Clamping unit
Q (with option “Injection parallel to clamping force build-up, without hydraulic accumulator”)
Functional routine:
• The injection process can be started from the adjustable „Clamping force for start of
injection“ (see chapter 5.1.2.).
• From this point, the clamping force can be increased further based on a preselected
profile with 6 steps.
• As there is only a specific flow rate available from the pump, the rate of the clamping
force build-up (Q) and the injection rate (see chapter 5.1.1) can be adjusted accordingly.
If the required quantity exceeds the pump flow rate, error message „Pump system:
request quantity too high“ is displayed.
The actual value graphics can be used to check whether the respective forces and rates are
reached.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 13
Clamping unit
F03-Allgemein-Schließkraftabbau_01
In the "Clamping force reduction" menu, you specify the set values for the clamping force
reduction of two fixed and four time markers which may be activated. The time markers must be
entered with continuous increase (see picture). You can assign separate forces to these time
markers.
Enter the set force values in [kN] / [shtn]. The appropriate maximum values can be read off next
to the diagram axes.
CAUTION
The clamping force can be recorded in the actual value graphics.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 14 0515MC
Clamping unit
F03-Allgemein-Status_03
This menu shows the status of the clamping unit (for MacroPower).
Locking
Here, the current state of the locking is being displayed. Lockings 1/3 and 2/4 are mechanically
connected with each other.
green ...... Locking unlocked (the clamping unit can be opened)
red ...... Locking locked (the clamping force can be built up)
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 15
Clamping unit
Emergency program Opening
This emergency program for releasing jammed pressure boxes can be activated in the
setting mode (with locked pressure boxes).
After having activated this program, press the key "Open locking". The pressure boxes
and the clamping unit are now moved into the position in which the pressure boxes can be
released. Keep the key pressed unti the pressure boxes are released (see locking status).
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 16 0515MC
Clamping unit
F03-Allgemein-aktivesÖffnen_GB01
Active opening
The pressure boxes are used for opening to the degassing gap, only then unlocking takes
place and the remaining opening movement is made by means of overdrive cylinders. Thus, an
increased opening force is available. The complete opening procedure will take more time.
Opening velocity
Velocity for opening to the degassing gap.
Opening stroke
Starting from the opening stroke, the opening movement is carried out with the Open profile
settings (see General / Page 1, chapter 3.1.1).
Degassing gap
Starting from the degassing gap, the opening movement is carried out with the Open profile
settings (see General / Page 1, chapter 3.1.1).
Opening moving force
Moving force for opening to the degassing gap.
Active closing
Up to the set force threshold (in percent of the set clamping force), the aim is to keep the mould
in parallel by means of the synchronisation control. After having exceeded the threshold, the
synchronisation control is ended and the force is distributed evenly to all 4 pressure boxes.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 17
Clamping unit
Locking without closing active (for MacroPower)
During locking, the clamping platen is not pulled into the clamping direction by the fast stroke
cylinders when the program preselection is activated.
During locking, the clamping platen is pulled into the clamping direction by the fast stroke
cylinders when the program preselection is deactivated.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 18 0515MC
Clamping unit
3.2 Toggle
F03-Kniehebel_03
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 19
Clamping unit
Accept mould height
By pressing this button, the current mould height is accepted as the set value. The clamping
movement is blocked in the manual and automatic mode if the current mould height is lowr than
the set value.
Procedure:
- Program activation:
- A query is made whether core pullers are installed.
- After acknowledgement by the respective button, the automatic mould height
determination will be continued.
- Clamping unit is closing
- Determine mould height
- Set mould height / determine clamping force
- Stretch toggle and clamping force built up
- Automatic mould height determination completed, the program preselection is reset.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 20 0515MC
Clamping unit
F03-Prägen-Seite1_02
Stamping means closing the clamping unit via a defined stamping gap with the plastic melt
injected or being injected. Difference is made between the sequential stamping, where injection
is generally made with fixed clamping platen, and the parallel stamping, where injection can also
take place while the clamping platen is moving.
The real stamping speed is determined by means of a 6-level stamping profile. A speed as
well as a stamping force can be specified for each level. The machine tries to keep the speed
specified in the profile. Only if the stamping force is exceeded by the entered value, the speed
breaks down until the value falls below the set force.
If, even during stamping at closing speed 0, the injected melt still excercises any force in
opening direction which exceeds the specified stamping force, the machine is pressed open.
The change-over from one stamping level to the next can be determined either on a time basis
or via stroke markers which are passed by the clamping platen.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 21
Clamping unit
Stamping
Activation of the stamping program. The stamping program may not be used in the manual
mode, the standard clamping movement will be triggered.
Stamping sequential
Stamping parallel (option)
Some machines cannot use this selection, i.e. only sequential stamping is possible. See
Restrictions paragraph.
Different starting criteria are displayed for stamping by selecting "Stamping sequential" or
"Stamping parallel".
When selecting "Stamping sequential", the starting criteria "Start volume-specific" or "Start for
change over to HP" can be selected.
When selecting "Stamping parallel", the starting criteria "Start time-dependent", "Start injection
pressure-dependent", or "Start volume-dependent" can be selected.
Stamping sequential
Start volume-dependent
This preselection sets a volume-specific starting criterion which is to start the stamping
procedure.
• Closing the mould up to the stamping gap.
• Building up the nozzle contact force.
• Injection up to the injection piston volume "Start volume-dependent", the injection
procedure is then interrupted (at the latest, however, when reaching the change over to
holding pressure point) and the "Stamping Delay time" is started.
• During the complete stamping procedure, the injection plunger will be held at the position.
• During the Compression Delay time the injection piston will be held at the position.
• When selecting "Stroke-dependent stamping profile (s)":
When passing the last selected profile point or at the end of the stamping time, the
clamping force is built up unless the "No clamping force build-up after Stamping End"
program selection was activated.
• When selecting "Time-dependent stamping profile (t)":
At the end of the stamping time of the last selected profile point, the clamping force is
built up unless the "No clamping force build-up after Stamping End" program selection
was activated.
• The injection process is continued and/or holding pressure started unless the "Injection
without holding pressure" program selection was activated.
• Start cooling time after the end of holding pressure.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 22 0515MC
Clamping unit
Stamping sequential
Start for change over to HP
For this preselection the injection procedure will be interrupted at the time of the change over to
holding pressure (no matter which criterion has been preselected).
• Closing the mould up to the stamping gap.
• Building up the nozzle contact force.
• Injection until reaching the time of the change over to holding pressure (no matter which
criterion has be preselected), the injection procedure is then interrupted (i.e. no holding
pressure) and the "Stamping Delay time" is started.
• During the complete stamping procedure, the injection plunger will be held at the position.
• At the end of the "Stamping Delay time" the stamping procedure is started.
• When selecting "Stroke-dependent stamping profile (s)":
When passing the last selected profile point or at the end of the stamping time, the
clamping force is built up unless the "No clamping force build-up after Stamping End"
program selection was activated.
• When selecting "Time-dependent stamping profile (t)":
At the end of the stamping time of the last selected profile point, the clamping force is
built up unless the "No clamping force build-up after Stamping End" program selection
was activated.
• The holding pressure is started unless the "Injection without holding pressure" program
selection was activated.
• Start cooling time after the end of holding pressure.
Stamping sequential
Start at end of holding pressure
With this selection, the stamping procedure is started at the end of the holding pressure.
• Closing the mould up to the stamping gap.
• Building up the nozzle contact force.
• Injection until the end of holding pressure, start of the "Stamping delay time".
• During the complete stamping procedure, the injection plunger will be held at the position.
• At the end of the "Stamping Delay time" the stamping procedure is started.
• When selecting "Stroke-dependent stamping profile (s)":
When passing the last selected profile point or at the end of the stamping time, the
clamping force is built up unless the "No clamping force build-up after Stamping End"
program selection was activated.
• When selecting "Time-dependent stamping profile (t)":
At the end of the stamping time of the last selected profile point, the clamping force is
built up unless the "No clamping force build-up after Stamping End" program selection
was activated.
• Start of "Cooling time".
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 23
Clamping unit
Stamping parallel (option)
Start time dependent
This preselection sets a time-dependent starting criterion which is to start the stamping
procedure.
• Closing the mould up to the stamping gap.
• Building up the nozzle contact force.
• Injection until reaching the "Start time-dependent" injection time, then the "Stamping
Delay time" is started. The injection process is not interrupted.
• At the end of the "Stamping Delay time" the stamping procedure is started.
• When selecting "Stroke-dependent stamping profile (s)":
When passing the last selected profile point or at the end of the stamping time, the
clamping force is built up unless the "No clamping force build-up after Stamping End"
program selection was activated.
• When selecting "Time-dependent stamping profile (t)":
At the end of the stamping time of the last selected profile point, the clamping force is
built up unless the "No clamping force build-up after Stamping End" program selection
was activated.
• Start cooling time after the end of holding pressure (unless the "Injection without holding
pressure" program selection was activated) and the clamping force is built up.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 24 0515MC
Clamping unit
Stamping parallel (option)
Start volume-dependent
This preselection sets a volume-specific starting criterion which is to start the stamping
procedure.
• Closing the mould up to the stamping gap.
• Building up the nozzle contact force.
• Injection until reaching the "Start volume-specific" injection piston volume, then the
"Stamping Delay time" is started. The injection process is not interrupted.
• At the end of the "Stamping Delay time" the stamping procedure is started.
• When selecting "Stroke-dependent stamping profile (s)":
When passing the last selected profile point or at the end of the stamping time, the
clamping force is built up unless the "No clamping force build-up after Stamping End"
program selection was activated.
• When selecting "Time-dependent stamping profile (t)":
At the end of the stamping time of the last selected profile point, the clamping force is
built up unless the "No clamping force build-up after Stamping End" program selection
was activated.
• Start cooling time after the end of holding pressure (unless the "Injection without holding
pressure" program selection was activated) and the clamping force is built up.
Stamping gap
Stroke marker at which the mould will be closed before injection. In case this stroke marker is
set to "Mould closed" stroke position, the clamping procedure will be performed up to the "Mould
closed" stroke marker; however no high pressure will be built up.
Stamping time
This entry is required only when selecting the "Stroke-dependent stamping profile". When
selecting the "Time-dependent stamping profile", this entry is ineffective.
At the end of the compression delay, the mould will be closed. This is done with the settings
under "Stamping Clamping force profile". These preselections will be triggered until either
the stamping time has expired or the stroke marker "Mould closed" has been reached. High
pressure will then be built up as a standard unless the "No clamping force build-up after
Stamping End" program selection was activated.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 25
Clamping unit
Stamping Clamping force profile
A maximum of 6 levels is available. A speed as well as a stamping force can be specified for
each level. The change-over from one stamping level to the next can be determined either on
a time basis (t) or via stroke markers (s) which are passed by the clamping platen. Use the
selector switch t/s for this setting.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 26 0515MC
Clamping unit
While the clamping unit is at the stamping gap and the injection procedure is active the
clamping unit is held in position. This will be indicated by the symbol in the status bar.
During the sequential stamping procedure, the injection piston will be held at the position. This
will be indicated by the symbol in the status bar.
Restrictions:
Stamping can be carried out on toggle machines with restrictions only since, due to the varying
transmission of the toggle mechanics depending on the clamping stroke, the clamping unit can
achieve its full stamping force with a stamping gap of 0 only.
Parallel stamping means simultaneous moving of the clamping unit and of the injection unit,
i.e. the driving technique of the machine must be designed accordingly. If the machine does
not met this conditions, the selection "Stamping parallel" is shielded on the control panel. Only
sequential stamping is then possible.
The maximum entries for stamping gap, stamping speed and stamping force depend on the size
and type of the machine.
CAUTION
During stamping, the mould connection to the nozzle platen must be able to absorb the nozzle
contact force with open mould, too.
If it is not wished that the injected plastic melt will be pressed back into the screw barrel during
stamping, this should be prevented by the mould design or by using shut-off nozzles (mould or
machien). Although the screw position is controlled during stamping, it can be possible that the
temporary system pressure is not enough to keep the position.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 27
Clamping unit
F03-Prägen-Seite2_02
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 28 0515MC
Clamping unit
Closing Speed (Degassing/Stamping)
Closing Moving force (Degassing / Stamping)
This speed and moving force is triggered during stamping or degassing until the mould is closed
or until the end of the "Stamping time" or "Degassing closing time", afterwards the clamping
force will be built up.
Caution: If the mould is not closed during clamping force build-up, the clamping process is
carried out with the set clamping force. It must, however, be taken into consideration that the
clamping force cannot be completely built up if the clamping stroke is too long.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 29
Clamping unit
F03-Lüften_GB05
Degassing
Activation of the degassing program. The degassing program may not be used in the manual
mode, the standard clamping and injection movement will be triggered.
Combiform (option)
Use this program preselection to activate the Combiform program.
Using this program, two different melts can be injected into a mould or a cavity. For doing so,
the mould must be equipped with sliding inserts which, at first, close one or several areas of the
injection moulding part.
First, the first moulding compount is injected into the mould. Only a part of the cavity is filled in
this procedure. Then the sliding inserts are moved and the area of the second melt is available.
The second meld is injected.
CAUTION
Degassing and Combiform cannot be carried out together.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 30 0515MC
Clamping unit
Program procedure in the automatic mode:
• The following core puller programs must be activated at the respective „Start priorities
(injection cycle)“:
Injection cycle A before B - Core puller program move in 41
Core puller program move out 42
Injection cycle B before A - Core puller program move in 42
Core puller program move out 41
Injection cycle C before A - Core puller program move in 43
Core puller program move out 41
Injection cycle A before C - Core puller program move in 41
Core puller program move out 43
Injection cycle B before C - Core puller program move in 42
Core puller program move out 43
Injection cycle C before B - Core puller program move in 43
Core puller program move out 42
CAUTION
„Start priority (injection cycle“) must be adjusted depending on the preselection (see
chapter 12 „Multi-component settings“.
• Close mould during clamping force build-up.
• „Move in core puller“. If there are more than one core puller, the sequence for „Move core
puller in“ is determined by the selection made for „Priority“ (see core puller settings).
• Injection unit forward to nozzle contact at mould.
• „Injection“ with injection unit with 1st start priority (injection cycle).
• „Holding pressure phase“.
• „Cooling time“ of 1st injection moulding.
• „Degassing delay time“.
• Clamping force reduction.
• Open mould with „Opening velocity (degassing)“ and „Opening force (degassing)“ until
mark „Degassing stroke“ is reached (only if set value for „Degassing stroke“ is > 0).
• „Degassing dwell time“.
• „Move out core puller“. If there are more than one core puller, the sequence for „Move out
core puller“ is determined by the selection made for „Priority“ (see core puller settings).
• Close mould during clamping force build-up.
• „Injection“ with injection unit with 2nd start priority (injection cycle).
• „Holding pressure phase“.
• „Cooling time“ of 2nd injection moulding.
• Open mould to „Mould is opened“.
• Remove injection moulding.
• Cycle start.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 31
Clamping unit
Start volume-dependent
This preselection sets a volume-dependent starting criterion which is to start the degassing
procedure.
When not reaching the volume set here, the injection process is interrupted at the end of the
"Degassing delay time". At the latest, the injection process is interrupted when reaching the
change over to holding pressure point. At the end of the "Degassing delay time", the degassing
process is started and the injection or holding pressure process is continued after having
terminated the degassing process. During the complete degassing procedure, the injection
plunger will be held at the position.
Start for change over to HP
For this preselection the injection procedure will be interrupted at the time of the change over to
holding pressure (no matter which criterion has been preselected). At the end of the "Degassing
delay time", the degassing process is started and the injection or holding pressure process
is continued after having terminated the degassing process. During the complete degassing
procedure, the injection plunger will be held at the position.
Start at end of holding pressure
With this preselection, the degassing delay time is started at the end of holding pressure. At the
end of the "Degassing delay time", the degassing process is started and the cycle is continued
after having terminated the degassing process.
Degassing gap
Stroke marker up to which the mould will be opened after the degassing delay. If this
preselection is set to "0" no opening movement will be performed but only the high pressure will
be built up instead.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 32 0515MC
Clamping unit
Closing Speed (Degassing)
Closing Moving force (Degassing)
This speed and moving force is triggered during stamping or degassing until the mould is closed
or until the end of the "Stamping time" or "Degassing closing time", afterwards the clamping
force will be built up.
Program sequence
Degassing:
• Close mould up to high pressure build-up.
• Injection assembly forward up to nozzle contact.
• Start Injection up to Start Degassing.
• High pressure reduction.
• Opening up to degassing gap.
• Wait for the Degassing Dwell time.
• Degassing Clamping procedure.
• High pressure build-up.
• Injection will be continued.
Status bar
During the degassing procedure, the injection piston will be held at the position.
This will be indicated by the symbol in the status bar.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 33
Clamping unit
F03-Mouldfix-Einstellungen_GB04
Mouldfix
CAUTION
With magnetic mounting platens from Teconmagnete:
After 10 minutes, the magnetic mounting platens changes into a monitoring mode. From this
time, locking/unlocking can no longer be done at will. Both sides must be demagnetised and
the proximity switches released in order to make magnetising possible again. A defect proximity
switch is thus recognised directly after the first mould change. To allow subsequent adjustment
of a mould (multiple demagnetising and magnetising without releasing the proximity switches),
monitoring will be activated only 10 minutes after the last magnetising/demagnetising.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 34 0515MC
Clamping unit
CAUTION
All Mouldfix monitorings will be deactivated if the program is switched off!
Mouldfix
Lock/unlock mould also possible with open mould
Additionally to the standard procedure, the mould can be locked/unlocked even while the mould
is open (only with horizontal clamping unit).
The following requirements have to be met:
• Mouldfix key-operated switch active
• Setting mode active
• Clamping unit in Mouldfix position tolerance
• Injection assemblies completely back (Euromap 70.1: for loosening the fixed platen)
• All ejectors completely back (Euromap 70.1: for loosening the moving platen)
If these requirements have been met, the operater decides where the moving platen will be
locked or unlocked.
CAUTION
When loosening the mould in the mould open position, both mould halves must be secured
against falling down by means of a crane or a mould-change slide.
CAUTION
Hydraulic mould mounting system (Standard procedure):
The moving platen can be closed only if the mould is closed. The moving platen can be released
from the position Mould closed to the position tolerance (0-1 mm).
In this operating mode, clamping / release of the fixed platen can be carried out without
restrictions.
Restriction for clamping: The respective proximity switch on the fixed or moving platen must be
pressed.
Restriction for release: The proximity switch on the moving platen must be pressed.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 35
Clamping unit
Magnetic mould mounting system according to EUROMAP 70.0 (standard procedure):
The fixed platen and the moving platen can be clamped (magnetised) only if the mould is
closed, the ejector is back, and the injection unit is back. The fixed platen and the moving platen
can be released (demagnetised) from the position Mould closed to the position tolerance (0-1
mm).
After having correctly clamped / released the two mould halves, the key-operated switch
"Mouldfix" can be deactivated.
The respective states are displayed in the Mouldfix diagnosis.
CAUTION
Deactivation of the position monitorings (of clamping unit, injection unit, ejector) makes all
claims of guaranty for damages to mould or machine invalid.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 36 0515MC
Clamping unit
Automatic resetting of clamping unit zeroing
This program preselection causes an automatic resetting of the clamping unit zeroing during
mould change. Closing is blocked until a new zeroing will be carried out.This function is carried
out if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• Mouldfix mode active
• Program switch activated
• Both Mouldfix platens were clamped or magnetised already before the Mouldfix mode
• Both Mouldfix platens are released or demagnetised.
• With hydraulic Mouldfix, the mould presence sensors must not be activated either (mould
dismantled)
With magnetic Mouldfix, the mould presence sensors are not monitored.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 37
Clamping unit
F03-Mouldfix-Diagnose_02
This menu shows the current status of Mouldfix. The displayed statuses depend on the scope of
equipment of the Mouldfix.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 38 0515MC
Clamping unit
F03-HiQOpening_00
HiQ Opening
Activating the HiQ Opening. The HiQ Opening can not be used in the manual mode, the
standard clamping and injection movement will be triggered.
Start volume-dependent
This preselection sets a volume-dependent starting criterion which is to start the HiQ Opening.
When falling down the here set volume and at the end of the "Delay time", the HiQ Opening
is started. The injection and holding pressure process will continue unchanged. The mould is
opened to the degassing gap. The mould opening will continue at the end of the cooling time.
HB6GB03K
0515MC
Chapter 3 - 39
Clamping unit
Delay time
After reaching the starting criterion the HiQ Opening will be delayed by this time.
Opening velocity
Opening force
At the end of the delay time the mould will be opened up to the preselected "Degassing gap"
using these settings.
Degassing gap
Stroke marker up to which the mould will be opened after the delay time. If this preselection
is set to '0' no opening movement will be performed but only the high pressure will be built up
instead.
HB6GB03K
Chapter 3 - 40 0515MC
Injection unit
4 Injection unit
4.1 General
4.1.1 General / Page 1
F04-Allgemein_Seite1_01
In the "Injection unit" menu, you may determine the running characteristics of the injection unit.
To this end, you specify the set values for a fixed and two movement profile points which may
be activated. You can assign separate speeds and strokes to all these profile points. For any
movement direction you may specify a set value for the force of movement.
Enter the set values for the speeds in [mm/s]/[inch/s], the set values for the strokes in [mm]/
[inch], and the set values for the forces in [kN]/[shtn]. The respective maximum values can be
read off above the set value fields.
HB6GB04H
Chapter 4 - 1
0115MC
Injection unit
CAUTION
The lower the speed when injection unit and mould meet the lower the wear of both parts is.
CAUTION
No default value of the movements is possible for injection units with pneumatic drive.
CAUTION
If the value is selected too low, undesired melt delivery can be caused between nozzle and
sprue bush.
A slightly longer total cycle time is the result of the time needed for the defined build-up of the
nozzle contact force.
Input of the wished nozzle contact force in kN / shtn.
Max. nozzle contact force with open mould (option for EM and option "Ejection through the
open mould")
EM:
Input of the wished nozzle contact force with open mould in [kN / shtn]. The force for Injection
unit forward with open mould (nozzle contace force) is here limited to the entered nozzle contact
force in order to prevent a separation of the mould half.
HB6GB04H
Chapter 4 - 2 0115MC
Injection unit
CAUTION
This function is only available if the nozzle contact force and the injection are not provided
by the same pump system or performed electrically (example: electrical drive, injunction with
bladder accumulator). If this function cannot be performed due to the system configuration
(nozzle contact force and injection with same pump system), it is displayed in grey.
Contacting nozzle
The nozzle stops at the "Nozzle contact point" position and does not move.
Injection unit back (for EM with injection unit without stroke transducer system)
Input of the wished injection unit back time in [s]. The injection unit continues moving back until
the end of the time entered here. This time is effective in the automatic mode only.
HB6GB04H
Chapter 4 - 3
0115MC
Injection unit
CAUTION
The entry of the safety stroke will not be saved in the product data record.
For all vertical machines, this stroke marker must be changed, if necessary, in the case of
critical mould sizes or longer nozzles in the injection cylinder (possible in the customer level 20).
In the factory, the stroke marker is adjusted such that, in the case of a horizontal injection
assembly, the nozzle point is outside the danger zone of the mould table, and the movable
mounting platen.
CAUTION
The nozzle contact point (stroke 0) has to be reached since otherwise the program is not active
and the injection unit hits the mechanical stop at the set driving force.
The force for Injection unit forward for purging through the open mould (nozzle contact force)
will be reduced to 50 % of the maximum moving force, even if a higher force has been entered
for Injection unit forward.
If 50 % of the max. moving force for Injection unit forward for purging through the open mould is
too much, the moving force value for "Injection unit forward" can be reduced below this value.
HB6GB04H
Chapter 4 - 4 0115MC
Injection unit
F04-Allgemein_Seite2_02
HB6GB04H
Chapter 4 - 5
0115MC
Injection unit
CAUTION
The injection unit is moved in parallel operation with the current force and speed parameters of
the clamping unit. Thus, select the process parameters of the clamping unit correspondingly in
order to avoid hydraulic and mechanic shocks to the injection assembly.
CAUTION
In hydraulic machines (if the injection unit is equipped without P/Q valve), the pressure of the
clamping force build-up is used parallel to the build-up of the nozzle contact force.
HB6GB04H
Chapter 4 - 6 0115MC
Injection unit
F04-Allgemein_EES_01
If your machine is equipped with an "Eccentric injection system (EIS)", you can carry out the
settings for the EIS system in this menu.
Enter the EIS monitoring stroke Tolerance. Enter the tolerance relative to the set value. If the
actual value of the tolerance window, is outside the set tolerance, the "Nozzle forward" and
"Injection" movements will be disabled.
HB6GB04H
Chapter 4 - 7
0115MC
Injection unit
HB6GB04H
Chapter 4 - 8 0115MC
Injection
5 Injection
5.1 General
5.1.1 General / Page 1
F05-Allgemein_Seite1_GB05
In this menu, you specify the set values for the injection stroke.
You can specify separate volume flows, volumes and pressures for two fixed stroke sections
and eight stroke sections which may be activated. The running characteristics themselves will
then be subject to linear interpolation by the control system, i.e., there is no sudden change
between the different speeds, but a balanced adaptation to the appropriate set values (see set
value diagram for injection). The set shot volume and the change over volume (injection area)
will be indicated by the twoo green vertical lines in the set value diagram.
The program preselection to the left of the graphic can be used to change to a staircase profile.
The number of stairs is limited to 5.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 1
Injection
Injection
Enter the set values for the volume flows "Q" in [cm³/s] / [cuin/s] or [mm/s] / [in/s] , for the
volume "V" in [cm³] / [cuin] or [mm] / [in] and the specific injection pressures "ps" or hydraulic
injection pressures "ph" in [bar] / [psi]. The appropriate maximum values can be read off next to
the diagram axes.
The wished unit system can be configured in the "General / Setings" menu (see chapter 1.1.4).
ps ... specific injection pressure (pressure of the moulding compound in the cylinder)
ph ... hydraulic injection pressure (pressure in the hydraulic cylinder)
CAUTION
The injection pressure profile is a pressure control profile (injection pressure monitoring).
I.e. in case the injection pressure exceeds the limiting pressure (pressure set in the injection
pressure profile), the injection speed (volume flow) will be reduced until the injection pressure
corresponds again to the limiting pressure. The evaluation of the injection pressure monitoring is
activated in the "Production data / Monitoring / Page 3" menu (see chapter 18).
CAUTION
First enter the volume flows, the volumes and the pressure for the fixed stroke sections. If you
would like to have a differentiated injection behaviour, first select the respective stroke sections
which may be activated and enter the desired set values.
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 2 0515MC
Injection
Delay Injection
In the automatic mode only, "Delay Injection" will be started after reaching the nozzle contact
point. At the end of the time, the injection procedure starts.
You specify the delay for the injection in [s].
MicroPower:
„Delay injection“ will only be processed while the program preselection „Injection plunger is
waiting at wait positon before material transfer“ is active.
CAUTION
The colour change of the "Current injection pressure" text displays the kind of the injection
holding pressure control.
• The "Current injection pressure" text is displayed in black for the injection holding
pressure control via injection pressure transducer.
• The "Current injection pressure" text is displayed in grey for the injection holding pressure
control via melt pressure transducer.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 3
Injection
Peak value Injection pressure
The peak value of the injection pressure is indicated in [bar] / [psi].
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 4 0515MC
Injection
F05-Allgemein_Seite2_03
In the upper part of the picture, the same current values, peak values, and change-over values
as on page 1 are displayed. Additionally, the values for cavity pressure SLAVE 1 to 7 are
displayed in these menus.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 5
Injection
Rapid injection (option)
You may select this option if the machine is equipped with a hydraulic accumulator.
CAUTION
If the injection unit has been lifted, ejection in manual mode is carried out only with setting
speed.
CAUTION
The clamping force can be recorded in the actual value graphics.
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 6 0515MC
Injection
F05-Allgemein_Seite2_Micro_02
Start injection plunger ejector for mould opened (program preselection ComboBox)
Select this program preselection if the injection plunger ejector should only start for an opened
mould and at the end of the „Delay Injection plunger ejector forward“.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 7
Injection
Start injection plunger ejector for open stroke (program preselection ComboBox)
Select this program preselection if the injection plunger ejector is to start at this stroke position
during the opening movement and at the end of the „Delay Injection plunger ejector forward“.
Injection plunger is waiting at wait positon before material transfer (program preselection
ComboBox)
When activating this program preselection, the injection plunger remains in the defined waiting
position (up to the material transfer by the metering piston).
„Delay Injection“ is ignored.
Injection plunger is waiting at wait positon after material transfer (program preselection
ComboBox)
When activating this program preselection, the injection plunger remains in the defined waiting
position (after the material transfer by the metering piston).
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 8 0515MC
Injection
Wait position
Enter the wished waiting position in this field.
NOTE
- With a negative value, the melt flow front has reached the mould before the clamping
force has been built up.
- A too high value causes an increase of the cycle times.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 9
Injection
F05-Allgemein_Seite3_01
In this menu, the same current values, peak values, and change-over values as on page 1 are
displayed. Additionally, the values for cavity pressure SLAVE 1 to 7 and mould wall temperature
SLAVE 1 to 7 are displayed in these menus.
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 10 0515MC
Injection
5.2 Integral
F05-Integral_GB02
General
The injection integral principle is based on the detection of differences in viscosity. The injection
work will be determined by integrating the injection pressure between two selectable volumes of
the injection stroke which may be freely selected.
Make sure that the stop volume of the injection integral recording is not within the change over
to holding pressure range, i.e. the recording of the integral has to be finished before a pressure
change over. Otherwise, the determination of the integral will be aborted when changing over to
holding pressure and the value will be output. No (HiQ Flow) correction will be carried out
either.
The determination of the actual integral will always be active, provided that a start and stop
volume have been specified.
A correction is calculated from the deviation SET integral to ACTUAL integral. Based on this
correction and according to the integral mode, the pressure change-over and/or the holding
pressure are modified. Additionally, the control mode indicates whether a multiplicative or
additive correction is to be made. The measurement of the pressure integral as well as the
subsequent correction for each cycle is known as HiQ Flow (integral control)..
The change-over pressure can be corrected only with corresponding pressure change-over type
(depending on injection, cavity or melt pressure), otherwise, only the holding pressure profile is
corrected.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 11
Injection
CAUTION
The integral can be recored in [Nmm] / [lbfin] (when recording small injection volumes) or in
[Nm] / [lbfft] (when recording large injection volumes). The unit for the integral is set in the menu
„Machine in general / Settings“ (see chapter 1).
Additive correction
Correction calculation with the unit pressure (1 bar). If the actual integral is lower than the set
value, the pressure is increased.
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 12 0515MC
Injection
Example:
1.) Subtractive correction
ws = 1000 [Nmm] wi = 900 [Nmm] pe = unit pressure 1 [bar]
we = 10 [%]...deviation from set work
kr = 50 [%] corresponds to 0.5
Integral
Display of the actual value and input of the set value for the integral monitoring. Depending your
choice, the integral will either be displayed in [Nmm] / [lbfin] or [Nm] / [lbfft].
+ Tolerance
Input of the maximum tolerance by which the actual integral value may differ from the set value
without risking an error analysis.
- Tolerance
Input of the minimum tolerance by which the actual integral value may differ from the set value
without risking an error analysis.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 13
Injection
Stop volume Integral monitoring
Input of the volume for which the integral recording of the injection work will be finished (for the
injection integral, it has to be larger than the change over volume).
CAUTION
The input of the start / stop volume of the integral recording will also be required for the display
and evaluation of the integral within the quality table.
Status
Ready for new integral recording
Integral recording active
Integral recording finished
Correction of injection change-over pressure
Correction of cavity-change-over pressure
Correction of melt change-over pressure
Integral recording aborted by change-over to holding pressure
Correction of holding pressure
Correction of injection change-over pressure and holding pressure
Correction of cavity change-over pressure and holding pressure
Correction of melt change-over pressure and holding pressure
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 14 0515MC
Injection
F05-Fließzahl_01
General
During injection, the screw is moved witch constant speed into the direction of the nozzle and,
in doing so, it injects the material into the mould. For the consistent quality of the injection
mouldings it is important that the material is injected with constant speed. Therefore, the
injection process must be monitored and the corresponding parameters controlled. The flow
figure is a measure for the injection speed. It corresponds to the time in which the screw passes
two pre-defined stroke markers. This time is monitored and corrected accordingly in the case of
deviations.
Make sure that the stop volume of the flow figure recording is not within the change over to
holding pressure range, i.e. the recording of the flow figure has to be finished before a pressure
change over. Otherwise, the determination of the flow figure will be stopped when changing over
to holding pressure and the value will be output. No correction will be carried out either.
The determination of the flow figure will always be active, provided that a start and stop volume
have been specified.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 15
Injection
Flow figure monitoring
If this program has been selected, the flow figure monitoring will be activated.
Control Mode
Here you can select the correction which is to be carried out.
Flow figure
Display of the actual value and input of the set value for monitoring and controlling the flow
figure.
+ Tolerance
Input of the maximum tolerance by which the flow figure value may differ from the set value
without risking an error analysis or a correction of the p profile.
- Tolerance
Input of the minimum tolerance by which the flow figure value may differ from the set value
without risking an error analysis or a correction of the p profile.
CAUTION
The input of the start / stop volume of the flow figure recording will also be required for the
display and evaluation of the flow figure within the quality table.
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 16 0515MC
Injection
Offset Q injection profile (option)
The total of all corrections will be displayed here. The value can be reset by entering „0“.
The effect is that the corrections of the set flow figure are corrected again. The set value is
overwritten by a new correction.
Injection pressure
The first profile point of the injection pressure can be specified here. This value is then copied to
the injection pressure profile.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 17
Injection
Status
Ready for new flow figure recording
Flow figure recording active
Flow figure recording finished
v-Injection profile increased
v-Injection profile decreased
v-Injection profile maximally increased
v-Injection profile maximally decreased
Flow figure recording aborted by change-over to holding pressure
p-profile increased
p-profile decreased
p-profile max. increased
p-profile max. decreased
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 18 0515MC
Injection
5.4 Purging
5.4.1 Purging
F05-Ausspritzen-Ausspritzen_04
No purging
The purging program is deactivated.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 19
Injection
Purging in manual and automatic mode
The purging program is activated both in the manual and the automatic mode.
For the manual mode procedure see paragraph "Purging in the manual mode only". In the
automatic mode, the purging program is started when an alarm of error class 4, 6, or 7 occurs.
Note for vertical machines:
If the injection unit is not equipped with the purging flap or purging cup option, no purging is
possible in the automatic mode.
CAUTION
When ejecting in the automatic mode, the time "Delay Switch-off for Cycle End" (see chapter
18.3.1) must be chosen so that the purging process can be finished within this time.
Purging in manual and automatic mode at Material monitoring
If the manual monitoring system is triggered, the current machine cycle is stopped and the
respective purging process is performed. The exact procedure depends on the preselected
„Error analysis material monitoring“ (see chapter 5.2.2). Material monitoring remains activated,
i.e. a purging process is initiated each time the material monitoring system is triggered.
CAUTION
The material monitoring functions „Cycle stop during material monitoring (at cycle end)“ and
„Shut-down sequence for material monitoring (cycle stop)“ are not activated in conjunction with
this program preselection, as injection has already taken place during the current cycle.
This program preselection should not be chosen in multi-component machines with handling
systems, as they are not equipped with injection mouldings analysis functions at the Euromap
handling interface.
Material monitoring
The "Material monitoring Time” monitors a down-time of the machine. The time between 2
injection procedures is measured. At the end of the "Material monitoring Time”, the "Material
monitoring” error message will be displayed and the following injection process and/or machine
cycle is disabled. To continue the production, the injection cylinder must be cleaned using
the preselected cylinder rinsing program (purging / residue metering). To be able to start the
purging process in the manual mode even without purging program, the "injection” key must be
pressed permanently until the end of the preselected cylinder rinsing program (purging / residue
metering).
In the manual mode, the "Nozzle forward" movement is blocked while an error message is
activated. If the error message occurs during the injection process, this process will not be
interrupted any more.
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 20 0515MC
Injection
Material monitoring Time
This time is started at the beginning of metering, pre-extrusion (or >= minimum material
monitoring position) and reset at the end of the injection process (holding pressure change-
over). At the end of this time, an error message will be sent and the injection cylinder must be
purged.
As a standard, the mimimum material monitoring position (melt cushion) is defined with value 0
in order to monitor the material even in the screw channels. Optionally, this value can be set.
Above the actual value, the current time of the metering piston is shown as a second actual
value in the case of MicroPower machines.
Purging
The purging procedure will be performed by purging followed by metering. Purging is performed
with "Purging Speed” and "Purging Pressure”. Metering is performed with "Metering Peripheral
velocity” without back pressure until "Shot volume when purging”. "Metering Monitoring time”
runs parallel to metering. After each purging procedure, the "Purging strokes” counter will be
incremented and when reaching the set value, the error message will be reset (In case there
are several injection units available at the machine, the error message will only be reset after all
purging procedures have been finished). The injection cylinder remains in the front position after
the last purging stroke and the metering monitoring time will not be started.
Unless the purging procedure has been finished, the "Injection unit forward" and "Injection into
the mould" movements will remain disabled.
If the injection unit is moved back to the mechanical limit position in the manual mode without
the "Material monitoring" error message, the purging cup (option) will be moved forward and
the purging procedure can be run. At the end of the purging procedure, the purging cup can
be moved back by moving the injection unit foward. In case the end of the "Material monitoring
Time" has been reached during the purging procedure, the "Purging is active" error message
will be displayed and the purging procedure has to be run completely.
Residue metering
Residue metering is performed with "Metering Peripheral velocity” with maximum back pressure.
If the injection unit is not in the foremost position, on purging will be performed before starting
the residue metering. "Residue metering Time” runs parallel to metering. At the end of "Residue
metering time”, the residue metering process is finished and the error message reset. (In case
there are several injection units available at the machine, the error message will only be reset
after all residue metering procedures have been finished). Unless the purging procedure has
been finished, the "Injection unit forward” and "Injection into the mould” movements will remain
disabled.
Purging strokes
Number of purging strokes required. This entry is not required if the "Residue metering" program
selection is activated.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 21
Injection
Shot volume when purging
Enter the metering volum in [ccm] / [cuin] up to which metering is performed if the "Purging"
program selection is activated. This entry is not required if the "Residue metering" program
selection is activated.
Purging Speed
Enter the speed required for purging in [ccm/s] / [cuin/s].
Purging Pressure
Enter the pressure for purging in [bar] / [psi] in this field.
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 22 0515MC
Injection
F05-Ausspritzen-Konfiguration_04
Motor switch-off during material monitoring (at once) / (at cycle end)
Select the corresponding field if the material monitoring is to switch off the machine at once or at
the end of the cycle. Additionally, an alarm is displayed.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 23
Injection
Shut-down sequence for material monitoring (cycle stop)
Select the corresponding field if, during material monitoring, the shut-down sequence is to be
start started (all injection mouldings are ejected) and to be stopped at the end of the cycle. The
machine is not switched ofg. Additionally, an alarm is displayed. After having pressed Cycle start
(closing key), the cycle is continued.
Cycle stop during material monitoring (at once), continue with cycle start
Select this option, if the material monitoring system is to stop the cycle immediately. The
machine is not shut down. In addition, an alarm message is displayed. After confirmation of the
cycle start („Close“ button), the cycle is continued.
Delay for start decrease mode barrel heating for material monitoring
Delay for start decrease mode mould heating for material monitoring
When activating the program preselection, the timer "Start delay temperature decrease in xx
[min]" is started if the material monitoring has reacted- After the timer has run down, the "Delay
temperature decrease" (barrel heating see chapter 2.1.1, mould heating see chapter 2.2.1) will
be started.
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 24 0515MC
Injection
F05-Ausspritzen-kalter Pfropfen_01
If the machine is equipped with the "Purging of the cold plug" program (option), you may carry
out the settings for the program in this menu.
CAUTION
With vertical machines, the function is carried out only when the injection unit is completely
moved back, in the case of horizontal machines and vertical machines with purging cup / purge
guard flap, it is carried out only after having reached the "Injection unit purging position" (entry
see "Purging" menu).
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 25
Injection
Purging Volume
Set value for the volume to be purged. If, e.g., 100 cm³ are to be purged, 100 must be entered.
Purging Speed
Enter the speed required for purging in [ccm/s] / [cuin/s].
Purging Pressure
Enter the pressure for purging in [bar] / [psi] in this field.
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 26 0515MC
Injection
F05-Verschlussdüse_02
If the machine is equipped with a shut-off nozzle (option), you can use this menu for the settings
for this program.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 27
Injection
Speed Shut-off nozzle
The set value entered in this field determines the speed for Close and Open shut-off nozzle.
This speed will be active during "Time Shut-off nozzle".
CAUTION
The shut-off nozzle can be opened and closed several times in a cycle.
If "Opening sequence before decompression after metering" is selected, the shut-off nozzle is
automatically closed again after this decompression.
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 28 0515MC
Injection
Shut-off nozzle with activated Foammould (option)
Activating the Foammould automatically switches on the shut-off nozzle and the program
preselections "Parallel opening sequence with injection process" and "Parallel closing sequence
with holding pressure end". With activated Foammould, the program preselections of the
Foammould cannot be changed.
Ex.:
Sequential opening sequence forward
Injection process
Decompression after Metering
Sequential closing sequence forward
metering
This results in the following shut-off nozzle process.
The shut-off nozzle is opened before injection. The shut-off nozzle is closed beforem metering.
Before the second decompression phase, the shut-off nozzle is opened again and then closed
again.
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 29
Injection
5.6 PressureMold
F05-PressureMold_01
Select the mode for Open the shut-off nozzle for the following options.
Time dependent
The time will be started with Start Injection. The shut-off nozzle opens at the end of the set time.
The set value will be stated in [s].
Volume dependent
The shut-off nozzle opens when reaching the set injection piston volume. The set value will be
stated in [ccm] / [cuin].
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 30 0515MC
Injection
Depending on injection pressure
The shut-off nozzle opens when reaching the set injection pressure. The set value will be stated
in [bar] / [ psi].
HB6GB05L
0515MC
Chapter 5 - 31
Injection
HB6GB05L
Chapter 5 - 32 0515MC
Holding pressure
6 Holding pressure
6.1 General
6.1.1 General / Holding pressure
F06-Allgemein_Nachdruck_GB05
In this menu, you establish a time profile for the holding pressure phase. You may enter the set
values for two fixed points of time and eight points of time which may be activated. Each point
of time will then be assigned a set pressure. Until the respective point of time the specified
pressure will be triggered. The last time value signifies the entire holding pressure time.
In addition, you may enter the set value for the secondary cooling time.
The program preselection to the right of the graphic can be used to change to a staircase
profile. The number of stairs is limited to 5.
HB6GB06H
0515MC
Chapter 6 - 1
Holding pressure
Holding pressure
Enter the values for the specific holding pressures "ps" or hydraulic holding pressures "ph"
in [bar] / [psi] and the set values for the holding pressure times "t" in [sec]. The appropriate
maximum values can be read off next to the diagram axes.
The wished unit system can be configured in the "General / Setings" menu (see chapter 1.1.4).
ps ... specific holding pressure (pressure of the moulding compound in the cylinder)
ph ... hydraulic holding pressure (pressure in the hydraulic cylinder)
CAUTION
For the profile shift of the holding pressure time, the individual times will be proportionally
shifted, i.e. a change of the holding pressure time will not change the ramps of the holding
pressure profile.
Start ....
The change over to holding pressure mode is set on the change over to holding pressure page.
The change-over value of the selected change-over criterion can be set here, too.
HB6GB06H
Chapter 6 - 2 0515MC
Holding pressure
Cooling time (heating time)
The cooling time (heating time) will be started at the end of the last given holding pressure time.
At the end of the cooling time (heating time), the function Open mould will be started.
The actual value for the currently expiring cooling time (heating time) will be indicated on the left
of the set value.
Current injection pressure
Here, the current injection pressure will be indicated in [bar] / [psi].
HB6GB06H
0515MC
Chapter 6 - 3
Holding pressure
F06-Allgemein_Nachdruckumschaltung_04
For the following options select the change over to holding pressure mode (master change-
over).
Start volume-dependent
After reaching the set volume, there will be a change over to holding pressure. The set value will
be stated in [ccm] / [cuin].
HB6GB06H
Chapter 6 - 4 0515MC
Holding pressure
Start cavity pressure dependent
After having reached the set cavity pressure, there will be a change-over to holding pressure.
The set value will be stated in [bar] / [ psi].
CAUTION
After the end of the monitoring time, the error message "Incorrect change-over to holding
pressure" will be displayed.
CAUTION
The reaction to a slave change over is set in the "Production data / Monitoring / Page 4" menu
(see chapter 18).
HB6GB06H
0515MC
Chapter 6 - 5
Holding pressure
Dynamics change-over to holding pressure (optional for MicroPower)
With this setting, over-/undershooting of the pressure during change-over to holding pressure
can be changed. A high percentage results in a very quick braking at the change-over to holding
pressure. A low percentage results in a slow braking at the change-over to holding pressure.
HB6GB06H
Chapter 6 - 6 0515MC
Holding pressure
F06-Allgemein_Slaveumschaltung_02
Slave change-over
The slave change over is a second criterion for changing over to holding pressure. While the
program selection is activated, the change over to holding pressure is released by the slave
change over if it was not be released by the master change over.
CAUTION
The reaction to a slave change over is set in the "Production data / Monitoring / Page 4" menu
(see chapter 18).
HB6GB06H
0515MC
Chapter 6 - 7
Holding pressure
F06-Allgemein_Slaveumschaltung2_01
In this menu, the set values for the slave change-over to holding pressure depending on the
mould wall temperature are entered in [C] / [F].
HB6GB06H
Chapter 6 - 8 0515MC
Holding pressure
F06-Allgemein_Auswahl FID_02
In this menu, you select the desired cavity pressure transducer for the change over to holding
pressure.
HB6GB06H
0515MC
Chapter 6 - 9
Holding pressure
Cavity pressure transducer CPT master
Select which cavity pressure transducer will be active. The set cavity pressure transducer (in
case the cavity pressure dependent change over has been activated) will performed the change
over to holding pressure. Enter "0" if no master cavity pressure transducer is required.
HB6GB06H
Chapter 6 - 10 0515MC
Holding pressure
F06-Forminnendruckaufnehmer_03
In this menu, you select the desired cavity pressure transducer and the respective type.
Additionally, the thermocouple can be scaled for a two-channel amplifier.
HB6GB06H
0515MC
Chapter 6 - 11
Holding pressure
Piezo
Enter the sensitivity in [pC/bar] / [pC/psi] and the amplifier measuring range in [pC]. The
amplifier measuring range refers to the charge amplifier range.
Example:
Name plate of the charge amplifier or the pressure sensor:
Charge amplifier: 10000 pC/10 V
Pressure sensor: 2.5 pC/bar
Entry in the menu:
Sensitivity: 2.5 pC/bar
Amplifier measuring range: 10000 pC
WSG indirect
Enter the sensitivity in [mV/V], the measuring range in [bar] / [psi] and the amplifier measuring
range in [mV]. The amplifier measuring range refers to the WSG amplifier range.
Example:
Name plate of the WSG amplifier or the pressure sensor:
WSG amplifier: 10000 mV
Pressure sensor Range: 2500 bar
Pressure sensor Sens.: 4 mV/V
Entry in the menu:
Sensitivity: 4 mV/V
Measuring range: 2500 bar
Amplifier measuring range: 10000 mV
HB6GB06H
Chapter 6 - 12 0515MC
Holding pressure
WSG direct
Enter the measuring range in [bar] / [psi] and the amplifier measuring range in [mV]. The
amplifier measuring range refers to the WSG amplifier range.
Example:
Name plate of the WSG amplifier or the pressure sensor:
WSG amplifier: 10000 mV
Pressure sensor Range: 2500 bar
Entry in the menu:Measuring range: 2500 bar
Amplifier measuring range: 10000 mV
CAUTION
As a standard, amplifier measuring range 1 will be preselected and the gain will be entered in
the left input field.
If the cavity pressure transducer is equipped with a range switching, you can change over
to range 2 (small pressure range / amplifier measuring range 2) by pressing the "Âmplifier
measuring range" switch. The gain for this range will be entered in the right input field.
CAUTION
All CPT types may also be force transducers; for this reason, there is an additional option field
for force transducers including the measuring pin diameter input.
HB6GB06H
0515MC
Chapter 6 - 13
Holding pressure
Thermocouple (mould wall temperature = MWT)
Here, the thermocouple for the mould wall temperature (MWT) will be scaled.
Zero point
Entry of the zero point scaling in [mV]. Zero point voltage is that voltage at which the
thermocouple shows 0 [C] / 32 [F].
Measuring range
Enter the maximum temperature range in [C] / [F] and the maximum voltage range in [mV].
HB6GB06H
Chapter 6 - 14 0515MC
Metering
7 Metering / Decompression
7.1 General
7.1.1 General / Page 1
F07-Allgemein_Seite1_GB03
In this menu, you set the parameters for Metering and decompression.
You may specify separate peripheral velocities, volumes and back pressures for two fixed
stroke sections and four stroke sections which may be activated. The running characteristics
themselves will then be subject to linear interpolation by the control system, i.e., there is no
sudden change between the different speeds, but a balanced adaptation to the appropriate set
values (see set value diagram for holding pressure).
HB6GB07L
0515MC
Chapter 7 - 1
Metering
Metering
Enter the set values for the shot volume "V" in [ccm] / [cuin] or [mm] / [in], for the peripheral
velocities "v" in [mm/s] / [inch/s], and the set values for the specific back pressures "ps" or
hydraulic back pressures "ph" in [bar] / [psi]. The appropriate maximum values can be read off
next to the diagram axes. The wished unit system can be configured in the "General / Setings"
menu (see chapter 1.1.4).
ps ... specific back pressure (pressure of the moulding compound in the cylinder)
ph ... hydraulic back pressure (pressure in the hydraulic cylinder)
CAUTION
The shot volume is to be entered as absolute value, i.e. when entering 45.00 ccm the volume is
increased to 45.00 ccm.
CAUTION
Decompression volume 1 is to be entered relatively i.e. when entering 1.00 ccm the screw
retracts by 1.00 ccm from the current position.
In the automatic mode, the "Decompression before metering" program is activated immediately
after the end of the holding pressure phase, in the manual mode by pressing the "Metering /
decompression" key.
Q (Volume flow)
Before the beginning of the metering stroke, the screw goes back at the entered volume flow, if
the "Decompression before metering" program is switched on.
V (Volume)
Specify the set value for the volume for "Decompression before metering" in this field.
HB6GB07L
Chapter 7 - 2 0515MC
Metering
Dec. 2 (decompression after metering)
Use the "Dec. 2" program to activate the decompression stroke after metering. After the shot
volume has been reached, the screw retracts by the set decompression volume.
CAUTION
Decompression volume 2 is to be entered relatively to the metering volume i.e. when entering
1.00 ccm the screw retracts by 1.00 ccm from the current position (Metering End).
Q (Volume flow)
After metering, the screw goes back at the entered volume flow, if the "Decompression after
metering" program is switched on.
V (Volume)
Specify the set value for the volume for "Decompression after metering" in this field.
back pressure
Back pressure signifies the pressure acting upon the injection piston while the screw retracts.
The back pressure is active during the metering phase. It acts against the metering direction to
compress the material in the barrel.
No back pressure
The back pressure is deactivated, i.e. no back pressure profile will be carried out.
CAUTION
For hydraulic machines with the "Position-controlled injection piston" option, enter a set value
for "No back pressure" and "Back pressure in automatic mode only" on the right to the selection
switch. This set value should be set in such a way that no material flows out of the nozzle during
metering, but that material can be metered via a slight back pressure. According to material and
nozzle bore, the value should be between 10 and 30 bar. The screw moves back empty when 0
is entered. The screw actively moves back by entering a negative back pressure value.
HB6GB07L
0515MC
Chapter 7 - 3
Metering
Back pressure in the automatic mode only
The back pressure is active in the automatic mode only.
CAUTION
The start of the "Metering / decompression" phase depends on your program selection in the
"Injection unit" menu:
• "Injection unit backw. before metering".
• "Injection unit backw. after metering".
CAUTION
An activation of the "Finger symbol" to
the left of the set value graphics causes a
change-over from the set value graphichs to
the shot volume overview.
F07-Allgemein_Seite1_01_
HB6GB07L
Chapter 7 - 4 0515MC
Metering
F07-Allgemein_Seite2_04
Pre-extrusion
If this program is switched on, the control system activates the "Metering" function (Turn screw)
at the end of the "Delay time Injection" and before "Injection" to feed the material to the mould.
The duration of the pre-extrusion may be set by means of the set value Time. The actual
injection procedure starts only after this function has been finished.
This program is only effective in the manual and the automatic mode.
Pre-extrusion Time
The set value entered in this field determines the duration of the pre-extrusion, and becomes
effective if the "Pre-extrusion" program is switched on.
HB6GB07L
0515MC
Chapter 7 - 5
Metering
Peripheral velocity Pre-extrusion
The set value entered in this field determines the peripheral velocity of the pre-extrusion, and
becomes effective if the "Pre-extrusion" program is switched on.
HB6GB07L
Chapter 7 - 6 0515MC
Metering
Dyeing unit
Permanent pulse
The signal for the dyeing unit is triggered parallel to metering.
Adjustable pulse
The signal for the dyeing unit is triggered with start of metering until the "Dyeing unit pulse
duration" has run down or metering has been finished.
HB6GB07L
0515MC
Chapter 7 - 7
Metering
7.2 Integral
F07-Integral_02
CAUTION
The integral can be recored in [Nmm] / [lbfin] (when recording small metering volumes) or in
[Nm] / [lbfft] (when recording large metering volumes). The unit for the integral is set in the menu
„Machine in general / Settings“ (see chapter 1).
HB6GB07L
Chapter 7 - 8 0515MC
Metering
Integral
Display of the actual value and input of the set value for the integral monitoring. Depending your
choice, the integral will either be displayed in [Nmm] / [lbfin] or [Nm] / [lbfft].
+ Tolerance
Input of the maximum tolerance by which the actual integral value may differ from the set value
without risking an error analysis.
- Tolerance
Input of the minimum tolerance by which the actual integral value may differ from the set value
without risking an error analysis.
CAUTION
The input of the start / stop volume of the integral recording will also be required for the display
and evaluation of the integral within the quality table.
HB6GB07L
0515MC
Chapter 7 - 9
Metering
F07-Massepolster_02
HB6GB07L
Chapter 7 - 10 0515MC
Metering
+ Tolerance
Specify by how many [ccm] / [cuin] the set value may be exceeded.
- Tolerance
Specify by how many [ccm] / [cuin] the set value may be fallen short of.
Step size
If the melt cushion is outside the tolerance range, the set value will be corrected by the deviation
from the melt cushion set value. If the deviation is larger than the "Step size" entered in this
field, the correction will be limited to this value.
CAUTION
Regulation changes the set value profile for metering. The starting point before starting the
regulation can be read on the "Metering limit stroke" in this menu.
HB6GB07L
0515MC
Chapter 7 - 11
Metering
7.4 Cellmould
7.4.1 Cellmould / Selection
F07-Cellmould-Anwahl_05
Use this menu to make the wished programs and set value presettings for a "Modular
Cellmould® System" (option) integrated into the IMM.
General information
In this procedure, gass is entered under pressure into the melt in the screw barrel during the
metering process. In this procedure, the screw cannot be depressurised (opening the shut-off
nozzle or release of the screw) if the safety devices of the machine are opened since otherwise
the mixtue of melt and gas would separate and the complete process would have been started
again - the metered material is then without any use!
CAUTION
When shutting down the machine or working on the screw barrel, it is absolutely necessary to
purge the screw barrel and to block the gas supply.
Activating the Cellmould automatically switches on the shut-off nozzle and the program
preselections "Parallel opening sequence with injection process" and "Parallel closing sequence
with holding pressure end". With activated Cellmould, the program preselections of the
Foammould cannot be changed.
HB6GB07L
Chapter 7 - 12 0515MC
Metering
Cellmould
The integrated modular Foammould system is activated with this program preselection.
Start criterion
Start volume gas feed point 1 [ccm] / [cuin]
When the set volume is reached the Cellmould is started. Enter the set value for the volume
dependent start of the Cellmould here.
Start criterion
Start volume gas feed point 1 [ccm] / [cuin]
When the set volume is reached the Cellmould is started. Enter the set value for the volume
dependent start of the Cellmould here.
Metering time
The metering time which will be measured for the duration of gas feed is entered here.
HB6GB07L
0515MC
Chapter 7 - 13
Metering
Gas feed factor
According to the type of the raw material and the requirement for the moulded part, the gas
feed factor can be between 0.2 and 1.5. The gas feed factor indicates the amount of gas in
grams in relation to the weight of the moulded part which will be introduced into the plastic melt.
Experience has shown that a start value of 0.3 is realistic.
HB6GB07L
Chapter 7 - 14 0515MC
Metering
F07-Cellmould-Eingasungsstelle_05
Use this menu to enter the set values for the gas feed profile for the Cellmould module.
After the set value input the set value graphic shows the pressure / Q development of the set
values via a volume axis.
HB6GB07L
0515MC
Chapter 7 - 15
Metering
GGas feed profile
• Cellmould with volume profile
You can enter separate Q profile values (gas feed speed) for one fixed volume section
and four volume sections which may be activated.
• Activate the wished number of volume or time intervals.
• Specify the different volume sections „V“ in [ccm] / [cuin] and the corresponding pressure
values „p“ in [bar] / [psi] and Q in [l/min] / [gal/min].
CAUTION
The volume sections must be entered in absolute values. I.e. the right set value must always be
greater than the left set value!
It is not always necessary to use all gradations for simple injection moulded parts. However, in
case of complex injection moulded parts, it is useful to set all profile points.
Deactivate not used profile points!
HB6GB07L
Chapter 7 - 16 0515MC
Metering
Current melt pressure gas feed point 1
Display of the current melt pressure in [bar] / [psi].
HB6GB07L
0515MC
Chapter 7 - 17
Metering
F07-Cellmould-Manuell_02
Use this menu to check the injector functions in the „Setting“ operating mode.
CAUTION
A function test is only possible if the safety gate of the clamping unit and the injection unit
(nozzle) are closed!
HB6GB07L
Chapter 7 - 18 0515MC
Metering
Injection unit A: Safety stroke
Display of the safety stroke of the injection unit for Cellmould. The safety stroke is used for
securing the safety gate on the clamping unit.
With the safety stroke not being reached, the clamping unit's safety gate cannot be opened. An
error message will be displayed.
HB6GB07L
0515MC
Chapter 7 - 19
Metering
F07-Cellmould-Nullung_01
HB6GB07L
Chapter 7 - 20 0515MC
Metering
F07-GRAVIMAX-Anzeige_GB00
This menu is used to preset the set values for the integrated Wittmann GRAVIMAX. The
description of settings and error numbers can be found in the Wittmann GRAVIMAX manual.
Note
The GRAVIMAX setting data can be stored in the product data record (see chapter 25.3 Data
records / Integration Wittmann periphery).7.5 GRAVIMAX integrated
HB6GB07L
0515MC
Chapter 7 - 21
Metering
F07-GRAVIMAX-Konfiguration_GB01
Info
This field displays the version number of the UpdateControl. The UpdateControl is responsible
for establishing the connection and displaying the GRAVIMAX on the machines.
HB6GB07L
Chapter 7 - 22 0515MC
Ejector
8 Ejector
F08-Allgemein_Seite1_GB02
In this menu, you may activate the ejector and set the respective parameters.
Enter the set values for the speeds in [mm/s] / [inch/s], the set values for the strokes in [mm] /
[inch], and the set values for the forces in [kN] / [shtn]. The respective maximum values can be
read off above the set value fields.
No ejector
In case you do not need an ejector, select this field.
CAUTION
In the "Setting mode" this setting will not influence the ejector, i.e. the ejector can be moved in
the setting mode although this program preselection has been activated.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 1
Ejector
Start ejector for Mould opened
Select this field if the ejector should only start for an opened mould and at the end of the "Delay
Ejector forward".
Vibrating stroke
If the ejector is operated with a stroke rate larger than 1, the "Ejector backward" movement will
be carried out up to this stroke position. Thus a small vibrating stroke in [mm] / [inch] may be
selected in the front ejector range. If this is not desirable, the vibrating stroke has to equated to
the limit position for "Ejector backward".
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 2 0515MC
Ejector
Ejector safety stroke
While the rotary unit (option) is activated, the "Ejector safety stroke" is activated which is shown
by a colour change of the text to black. These settings can be changed in user level only.
The safety stroke serves as protection for the mould and the ejector. The safety stroke must be
set in such a way that the mould cannot be damaged by turning the rotary unit.
In case the safety stroke has been exceeded, the movements of the rotary unit, closing
movement and the starting of the automatic cycle will be disabled and an error message will be
displayed.
CAUTION
The safety stroke is entered as absolute stroke (absolute stroke = stroke without zeroizing
Ejector). The current absolute stroke will be displayed.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 3
Ejector
F08-Allgemein_Seite2_06
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 4 0515MC
Ejector
CAUTION
It is recommended to choose the stroke marker "Ejector front" so that the injection moulding is
just prevented from falling down and may easily be discharged while the safety gate is opened.
deactivated
The ejector plate protection is not monitored.
Close mould / move in core(s)
If not active during input for the mould platen protection, closing and move in core(s) will be
disabled.
Mould close
If not active during input for the mould platen protection, closing will be disabled.
Closing mould up to safety position
If not active during input for the mould platen protection, closing until safety position ("Clamping
unit safety position") will be disabled.
Closing mould from safety position
If not active during input for the mould platen protection, closing from safety position ("Clamping
unit safety position") will be disabled.
Move in core(s)
If not active during input for the mould platen protection, move in core(s) will be disabled.
Move out core(s)
If not active during input for the mould platen protection, move out core(s) will be disabled.
Ejector back
If not active during input for the mould platen protection, the ejector back movement will be
disabled.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 5
Ejector
CAUTION
For vertical machines, the ejector platen protection is configured in the "Configuration Mould /
Page 3" menu under "Mould platen protection".
CAUTION
Risk of injury! If the ejector or core pullers are operated with the safety gate open, it must be
ensured that there are no pinching and / or crushing points on the mould.
This program must be deactivated before switching off the machine!
If this program has been selected (for machines destined for the U.S. you also have to activate
the key-operated switch), you can open the mould, move the ejector forward and the core
pullers in and out although the safety gate on the operator’s side is opened.
If the mould is opened, press the key "Ejector forward" and the "Move in / out core puller with
the safety gate open" (option). The ejector will move forward and the part can be removed. The
safety gate now has to be closed via the "Close safety gate" function key. After pressing the
"Close" function key, the ejector moves backward and the next cycle starts.
Europe: VIS switch for ejector forward/back, move in/out core pullers
Acknowledgement key for ejector forward/back, move in/out core pullers
Asia: Key-operated switch (VIS switch automatically adjusted) for ejector forward/
back, move in/out core pullers
USA: Key-operated switch (VIS switch automatically adjusted) for ejector forward,
move out core pullers
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 6 0515MC
Ejector
Ejector with core puller program
If the program "Ejector with core puller program activated" (activation on page 1), enter the core
puller programs and priorities for the ejector forward and back movements in this field. Chapter
9 shows an overview of the core puller programs.
Ejector dismantled
Activate this program preselection after having dismantled the ejector. The signals of the stroke
transducer will no longer be processed.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 7
Ejector
F08-Allgemein_Seite3_GB00
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 8 0515MC
Ejector
F08-Luftventile-Luftventile_01
CAUTION
This option may under no circumstances be used for triggering axis drives, such as pneumatic
cylinders, pneumatic motors or similar devices! In this option, there is no safety-related
connection with the safety doors and thus this air valve is triggered even if the safety gates are
open! This option may only be used for blowing functions without any risk for the user and would
not offer any protection against axis motions with threads to shearing and pinching.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 9
Ejector
Delay Air valve
This time in [s] will be started depending on the program preselection. At the end of this time the
air valve will be activated.
Program preselection 0
As soon as the "Start stroke" position has been reached for "Close mould", the delay time starts
and at the end of this time, the air valve will remain active until the beginning of the cooling time.
The set blowing time is of no importance here.
Program preselection 1
As soon as the "Start stroke" position has been reached for "Close mould", the delay time starts
and at the end of this time, the air valve will remain active for the set blowing duration.
Program preselection 2
The delay time starts for "Start Injection" and at the end of this time, the air valve will remain
active for the set blowing duration.
Program preselection 3
The delay time starts for "Start Cooling time" and at the end of this time, the air valve will remain
active for the set blowing duration.
Program preselection 4
As soon as the "Start stroke" position has been reached for "Open mould", the delay time will
start and at the end of this time, the air valve will remain active for the set blowing duration.
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 10 0515MC
Ejector
Program preselection 6
As soon as the "Start stroke" position and the set shot number has been reached for "Close
mould", the delay time starts and at the end of this time, the air valve will remain active for the
set blowing duration.
Program preselection 7
As soon as the "Start stroke" position and the set shot number has been reached for "Open
mould", the delay time will start and at the end of this time, the air valve will remain active for the
set blowing duration.
Program preselection 8
The delay time starts as soon as "Ejector forward" is started, and at the end of this time, the air
valve will remain active for the set blowing duration.
Program preselection 9
The delay time starts before the "End of cooling time". Together with the delay time (which in
this time has the function of a setup time), the air valve will remain active for the set blowing
duration.
Example:
Cooling time 3 seconds, delay time 0.5 seconds, blowing time 1 second. 2.5 seconds after the
beginning of the cooling time (0.5 seconds before the "End of cooling time"), the air valve will
become active during the blowing time of 1 second.
Program preselection 11
This program preselection causes an alternating change-over of two air valves.
The air valve performing the alternating change-over is preset in the "Counter Air valve" set
value field.
This program preselection is also active in the manual mode.
Example
Enter 1 for "Counter Air valve" for the "Air valve 2". If the program preselection 11 was selected
for the "Air valve 2", the "Air valve 2" will become active always if the "Air valve 1" is not active.
If the "Air valve 1" is active, "Air valve 2" will not be active.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 11
Ejector
Program preselection 12
The delay time starts as soon as „Move in core puller 1“ is started, and at the end of this time,
the air valve will remain active for the set blowing duration.
NOTE
The available air valve programs are shown in the „Air valves / info“ menu. Programs labelled
with VM are only available in VM machines. Us the two arrow buttons at the top right to change
to other pages.
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 12 0515MC
Ejector
F08-Luftventile-Allgemein_GB02
Use this program preselection to start the air vale in the manual mode according to the settings
for the automatic mode.
Example:
For "Air valve 2", 4 was entered in the "Program preselection" field and the set value 150 in
the "Start stroke Air valve" field. In the manual mode, the blowing time then starts at the "Start
stroke Air valve" stroke marker ("Open mould")
"Program preselection 9" is an exception. With this selection, the blowing time is started with
"Open mould".
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 13
Ejector
when setting
The air valves are relieved in the setting mode.
CAUTION
In general, the air valves are relieved in the case of EMERGENCY STOP.
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 14 0515MC
Ejector
F08-Abschraubeinheit-Einstellungen_02
In this menu, you may activate the screw-off unit and set the respective parameters.
Additionally, the status of the screw-off unit is displayed.
Screw-off unit
Use this program preselection to activate the screw-off unit.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 15
Ejector
Screw off to core puller robot signals 1 or 2
When activating this program preselection, the screwing in or out can only be carried out if the
respective release signal is set by the robot interface 1 (or 2, 3, 4, 5).
CAUTION
For an EUROMAP 67 interface it will be possible to request two core puller release signals
screwing off. Use setting 1 or to to activate the wished release signal. For the EUROMAP 12
interface, the „1“ setting is valid only.
F (force)
Enter here the required force in [kN] for screwing the screw-off unit in and out.
v (speed)
Enter here the required speed in [degree/s] for screwing the screw-off unit in and out.
Position
Preset here the required number of revolutions under "U" and the additional partial revolution
under "degree". Read the current position on the right of that entry.
Motion time
Read the duratin for screwing in and out here.
Priority
This column is at the moment still under way.
CAUTION
You may only activate the program numbers described here for the screw-off unit.
Changes of the programs in the automatic mode are not recommended since these changes will
not be accepted unless there is no active movement (e.g. during the change over or the cooling
time).
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 16 0515MC
Ejector
Program number 1
"Screw in" (screw out) screw-off unit at the "Mould open" position.
When removing the moulded articles manually (option), the "Screw in screw-off unit" movement
in the semiautomatic mode and with the key-operated switch activated or the acknowledgement
key pressed is also possible if the operational safety gate is opened.
Lockings:
Screwing in:
• Screw-off unit disabled if ejector not back.
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out before the screwing-in process and screwed in
after the movement (during the whole clamping procedure).
• Ejector disabled if screw-off unit not screwed out.
Screwing out:
• Screw-off unit disabled if ejector not back.
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out after the movement (during the whole opening
procedure).
Program number 2
"Screw in" (screw out) screw-off unit for "Intermediate stop Closing" (open). The stroke position
for "Intermediate stop" will be entered in the "Start" column. If the screw-off unit is "screwed in"
(screwed out), "Closing" (Open) will be continued.
Lockings:
Screwing in:
• Screw-off unit disabled if ejector not back.
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out before the screwing-in process (until the
"Intermediate stop Closing") and screwed in after the movement (after the intermediate
stop until "Mould closed").
• Ejector disabled if screw-off unit not screwed out.
Screwing out:
• Screw-off unit disabled if ejector not back.
• The screw-off unit must be screwed in after the movement (after the intermediate stop
until "Mould opened").
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 17
Ejector
Program number 3
"Screw in" screw-off unit for "Mould closed" (before clamping force build-up). "Screw out" screw-
off unit after clamping force reduction.
Lockings:
Screwing in:
• Screw-off unit disabled if ejector not back.
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out before the screwing-in process (before high
pressure build-up) and screwed in after the movement (during high pressure build-up).
• Ejector disabled if screw-off unit not screwed out.
Screwing out:
• Screw-off unit disabled if ejector not back.
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out after the movement (after high pressure
reduction).
Program number 4
"Screw in" screw-off unit after clamping force build-up. "Screw out" screw-off unit before
clamping force reduction.
Lockings:
Screwing in:
• Screw-off unit disabled if ejector not back.
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out before the screwing-in process (during the whole
clamping procedure) and screwed in after the movement.
• Injection disabled if the screw-off unit is not screwed in.
• Ejector disabled if screw-off unit not screwed out.
Screwing out:
• Screw-off unit disabled if ejector not back.
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out after the movement ("Mould opened").
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out after the movement (during the whole opening
procedure).
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 18 0515MC
Ejector
Program number 5
"Screw in" screw-off unit after "Mould opened". "Screw out" screw-off unit immediately after
reaching the "Screw-off unit is screwed in" position.
When removing the moulded articles manually (option), the "Screw in / out screw-off unit"
movements in the semiautomatic mode and with the key-operated switch activated or the
acknowledgement key pressed are also possible if the operational safety gate is opened.
CAUTION
This program is intended for the screw-off unit, which, in combination with the rotary unit,
assumes the function of an ejector. The actual ejector program must be deactivated during this
process (see chapter 8, no ejector).
Lockings:
Screwing in:
• Screw-off unit disabled if ejector not back.
• Closing disabled if screw-off unit not screwed out.
Screwing out:
• Screw-off unit disabled if ejector not back.
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out after the movement (during the whole closing
procedure).
• Closing disabled if screw-off unit not screwed out.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 19
Ejector
Program number 6
"Screw in" (screw out) screw-off unit for "Start stroke Closing" (Opening) parallel to the
movement. The stroke marker for "Start stroke" will be entered in the "Start" column.
After the screw-off unit has been "screwed in" (screwed out) when reaching the stop stroke,
"Closing" (Opening) will be continued.
After the screw-off unit has not yet been "screwed in" (screwed out) when reaching the stop
stroke, "Closing" (Opening) will be interrupted. Only after the screw-off unit has been "screwed
in" (screwed out), will "Closing" (Opening) be continued. The stroke position for "Stop stroke"
will be entered in the "Stop" column.
Lockings:
Screwing in:
• Screw-off unit disabled if ejector not back.
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out before the screwing-in process (until start stroke)
and screwed in after the movement of the screw-off unit.
• Ejector disabled if screw-off unit not screwed out.
Screwing out:
• Screw-off unit disabled if ejector not back.
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out after the movement of the screw-off unit.
CAUTION
This program can only be used if the machine is designed for parallel movements.
Program number 7
"Screw in" screw-off unit before injeciton. "Screw out" screw-off unit after holding pressure end.
Lockings:
Screwing in:
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out before the screwing-in process (before injection)
and screwed in after the movement (during injection).
• Opening disabled if the screw-off unit is not screwed out.
Screwing out:
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out after the movement (after holding pressure end).
• Opening disabled if the screw-off unit is not screwed out.
• Closing disabled if screw-off unit not screwed out.
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 20 0515MC
Ejector
Program number 8
"Screw in" Screw-off unit after "Ejector is in front position". "Screw out" screw-off unit before the
movement "Ejector backward".
Lockings:
Screwing in:
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out before the screwing-in process (ejector forward)
and screwed in after the movement of the screw-off unit.
• Opening disabled if the screw-off unit is not screwed out.
• Closing disabled if screw-off unit not screwed out.
Screwing out:
• The screw-off unit must be screwed out after the movement (during ejector backward).
• Opening disabled if the screw-off unit is not screwed out.
• Closing disabled if screw-off unit not screwed out.
Start
Enter the start stroke for "Screwing in" and / or "Screwing out" in [mm] / [inch] in this field.
This input is only required for program preselections 2, 6, and 8 which will be indicated by
changing the colour of the set value from grey to blue.
Stop
Enter the stop stroke for "Screwing in" and / or "Screwing out" in [mm] / [inch] in this field.
This input is only required for program preselections 6 and 8 which will be indicated by changing
the colour of the set value from grey to blue.
s (current stroke)
The current start / stop stroke is displayed in [mm] / [inch]. This is the stroke which will trigger a
screwing in or screwing out.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 21
Ejector
Lock Axis
The axis (movement) blocked by the screw-off unit will be displayed here.
Description of the abbreviations displayed:
CU1+ opening
CU1- closing
EU1+ Ejector forward (upper parts ejector)
EU1- Ejector back (upper parts ejector)
RE1+ Station ejector 1 forward (rotary table machines only)
RE1- Station ejector 1 back (rotary table machines only)
RE2+ Station ejector 2 forward (rotary table machines only)
RE2- Station ejector 2 back (rotary table machines only)
RE3+ Station ejector 3 forward (rotary table machines only)
RE3- Station ejector 3 back (rotary table machines only)
RT1+ Turn rotary table ccw (rotary table machines only)
RT1- Turn rotary table cw (rotary table machines only)
NU1- Injection unit 1 (A) forward
NU1+ Injection unit 1 (A) back
NU2- Injection unit 2 (B) forward
NU2+ Injection unit 2 (B) back.
IP1+ Metering / Decompression (Injection unit 1 = A).
IP1- Injection (Injection unit 1 = A).
IP2+ Metering / Decompression (Injection unit 2 = B).
IP2- Injection (Injection unit 2 = B).
Example
Display EU1 - (when screwing out):
Ejector backward movement is disabled until screwing off is performed.
Reference axis
In this field, it will be indicated to which axis (movement) the respective screw-off unit refers, i.e.
depending on which movement the screw-off unit will be screwed in or out.
For a description of the abbreviations displayed please refer to "Block Axis" (see present
chapter).
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 22 0515MC
Ejector
2nd movement of screw-off unit
The second movement of the screw-off unit refers to a second screwing in and/or out in a
machine cycle. Select the programs for the second screw-in and screw-out- motion and
determine the parameters.
CAUTION
Entering the program number 0 switches off the 2nd movement of the screw-off unit.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 23
Ejector
F08-Abschraubeinheit-Diagnose_01
Screw-off unit is screwed out (yellow colour) and valve remains triggered
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 24 0515MC
Ejector
A red X, which is displayed before the movement arrows of the status, means that the
movement was stopped.
In the menu "Media centre / status bar", the status can be added to the status bar (see chapter
21).
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 25
Ejector
F08-Abschraubeinheit-Einrichten_02
Use this menu to preset the setting speed and the setting force for the screw-off unit.
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 26 0515MC
Ejector
Referencing procedure
The reference point must be newly determined after having assembled the adaptive screw-off
unit. Referencing is only possible in user level 20. If the screw-off unit is not referenced, this will
be indicated by changing the colour of the actual value to red. The actual value is indicated in
green after the referencing has been successfully completed.
Procedure:
1. Specifiy the actually determined position of the screw-off unit as the set value.
2. Activate function selection "Referencing".
NC error analysis
This menu lists the number of errors, the number of warnings, the error number and the error
text of the corresponding error message of the servo-electrical screw-off unit.
Activate the function key "Alarms, submenu NC errors" (also refer to chapter 28) to access this
menu.
Motor diagnosis
In the NC diagnosis menu, the current motor temperature and the drive utilization of the screw-
off unit can be read. Additionally, motor-specific data of the screw-off unit are displayed.
Activate the function key "Diagnosis, submenu NC diagnosis" (also refer to chapter 22) to
access this menu.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 27
Ejector
F08-Stationsauswerfer_Seite1_02
In this menu, you can set the corresponding parameters of station ejector 1-3.
CAUTION
The station ejector can be deactivated on "Mould table Configuration Page 1" of the stations
(see chapter 11).
If the station ejector has been deactivated, this information will be displayed in the "Station
ejector 1 (-3) not used" headline.
If the station ejector is activated, the defined assignment "Station ejector 1 (-3) on station" will
be displayed in the headline.
The station ejector programs will be determined by defining the station ejector (Setting on
"Mould table Configuration Page 1" of the stations, see chapter 11) A station ejector may be
defined as insertion unit, as ejector (parts removal) or as insertion unit / ejector (parts removal).
If no definition has been set for the station ejector, this will be signalled by means of the "Parts
removal and insertion not defined" message on the right of the program preselection for station
ejectors.
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 28 0515MC
Ejector
The parts removal / insertion procedure has to be acknowledged by pressing the "Cycle Start"
key. After the acknowledgement the cycle will be continued.
CAUTION
This delay time should be longer than the delay for "Close mould" since, otherwisse, the ejector
is started before the closing procedure.
Safety stroke Station ejector 1-3
The safety stroke serves as protection for the mould and the ejector. The safety stroke must be
set in such a way that the mould cannot be damaged.
In case the safety stroke has been exceeded, the movements of the mould table, closing
movement and the starting of the automatic cycle will be disabled and an error message will be
displayed.
CAUTION
The safety stroke is entered as absolute stroke (absolute stroke = stroke without zeroizing
Ejector). The current absolute stroke will be displayed.
Ejector intermediate stop
If this field is activated, the ejector always moves to intermediate stop while moving in before it
reaches its limit position
Stroke Ejector Intermediate stop
Introduction of the stroke where the intermediate stop is to be carried out.
Delay Ejector Intermediate stop
Introduction of the delay time during which the ejector is in the intermediate stop.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 29
Ejector
F08-Stationsauswerfer_Seite2_03
No ejector
In case you do not need an station ejector, select this field.
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 30 0515MC
Ejector
Stat. ejec. forward ->Parts removal -> Stat. ejec. back -> Insertion
When activating this program preselection the parts removal procedure will be performed
after the station ejector forward movement. Press "Cycle Start" to acknowledge and the
station ejector will move back again. Now the insertion procedure starts. Press "Cycle Start" to
acknowledge and to continue the cycle.
Stat. ejec. forward -> Parts removal/insertion -> Stat. ejec. back -> ínsertion
When activating this program preselection the parts removal / 1st insertion procedure will be
performed after the station ejector forward movement. Press "Cycle Start" to acknowledge
and the station ejector will move back again. Now the second insertion procedure starts. Upon
acknowledgement with the cycle start key, the cycle will be continued after having finished all
defined insertion procedures.
CAUTION
This program is available only in combination with several insertion cycles.
Stat. ejec. forward ->Parts removal -> Stat. ejec. back -> Variable insertion (option)
When activating this program preselection the parts removal procedure will be performed after
the station ejector forward movement. Press "Cycle Start" to acknowledge and the station
ejector will move back again. Now the insertion procedure starts. Upon acknowledgement
with the cycle start key, the cycle will be continued after having finished all defined insertion
procedures.
CAUTION
While the option program "Intermediate stop Station ejector backward" is activated, the insertion
procedure is carried out in the respective intermediate stop position.
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 31
Ejector
Station ejector defined as ejector (parts removal):
Stat. ejec. forward -> Parts removal -> Stat. ejec. back
When activating this program preselection the parts removal procedure will be performed after
the station ejector forward movement. Press "Cycle Start" to acknowledge and the station
ejector will move back again.
CAUTION
The program preselections "Start ejector for Mould opened" and "Start ejector for Open stroke"
are available only if a station ejector has been defined for "Station A".
CAUTION
For vertical machines, the ejector platen protection is configured in the "Configuration Mould /
Page 3" menu under "Mould platen protection".
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 32 0515MC
Ejector
Station ejector back parallel to close
If this program is activated, moving back the station ejector is possible parallel to closing. The
station ejector must be moved back until the "Clamping unit safety position for station ejector
back (see chapter 1.6.1)" has been reached, otherwise the clamping unit will be stopped.
NOTE
This program is possible only in combination with "Removal/insertion in front".
HB6GB08J
0515MC
Chapter 8 - 33
Ejector
HB6GB08J
Chapter 8 - 34 0515MC
Core puller
9 Core puller
F09-Kernzugeinstellung-Übersicht_01
In the "Core puller" menu, you set the number of core pullers and the parameters required. For
the settings for valve switch-off, delay time, vibrating stroke, and various actual value displays
please refer to the "Enlarged core puller setting".
CAUTION
The control system is designed for core puller programs, however, the programs may only be
activated, if there are core pullers installed.
Core puller 1 - 12
Select the programs for the move-in and move-out- motion of the desired core pullers and
determine the parameters. To obtain a better overview, an info text can be assigned to each
core puller. This info text can be entered in user level 20 only.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 1
Core puller
CAUTION
In the manual and the setting mode, the movement of the core pullers will be carried out by
means of manual switches for the "Open" (Move out core puller) and "Close" (Move in core
puller) functions depending on the program preselection settings.
If the core puller is switched off, the limit switches will not be checked and other movements will
not be locked.
CAUTION
Entering the program number 0 deactivates the respective core puller movement inspite of the
core puller being activated.
We do not recommend to perform any changes in the core puller programs in the automatic
mode,since these changes will not be accepted unless there is no active movement (e.g. during
the change over or the cooling time).
Pressing the information key shows an overview of the available core puller programs.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 2 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 1
"Move in" core puller before closing (in position "Mould open") "Move out" core puller after
mould open
When removing the moulded articles manually (option), the "Move in core puller" movement for
horizontal machines in the semiautomatic mode and with the key-operated switch activated or
the acknowledgement key pressed is also possible if the operational safety gate is opened.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) not back.
• Ejector (Upper parts ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) is not back (for vertical machines only
"Move in" core puller.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 3
Core puller
Program number 2
"Move in" (move out) core puller for "Intermediate stop Close" (open). The stroke position for
"Intermediate stop" will be entered in the "Start" column. After the core puller has been "moved
in" (moved out), "Close" (open) will be continued.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) not back.
• Ejector (Upper parts ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) is not back (for vertical machines only
"Move in" core puller.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 4 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 3
"Move in" core puller for "Mould closed" (before clamping force build-up). "Move out" core puller
after clamping force reduction.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) not back.
• Ejector (Upper parts ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) is not back (for vertical machines only
"Move in" core puller.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 5
Core puller
Program number 4
"Move in" core puller after clamping force build-up. "Move out" core puller before clamping force
reduction.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) not back.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
• Ejector (Upper parts ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
Program Move out core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) is not back (for vertical machines only
"Move in" core puller.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 6 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 5
"Move in" core puller after "Mould opened". "Move out" core puller immediately after reaching
the "Core puller is moved in" position.
When removing the moulded articles manually (option), the "Move in / move out core puller"
movements on horizontal machines in the semiautomatic mode and with the key-operated
switch activated or the acknowledgement key pressed are also possible if the operational safety
gate is opened.
CAUTION
This program is intended for the core puller, which, in combination with the circular disc
or a cirular table, assumes the function of an ejector. The actual ejector program must be
deactivated during this process (see chapter 8, no ejector).
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) not back.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Ejector (Upper parts ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
Program Move out core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) is not back (for vertical machines only
"Move in" core puller.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Ejector (Upper parts ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 7
Core puller
Program number 6
"Move in" (move out) core puller for "Start stroke Close" (open) parallel to the movement. The
stroke marker for "Start stroke" will be entered in the "Start" column.
After the core puller has been "moved in" (moved out) when reaching the stop stroke, "Close"
(open) will be continued.
If the core puller has not yet been "moved in" (moved out) when reaching the stop stroke,
"Close" (open) will be interrupted. Only after the core puller has been "moved in" (moved out),
will "Close" (open) be continued. The stroke position for "Stop stroke" will be entered in the
"Stop" column.
CAUTION
This program can only be used if the machine is designed for parallel movements.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) not back.
• Ejector (Upper parts ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) is not back (for vertical machines only
"Move in" core puller.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 8 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 7
"Move in" core puller before injection. "Move out" core puller after Holding pressure End
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Ejector (Upper parts ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
Program Move out core:
• Ejector (Upper parts ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Opening disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) is not back (for vertical machines only
"Move in" core puller.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 9
Core puller
Program number 8 (horizontal machines only)
"Move in" core puller after "Ejector is in front position". "Move out" core puller before the
movement "Ejector backward".
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Opening disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
Program Move out core:
• Opening disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 10 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 8 (for vertical machines only)
Program number 9 (horizontal machines only)
"Move in" (move out) core puller for "Start stroke Injection" parallel to the movement. "Move out"
core puller for "Start stroke Injection" parallel starting with movement. The stroke marker for
"Start stroke" will be entered in the "Start" column.
If the core puller has not yet been "moved in" when reaching the stop stroke, "Injection" will be
interrupted. Only after the core puller has been "moved in", will "Injection" be continued. The
stroke position for "Stop stroke" will be entered in the "Stop" column.
CAUTION
This program can only be used if the machine is designed for parallel movements. Furthermore,
this program cannot be used simultaneously for moving in and moving out. A combination with
program 7 is not allowed either.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) not back.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Ejector (Upper parts ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
Program Move out core:
• Ejector (Upper parts ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Opening disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (upper parts ejector) not back.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 11
Core puller
Program number 10
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the injection station (Station A). The core puller will be assigned to the lower mould
on the "Mould table / Tandem Mould configuration page 1", see chapter 20.
"Move in" core puller after "Mould opened". "Move out" core puller immediately after reaching
the "Core puller is moved in" position.
When removing the moulded articles manually (option), the "Move in / move out core puller"
movements on horizontal machines in the semiautomatic mode and with the key-operated
switch activated or the acknowledgement key pressed are also possible if the operational safety
gate is opened.
Note
This program is intended for the core puller, which, in combination with the mould table,
assumes the function of an ejector. The actual ejector program should be deactivated during
this process (see chapter 8, no ejector).
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) not back.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
Program Move out core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) is not back (for vertical machines only
"Move in" core puller.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 12 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 11
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the injection station (Station A). The core puller will be assigned to the lower mould
on the "Mould table / Tandem Mould configuration page 1", see chapter 20.
"Move in" core puller before closing "Mould opened". "Move outn" core puller after Mould
opened.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 13
Core puller
Program number 12
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the injection station (Station A). The core puller will be assigned to the lower mould
on the "Mould table / Tandem Mould configuration page 1", see chapter 20.
"Move in" (move out) core puller for "Intermediate stop Close" (open). The stroke position for
"Intermediate stop" will be entered in the "Start" column. After the core puller has been "moved
in" (moved out), "Close" (open) will be continued.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 14 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 13
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the injection station (Station A). The core puller will be assigned to the lower mould
on the "Mould table / Tandem Mould configuration page 1", see chapter 20.
"Move in" core puller for "Mould closed" (before clamping force build-up). "Move out" core puller
after clamping force reduction.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 15
Core puller
Program number 14
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the injection station (Station A). The core puller will be assigned to the lower mould
on the "Mould table / Tandem Mould configuration page 1", see chapter 20.
"Move in" core puller after clamping force build-up. "Move out" core puller before clamping force
reduction.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 16 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 15
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the injection station (Station A). The core puller will be assigned to the lower mould
on the "Mould table / Tandem Mould configuration page 1", see chapter 20.
"Move in" core puller after "Mould opened". "Move out" core puller immediately after reaching
the "Core puller is moved in" position.
When removing the moulded articles manually (option), the "Move in / move out core puller"
movements on horizontal machines in the semiautomatic mode and with the key-operated
switch activated or the acknowledgement key pressed are also possible if the operational safety
gate is opened.
Note
This program is intended for the core puller, which, in combination with the mould table,
assumes the function of an ejector. The actual ejector program should be deactivated during
this process (see chapter 8, no ejector).
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) not back.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
Program Move out core:
• Core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) is not back (for vertical machines only
"Move in" core puller.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 17
Core puller
Program number 16
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the injection station (Station A). The core puller will be assigned to the lower mould
on the "Mould table / Tandem Mould configuration page 1", see chapter 20.
"Move in" (move out) core puller for "Start stroke Close" (open) parallel to the movement. The
stroke marker for "Start stroke" will be entered in the "Start" column.
If the core puller has not yet been "moved in" (moved out) when reaching the stop stroke,
"Close" (open) will be interrupted. Only after the core puller has been "moved in" (moved out),
will "Close" (open) be continued. The stroke position for "Stop stroke" will be entered in the
"Stop" column.
CAUTION
This program can only be used if the machine is designed for parallel movements.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 18 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 17
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the injection station (Station A). The core puller will be assigned to the lower mould
on the "Mould table / Tandem Mould configuration page 1", see chapter 20.
"Move in" core puller before injection. "Move out" core puller after Holding pressure End
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
Program Move out core:
• Opening disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 19
Core puller
Program number 18 (horizontal machines only)
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the injection station (Station A). The core puller will be assigned to the lower mould
on the "Mould table / Tandem Mould configuration page 1", see chapter 20.
"Move in" core puller after "Ejector is in front position". "Move out" core puller before the
movement "Ejector backward".
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Opening disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
Program Move out core:
• Opening disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 20 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 18 (for vertical machines only)
Program number 19 (horizontal machines only)
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the injection station (Station A). The core puller will be assigned to the lower mould
on the "Mould table / Tandem Mould configuration page 1", see chapter 20.
"Move in" core puller for "Start stroke Injection" parallel to the movement. "Move out" core puller
for "Start stroke Injection" parallel starting with movement. The stroke marker for "Start stroke"
will be entered in the "Start" column.
If the core puller has not yet been "moved in" (moved out) when reaching the stop stroke,
"Injection" will be interrupted. Only after the core puller has been "moved in" (moved out), will
"Injection" be continued. The stroke position for "Stop stroke" will be entered in the "Stop"
column.
CAUTION
This program can only be used if the machine is designed for parallel movements. Furthermore,
this program cannot be used simultaneously for moving in and moving out. A combination with
program 7 is not allowed either.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
Program Move out core:
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Opening disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 21
Core puller
Program number 21 (22 / 23) (for vertical machines only)
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the respective ejector station. The core puller will be assigned to the lower mould on
the "Mould table configuration page 1", see chapter 20.
"Move in" core puller after station ejector 1 (2 / 3) has reached the "back" position.
"Move out" core puller before station ejector 1, (2 / 3) moves forward.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 22 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 24 (25 / 26 / 27 / 28) (for vertical machines only)
Lower mould dependent program.
The program is carried out in the automatic mode only if the corresponding lower mould is in the
operator station and the 1st (2nd / 3rd / 4th / 5th) insert part has been inserted.
"Move in" core puller after "Operation enabled" unless the respective operator station is a fully
automatic insertion station (manual loading).
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
CAUTION
Operation enabled: Cycle start key illuminated.
After operation enabled: Cycle start key was pressed.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 23
Core puller
Program number 29 (for vertical machines only)
Lower mould dependent program. The program is only carried out in the automatic mode if the
respective lower mould is in the corresponding operator station (removal station) and no station
ejector was activated in this station.
"Move in" core puller after "Operation enabled".
"Move out" core puller before "Operation enabled".
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Ejector (station ejector) forward disabled if the core puller is not moved out.
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
CAUTION
Operation enabled: Cycle start key illuminated.
After operation enabled: Cycle start key pressed.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 24 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 31 (32 / 33) (for vertical machines only)
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the respective ejector station.
"Move in" core puller parallel to the "Ejector backward" movement via start stroke of station
ejector 1 (2 / 3).
"Move out" core puller parallel to the "Ejector forward" movement via start stroke of station
ejector 1 (2 / 3).
If the core puller has not yet been "moved in" (moved out) when reaching the stop stroke, the
"Ejector movement" will be interrupted. Only after the core puller has been "moved in" (moved
out), will the "Ejector movement" be continued. The stroke position for "Stop stroke" will be
entered in the "Stop" column.
CAUTION
This program can only be used if the machine is designed for parallel movements.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 25
Core puller
Program number 34 (35 / 36) (for vertical machines only)
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the respective ejector station.
"Move in" core puller parallel to the "Ejector forward" movement via start stroke of station ejector
1 (2 / 3).
"Move out" core puller parallel to the "Ejector backward" movement via start stroke of station
ejector 1 (2 / 3).
If the core puller has not yet been "moved in" (moved out) when reaching the stop stroke, the
"Ejector movement" will be interrupted. Only after the core puller has been "moved in" (moved
out), will the "Ejector movement" be continued. The stroke position for "Stop stroke" will be
entered in the "Stop" column.
CAUTION
This program can only be used if the machine is designed for parallel movements.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
Program Move out core:
• "Move in" core puller disabled if ejector (station ejector) of the corresponding lower mould
not back.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 26 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 37 (38 / 39) (for vertical machines only)
Lower mould dependent program. The program will only be carried out if the appropriate lower
mould is in the respective ejector station.
"Move in" core puller after the movement "Ejector forward" if the station ejector 1 (2 / 3) also
reached its limit position.
Monitoring functions:
Program Move in core:
• Closing disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
• Start injection into the mould disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
• Ejector (station ejector) back disabled if the core puller is not moved in.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 27
Core puller
Program number 40 (option - "Combiform" only)
"Move in" core puller after clamping force reduction or "Degassing Dwell time".
"Move out" core puller after clamping force reduction or "Degassing Dwell time".
CAUTION
This program can be used only if the "Combiform program" is activated.
The program for moving in and moving out can be used onyl alternatively, i.e. the core cannot
be moved in and out at the same time.
Monitoring functions:
Monitoring functions:
„Move in core“ program:
• Core puller locked, if ejector (station ejector) is not back
• Injection with unit A is locked, if core puller is not moved out
• Injection with unit B is locked, if core puller is not moved in
• Injection with unit C is locked, if core puller is not moved in
„Move out core“ program:
• Core puller locked, if ejector (station ejector) is not back
• Injection with unit A is locked, if core puller is not moved in
• Injection with unit B is locked, if core puller is not moved out
• Injection with unit C is locked, if core puller is not moved out
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 28 0114WT
Core puller
Program number 41 (42, 43) (optional - only with „Combiform“)
„Moving in“ core puller after clamping force build-up.
„Moving out“ core puller after „degassing dwell time“.
CAUTION
This program can only be run, if the „Combiform“ program is activated.
The program is used, if injection is to take place with the injection unit A (B, C) after the respective
core puller movement.
Monitoring functions:
„Move in core“ program:
• Core puller locked, if ejector (station ejector) is not back
• Injection with unit A (B, C) is locked, if core puller is not moved in
„Move out core“ program:
• Core puller locked, if ejector (station ejector) is not back
• Injection with unit A (B, C) is locked, if core puller is not moved out
Priority
By means of the priorities you can set an order for the core pullers for the same start conditions.
The lower the value of the number = higher priority.
CAUTION
Priority "1" = highest priority
p (pressure)
Enter the required pressure in [bar] / [psi] for moving in and out the core in this field.
v (speed)
Enter the required speed in [%] for moving in and out the core in this field.
Start / Stop
Enter the start value (stop value) for "Move in" (move out) core puller in this field. If a start value
(stop value) is required for a core puller program, this will be displayed by a colour change of
the set value from grey to blue. The unit of the start value (stroke value) is displayed on the right
of the input.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 29
Core puller
Core via time
Select in the left field whether the core puller is to be monitored via limit switches or moved in
(1) or out (2) via time.
The following inputs are possible:
0= Core puller via limit switch.
Entering this set value will cause a monitoring of the limit position.
When ever possible, core puller positions should be monitored by limit switches. If this is
not the case, there is no certainty that all core puller movements have been completed,
and damage to the mould may easily occur (especially when setting the machine).
1= Core puller via time.
When entering this set value, the limit position will not be monitored.
CAUTION
After this selection, the core puller has to be moved once to the "Core puller is moved out"
position in order to be able to recognise the limit position.
2= Core puller via limit switch with additional triggering after having moved in (moved out).
Entering this set value will also cause a monitoring of the limit position.
In this field, you enter the time for which the core puller is still to be triggered after having
reached the limit position.
3= Core puller via limit switch with additional time monitoring.
Entering this set value will also cause a monitoring of the limit position.
In this field, you enter the time during which the core puller must have reached the limit
position. With core puller operation via button, this monitoring is inactive.
CAUTION
The program selections for limit switch monitoring are valid only for core pullers which are
operated via limit switches.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 30 0114WT
Core puller
F09-Kernzugeinstellung-Allgemein_02
Core pullers via keys (in the manual and setting mode) (option)
If this program preselection is active, those core pullers equipped with manual switches will be
operated using these switches in the manual as well as in the setting mode.
If this program preselection is deactivated, the core puller movement will be performed using
the keys for the "Mould Open" (Move out core puller) and " Mould Close" (Move in core puller)
function in the manual and in the setting modes, depending on the program preselections.
CAUTION
The core puller movements can always be performed, independently of any limit positions.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 31
Core puller
Ejector forward, move cores for an opened safety gate (option for horizontal machine).
CAUTION
Risk of injury! If the ejector or core pullers are operated with the safety gate open, it must be
ensured that there are no pinching and / or crushing points on the mould.
This program must be deactivated before switching off the machine!
If this program has been selected (for machines destined for the U.S. you also have to activate
the key-operated switch), you can open the mould, move the ejector forward and the core
pullers in and out although the safety gate on the operator’s side is opened. In the operating
mode "Semiautomatic" and "Ejector forward -> Parts removal / insertion -> Ejector back", the
safety gate will open while the mould is opened.
If the mould is opened, press the key "Ejector forward" and the "Move in / out core puller with
the safety gate open" (option). The ejector will move forward and the part can be removed. The
safety gate now has to be closed via the "Close safety gate" function key. After pressing the
"Close" function key, the ejector moves backward and the next cycle starts.
Pressure discharge
No pressure relief
The cores are only released if the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed.
When setting
The cores are relieved only when changing over to the setting mode.
CAUTION
In the event of an EMERGENCY STOP, the cores are always released.
These program preselections apply to all cores, and the respective function will be always
carried out even if the respective core puller was switched off.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 32 0114WT
Core puller
F09-Kernzugeinstellung-erwEinstellung1_03
Use the menu "Enlarged core puller setting" for additional settings for the core puller which are
not available on the core puller overview page.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 33
Core puller
Core puller to robot signals 1 or 2
When activating this program preselection the core puller will only move in or out if the
respective release signal is set by the robot interface 1 (or 2, 3, 4, 5).
In case several core pullers are activated, these releases will apply to all core pullers. If several
core puller have been activated, the output signals at the robot interface will only be set if all
preselected core pullers have reached similiar limit positions.
CAUTION
For an EUROMAP 67 interface it will be possible to request two release signals for the core
puller. Use setting 1 or to to activate the wished release signal. For the EUROMAP 12 interface,
the "1" setting is valid only.
CAUTION
The error reaction can only be set for all limit switch monitorings together.
Time p2+v2
Pressure p2
Speed v2
The "Time p2xv2" is started with the core puller movement (the core puller is moving with preset
pressure and speed). At the end of this time, pressure p2 and speed v2 will be triggered.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 34 0114WT
Core puller
F09-Kernzugeinstellung-erwEinstellung2_02
Start
Stop
For the description refer to the core puller overview page.
Additonally, the current start / stop value is displayed here. This is the stroke which will trigger a
core puller movement.
CAUTION
When setting a vibrating core puller the individual motion times per stroke are measured and not
the total time of the entire vibration procedure.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 35
Core puller
Valve switch-off
If this program preselection is activated, the valve for core puller „moving in“ (moving out) is
switched on after the position „Core puller is moved in“ (moved out) is reached. This is also
indicated in the core puller status bar.
If this program preselection is deactivated, the valve is switched off when the respective position
is reached.
Delay Time
Specify the delay for the "Move in core puller" or "Move out core puller" movement in [s] in this
field.
Reference Axis
In this field, it will be indicated to which axis (movement) the respective core puller refers, i.e.
depending on which movement the core puller will be moved in or out.
For a description of the abbreviations displayed please refer to "Block Axis" (see present
chapter, Core puller Page 1).
Lock Axis
The axis (movement) blocked by the respective core puller will be displayed here.
Description of the abbreviations displayed:
CU1+ Opening
CU1- Cosing
EU1+ Ejector forward (upper parts ejector)
EU1- Ejector back (upper parts ejector)
RE1+ Station ejector 1 forward (vertical machines only)
RE1- Station ejector 1 back (vertical machines only)
RE2+ Station ejector 2 forward (vertical machines only)
RE2- Station ejector 2 back (vertical machines only)
RE3+ Station ejector 3 forward (vertical machines only)
RE3- Station ejector 3 back (vertical machines only)
RT1+ Mould table left (mould table machines only)
RT1- Mould table right (mould table machines only)
TT1+ Turn circular disc or cirular table ccw
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 36 0114WT
Core puller
TT1- Turn circular disc or cirular table cw
NU1- Injection unit 1 (A) forward
NU1+ Injection unit 1 (A) back
NU2- Injection unit 2 (B) forward
NU2+ Injection unit 2 (B) back.
NU3- Injection unit 3 (C) forward
NU3+ Injection unit 3 (C) back
IP1+ Metering / Decompression (Injection unit 1 = A).
IP1- Injection (Injection unit 1 = A).
IP2+ Metering / Decompression (Injection unit 2 = B).
IP2- Injection (Injection unit 2 = B).
IP3+ Metering / Decompression (Injection unit 3 = C).
IP3- Injection (Injection unit 3 = C).
Example
Display EU1- (for Move out core puller 1). Ejector back movement will be disabled unless core
puller 1 is moved out.
CAUTION
Entering the program number 0 switches off the 2nd core movement.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 37
Core puller
F09-Kernzugprogramme-Seite1_01
This menu can be used to create core puller programs in the user area. The user are is the
program number area of the freely programmable core puller programs and will be indicated in
the title line.
Core puller programs, which are not within the user area,cannot be changed but only viewed.
Program active in
The operating mode (manual, automatic, setting), in which the respective core puller program is
active, is preselected here. If not operatating mode is selected, the program is not available or
cancelled.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 38 0114WT
Core puller
Program number
The program number and the Pull Down menu on the right of the program numer will be used
to determine the program which is to be used. Moving in uses another memory position than
Moving out. It is thus possible to use the same program numbers for Move in core puller and
Move out core puller. When setting the "Enlarged groups 0-3", the start number must be entered
additionally.
CAUTION
Move in, move in Intermediate stop, enlarged group 0 (move out, move out Intermediate stop,
enlarged group 1) use the same memory position.
Only use the enlarged groups 0 and 1 if the corresponding start commands were programmed.
The enlarged groups 2 and 3 are not responsible for the core pullers but for other free
proceedings (robot, rotary unit ...).
Program name
The program number of the respective core puller program is entered here. This text is
displayed in the core puller programs information. You can reach the core puller programs
information by pressing the "Online information key".
Start
The basic definition of the program is made here. The right Pull Down menu represents the
main movements with direction. The number beside this Pull Down menu is used to dstinguish
between axes of the same type.
Ex.:
"Injection piston forward" and "Setting 2" means that the program refers to the second injection
piston (injection piston of injection unit B).
In the left Pull Down menu, the following versions can be set:
• For intermediate stop.
The main movement (e.g. clamping) moves to the preset intermediate stop, then the core
puller is moving, afterwards the main movement continues moving to its end.
• Before.
The core puller is moving still before the main movement, only then will the main axis
start its movement.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 39
Core puller
• After.
After having finished the main movement, the core puller is started.
• Parallel to.
The core puller is started together with the main movement, or the core puller waits until
its start condition has met. Core puller movement and main movement can be carried out
at the same time (prerequisite: the hydraulic system is designed for parallel movements).
The main movement is deemed to be finished when both core puller and main movement
have reached their targets.
• Serial.
If the main movement is active and the start condition is met, the core puller is moving
and the main movement is stopped. The main movement continues moving only after the
core puller has reached its target. The main movement is deemed to be finished when
both core puller and main movement have reached their targets.
• Parallel from.
If the main movement is active and the start condition is met, the core puller is moving
parallel to the main movement (prerequisite: the hydraulic system is designed for parallel
movements). In this case, the core puller must, however, not be finished for finishing the
main movement.
Start condition
The start condition for the core puller is preselected here. The type of the start condition is
selected via the program selection.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 40 0114WT
Core puller
Analog start condition
Analog start conditions can be selected here. Use the right Pull Down menu to set the
comparative operator.
Ex.: "if position >= start value"
The core puller is moving if the position of the main axis (e.g. clamping unit) is greater than /
equal to the start value on the core puller side.
CAUTION
If "Start for intermediate stop" was preselected, "Position" must be preselected as the analog
start condition.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 41
Core puller
Internal variable for vertical machine only:
CP_CUmon <> 0: Breathing sequence active, dummy mould active
CP_REmon[0] <> 0: Station ejector 1-3 not back
CP_REmon[1] <> 0: Station ejector 1 not back
CP_REmon[2] <> 0: Station ejector 2 not back
CP_REmon[3] <> 0: Station ejector 3 not back
CP_DY1mon[0] <> 0: part inserted
CP_DY1mon[1] <> 0: Part 1 inserted / 1st insertion cycle
CP_DY1mon[2] <> 0: Part 2 inserted / second insertion cycle
CP_DY1mon[3] <> 0: Part 3 inserted / third insertion cycle
CP_DY1mon[4] <> 0: Part 4 inserted / 4th insertion cycle
CP_DY1mon[5] <> 0: Part 5 inserted / 5th insertion cycle
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 42 0114WT
Core puller
F09-Kernzugprogramme-Seite2_01
Monitoring
Here, the monitorings are assigned to the core puller program. Up to 5 monitorings can be
programmed. The best explanation is given by an example: "At injection piston forward 1 core
moved in stop" means that the core puller must have moved in during the movement of injection
piston 1 (injection unit A) forward (injection and holding pressure), otherwise both movements
are stopped.
The left Pull Down menu is used to activate the monitoring:
• …
Monitoring deactivated.
• At.
Monitoring during the complete movement.
• Before
Monitoring only during the start of the movement.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 43
Core puller
The next Pull Down menu, on its right, a predefined axis direction can be selected. If no axis
is available in the Pull Down menu, an axis abbreviation can be entered on page 2 using "Enl.
setting".
Use the next Pull Down menu, on its right, to set the status "Core moved in and moved out".
With "Enl. setting" any status of the core puller can be entered on page 2.
The next Pull Down menu, on its right, is used to set the error reaction of the monitoring.
• Stop.
Display of alarm "302 Monitoring core puller programs" and stop of both movements.
• Stop/Quit.
The automatic cycle is immediately stopped. After having pressed Cycle start (closing
key), the cycle is continued. Furthermore, this monitoring is used to start the core puller
again when pressing cycle start (closing key) so that the process in the automatic mode
can be continued. Alarm "705 Core puller movement can be acknowledged at once" will
be displayed.
Ex.: "At Open 1 core moved in Stop/Ackn." means: The alarm is activated if the core has
not been moved in when opening the clamping unit. After having pressed Cycle start
(closing key), the core is moved in the opening is continued.
• Quit/End.
The automatic cycle is stopped at cycle end. After having pressed Cycle start (closing
key), a new cycle is started. Alarm "704 Core puller movement at cycle end can be
acknowledged" will be displayed.
• Stop/End.
The automatic cylce is stopped at cycle end and all drives are switched off. Alarm "706
Core puller movement stop at cycle end" will be displayed.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 44 0114WT
Core puller
Monitoring at core puller movement
The function of "Monitoring at core puller movement" is similar to that of "Core puller inactive if".
If the condition is valid, however, alarm "302 Monitoring core puller programs" is activated and
both movements are stopped.
The condition is set using the two Pull Down menus. The left Pull Down menu is used to select
an axis (e.g. ejector). The number beside this Pull Down menu is used to dstinguish between
axes of the same type. ("1" Ejector 1). The right Pull Down menu can be used to request the
respective status of the axis. The monitoring can be switched off if "..." is selected in the left Pull
Down menu. With "Enl. setting" any internal version can be entered on page 2.
Ex.: "At core puller movement not ejector home position" means that the monitoring reacts if the
ejector is not back.
With this function selection, the core puller program and/or the modifications will become active
and be stored. If "Enlarged setting" is selected in one of the Pull Down menus, the core puller
program on page 2 must be accepted.
CAUTION
The modifications will be lost when leaving the core puller program pages without having
accepted them.
Core puller programs cannot be modified in the automatic mode.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 45
Core puller
F09-Kernzugprogramme-kopieren_01
This menu can be used to copy core puller programs and to delete the complete user area.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 46 0114WT
Core puller
Delete user area
The complete user area is deleted by actuating the function selection. Afterwards, no core puller
program of the user area is available.
CAUTION
If you want to delete a single core puller program, all operating modes (automatic, manual,
setting) of the "Core puller program active in" entry of the respective core puller program must
be deactivated (see Core puller programs page 1).
CAUTION
When saving core puller programs, the complete user area available on the machine is stored
as data record for core puller programs.
When loading core puller programs, the existing core puller programs are overwrittne, the
remaining programs will, however, not be deleted. It is thus possible to load different programs
from several data records to the control.
If you want to make available on the machine only the core puller programs of a certain data
record for core puller programs, the user area must first be deleted and then the wished data
record for core puller programs be loaded.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 47
Core puller
Additional information is displayed in the "Diagnosis" menu if the following alarms appear:
301 Overflow Core puller programs
302 Monitoring Core puller program
704 Core puller monitoring at cycle end can be acknowledged
705 Core puller monitoring can be acknowledged at once
706 Core puller monitoring stop at cycle end
Additionally, information during the interruption of axis movements is displayed.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 48 0114WT
Core puller
9.4 Info
9.4.1 Information / Standard area
F09-Info-Standardbereich_01
The available core puller programs of the standard area displayed in this menu. This are those
core puller programs made available by Battenfeld. These programs cannot be modified.
CAUTION
If there are more than 27 core puller programs of the standard area, the two arrow keys at the
right top can be used to change to another page.
HB6GB09G
0114WT
Chapter 9 - 49
Core puller
F09-Info-Anwenderbereich_01
The available core puller programs of the user area (program number area of the freely
programmable core puller programs) are displayed in this menu. This are those core puller
programs which were programmed online or loaded as data record for core puller programs.
These programs can be modified.
CAUTION
If there are more than 27 core puller programs of the standard area, the two arrow keys at the
right top can be used to change to another page.
HB6GB09G
Chapter 9 - 50 0114WT
Robot
F10-HandlingSchnittstelle1-Einstellungen_02
CAUTION
In horizontal machines only, this function will be designed as part of a special type of machine.
Robot Interface
If you highlight and select this field all signals of the robot interface will be activated. If not all
signals are required for a single robot, the missing release signals will have to be bridged. This
field is shielded in the automatic mode.
In case this field has not been selected no interface signals will be expected by the robot,
except for the release signal for Mould area free. This means that pins 18-26 (according to
EUROMAP 12) of the robot interface have to be bridged.
CAUTION
For further information please refer to the wiring diagram of the machine.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 1
Robot
Start for Mould opened
If you have started this program, the robot will move in for "Mould opened". The cycle will be
continued after the robot has finished.
CAUTION
If the present set value has been set to small there is a risk of the robot bumping into the mould
or the clamping platen!
If you start this program the robot will move in at the set stroke position and the opening
procedure will be continued.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 2 0514MC
Robot
Version 2:
Start at Open stroke (Mould Robot Interpolation)
Version 2 is used for UNIROB S. With the MRI program being activated, the program switch
(above the MRI program) is automatically set to "Start at Open stroke". Enter the stroke marker
in [mm] / [inch] for which the forward movement of the robot is to be activated.
CAUTION
The MRI program at the UNIROB S must be activated. For further information please refer tot
he UNIROB S manual.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 3
Robot
F10-HandlingSchnittstelle1-Diagnose_03
Machine signals
"Mould is opened" signal
(Pin ZA7 of the Euromap 67 interface)
The "Mould is open" signal will be set if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• Mould is opened.
• Mould area 1 opened - at the clamping unit (for Tandem Mould).
The "Mould is open" signal will be deactivated using the positive edge of "Release Close", i.e.
the robot has finished the parts removal procedure.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 4 0514MC
Robot
"Mould is closed" signal
(Pin ZA6 of the Euromap 67 interface)
The signal will be set if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• Clamping force has been built up.
The signal will be deactivated after the clamping force has been reduced.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 5
Robot
"Cores 1 (2) are moved out" signal (pos. 2)
(Pins ZB5 and ZB7 of the Euromap 67 / 67.1 interface)
The signal will be set if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• The core puller (screw off) is in the „moved out (screwed off)“ home position
The signal will be deactivated when leaving the position.
CAUTION
The core puller signals refer to those core pullers which have activated the "Start core puller
via robot interface" program (setting on Core puller / Core puller settings / Enl. setting 1, see
chapter 9). The "Core pullers 2 are moved in / out (pos. 2 / pos. 1)" signals are available only for
the EUROMAP 67 interface.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 6 0514MC
Robot
Signal "Mould 2 is open" (with option "Tandem Mould")
(Special Battenfeld signal)
The "Mould 2 is open" signal will be set if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• Mould area 2 opened - at the nozzle side (for Tandem Mould).
When starting the clamping process, the signal "Mould 2 is open" is deactivated.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 7
Robot
Robot signals
"Mould area free" signal
(Pin B2 of the Euromap 67 / 67.1 interface)
The signal will trigger the following actions:
• Closing movement is enabled.
("Release Close" signal will additionally be required)
• Opening movement enabled.
(For Start via intermediate stop or start stroke, the opening can also be performed when
the signal is deactivated (starting from "Start stroke")
• Ejector enabled in the manual mode.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 8 0514MC
Robot
"Release Open mould completely" signal
(Pin A7 of the Euromap 67 interface)
The signal will trigger the following actions:
• The opening movement will be enabled starting from the intermediate stop position (see
"Mould area free" signal).
The signal has to be activated up to the "Start Robot" output signal.
CAUTION
The "Release Mouve in/out core pullers 2 (pos. 2 / pos. 1)" signals are available only for the
EUROMAP 67 interface.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 9
Robot
"Stop machine cycle" signal
(Special Battenfeld signal)
Signal from the robot to stop the machine cycle in the automatic mode without interrupting the
automatic cycle.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 10 0514MC
Robot
F10-HandlingSchnittstelle1-QSAuswertung_GB02
IP address
Entry of the IP address of the Wittmann robot (works only with correct CAN connection). If the
IP address was changed, the confirmation window "Turn out / in robot after having changed the
IP address!" is displayed. When confirming the query with OK (green tick), the Wittmann robot
will be rebooted automatically. When confirming the query with "Cancel" (red x), the Wittmann
robot must be switched OFF/ON manually. Thus, the new IP address of the Wittmann robot is
accepted.
CAUTION
If a proxy server was set on the network setting of the machine, the IP address of the Wittmann
robot mus be defined as exception, otherwise it is not possible to establish an "Ethernet
connection". For this setting refer to Control Panel -> Internet Options -> Connections -> LAN
settings -> Proxy server "Advanced .." -> the IP address of the Wittmann robot must be entered
as exception in the "Exceptions" field.
Reboot
Pressing the "Reboot" buttin will reboot the Wittmann robot (works only with correct Ethernet
connection).
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 11
Robot
SubNetMask
Net mask of the network.
Gateway
Gateway IP adress of the network.
Connection state
The version of the Wittmann robot is displayed in the first line. Starting with version 8.16.00 it
is possible to put the keys of the Robot Emergency-off block into the status bar of the machine
(see chapter 21.1.6).
Starting with line 2, the VNC status, the connection status of Ethernet and CAN will be
displayed. Additional information is displayed in the case of a connection problem.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 12 0514MC
Robot
F10-HandlingSchnittstelle1_V-BildverarbeitungKonfig_01
IP address
Enter the IP address of the image processing.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 13
Robot
F10-HandlingSchnittstelle1_V-QSAuswertung_01
Together with the external QS evaluation (QS = quality selection) signal from the robot
evaluating the injection moulding will be sent to the machine. The external QS selection is
started at the end of the start-up reject of the machine. This evaluation is carried out, e.g., by
means of a camera. The signals of the robot interface are displayed in the lower part of the
menu.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 14 0514MC
Robot
QS-evaluation - Start-up-, good- and reject parts (IMM)
The external evaluation of the robot is activated. The start-up, good and reject parts (thus all
parts) of the injection moulding machine are used for the external QS evaluation. The result is
sent to the injection moulding machine (IMM)
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 15
Robot
F10-HandlingSchnittstelle1-Konfiguration_01
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 16 0514MC
Robot
Compatibility mode for the release of the next machine cycle without checking "Release Close
mould" signal change
The following steps will be checked if this program is NOT activated:
If no mould change is carried out (typical: machines without mould table, rotary unit), a check
is carried out whether for the release signal a change from LOW to HIGH was made after an
injection cycle in the automatid mode (explanation: the robot carried out a cycle).Only then will
"Close mould" be released.
If this program is activated, these checks will not be carried out. Typical application: For
example: Euromap triggering for mill.
Compatibility mode for the release of the next machine cycle without checking "Release Close
mould" signal level on HIGH, ("Mould area free" signal level on HIGH, "Release of mould tyble
movement" signal level on HIGH)
The following steps will be checked if this program is NOT activated:
If no mould change is carried out (typical, machines without mould table, rotary unit), a check is
carried out whether the respective release signal is on signal level HIGH.Only then will "Close
mould" be released.
If this program is activated, these checks will not be carried out. Typical application: For
example: Operation with core puller program 1 or 11.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 17
Robot
F10-HandlingSchnittstelle1_V-Einstellungen_02
CAUTION
This function is included in vertical V machines without mould table as an optional function. It
provides the option of a 2nd handling interface.
Vertical V machines with mould table (rotary table, sliding table) are equipped with a handling
interface according to EUROMAP 67.1 (see chapter 10.7).
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 18 0514MC
Robot
CAUTION
For further information please refer to the wiring diagram of the machine.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 19
Robot
Pre-start 1 for operator station 1
The pre-start robot is defined with reaching the position tolerance of the mould table (the mould
table axis is still moving) and can be used for initiating a premature starting movement of the
robot systems without hindering the mould table axis and vice versa!
CAUTION
The "Release mould table movement" must by all means be maintained until the signal "Start 1
robot" is given, otherwise the mould table cannot be positioned if there is no release!
Start with mould open (possible only for "Robot on clamping unit" - operator station 1)
If you have started this program, the robot will move in for "Mould opened". The cycle will be
continued after the robot has finished.
Start with open stroke (possible only for "Robot on clamping unit" - operator station 1)
This program is required to gain some cycle time. If you start this program the robot will move
in at the set stroke position and the opening procedure will be continued. (From this stroke
marker the opening can also carried out if the "Mould area free" signal is deactivated - the signal
"Release Open Intermediate stop" is not required)
CAUTION
If the present set value has been set to small there is a risk of the robot bumping into the mould
or the clamping platen!
Start with intermediate stop (possible only for "Robot on clamping unit" - operator station 1)
If you have activated this program, the opening procedure will be interrupted at the entered
stroke marker and the robot will move in. The opening procedure will be continued after the
robot has finished. (For Start via intermediate stop, the opening can also be performed from this
stroke marker if the "Mould area free" signal is deactivated (starting from "Start stroke") - the
"Release Opening Intermediate stop" signal will however be required)
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 20 0514MC
Robot
Ejector without intermediate stop
The ejector is operated without an intermediate stop position.
Ejector forward with intermediate stop (only available with “handling at stations A-E”)
Activating an intermediate stop position when moving the ejector forward. The intermediate
stop is carried out only if an injection moulding is available in this station. The "Release
Ejector forward" signal must be reset and set again in order to move on the ejector after the
intermediate stop.
Ejector back with intermediate stop (possible only for "Robot on station A - E")
Activating an intermediate stop position when moving the ejector back. The "Release Ejector
backward" signal must be reset and set again in order to move on the ejector after the
intermediate stop. If an intermediate stop program is activated for the ejector, the adjacent
stroke point for the ejector will mean move forward or move back depending on the program
selected.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 21
Robot
F10-HandlingSchnittstelle1_V-Diagnose_02
The current status of the Robot Interface will be displayed in this field. According to the optional
scope of the machine, the diagnosis signals may differ from the picture shown here.
Robot signals
"Robot off" signal
(Pin B2 of the Euromap 67 / 67.1 interface)
The signal will trigger the following actions:
• The robot interface will be deactivated, the "Mould area free" signal, however, still has to
be evaluated.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 22 0514MC
Robot
"Release of mould table movement" signal
(Pin A6 of the Euromap 67.1 interface)
The signal will trigger the following actions:
• The rotary table and/or sliding table movement will be enabled ("Mould area free" signal
will additionally required)
In the "Automatic" mode, the signal has to be deactived for a short time before a new table
movement (cannot be bridged).
The signal has to be activated up to the "Start 1 for operator station 1/2" output signal.
CAUTION
The station ejector movements will only be started, if the "Release Mould table movement or
Mould area free" signal is not active.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 23
Robot
"Release Move out core pullers 1 (2) (pos. 1)" signal
(Pins B5 and B7 of the Euromap 67 / 67.1 interface)
The signal will trigger the following actions:
• The core puller movement „Move out (screw out)“ will be released for core pullers
assigned to this signal.
The signal has to be activated up to the "Core puller is moved out" output signal. The
assignment of the core pullers to signal 1 or signal 2 is carried out at the core puller.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 24 0514MC
Robot
"Injection mouldings removed" signal
(Pin C7 of the Euromap 67.1 interface)
After having removed the injection mouldings, the removal of the injection mouldings will be
displayed by the positive edge of this signal. This signal must be send before Release Mould
table and before inserting the next parts.
The signal will trigger the following actions:
• The "Injection moulding" and "Insert part" statuses (see rotary table, sliding table, page 1)
will be reset and the "Injection mouldings available" and "Insert parts available" statuses
of the EUROMAP interface will be reset at the same time.
CAUTION
The signal will be evaluated only if the signals for "Release Mould table" are not available.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 25
Robot
Machine signals
"Start 1 for operator station 1" signal
"Start 1 for operator station 2" signal
(Pin ZA7 of the Euromap 67.1 interface)
When selecting " Robot on station up to E", the signal "Start Robot" will be set if the following
requirements are met:
• Activated mould in the robot station.
• Rotary table is "in position".
• For the preselection „Robot on operator station A“ the mould has to be opened.
When selecting " Robot to clamping unit", the signal "Start 1 for operator station 1" will be set if
the start condition is met:
If the "Injection mouldings available" signal is active during "Start 1 for operator station 1/2",
the robot must remove injection mouldings if a "Removal" was defined in the robot station (see
menu "Mould table, / Status", chapter 11).
If the "Insert parts available" signal is active during "Start 1 for operator station 1/2", the robot
must insert insert parts if an "Insertion" was defined in the robot station (see menu "Mould table
/ Status"; chapter 11).
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 26 0514MC
Robot
"Mould is closed" signal
(Pin ZA6 of the Euromap 67 interface)
The signal will be set if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• Clamping force has been built up.
The signal will be deactivated after the clamping force has been reduced.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 27
Robot
CAUTION
The core puller signals refer to those core pullers which have activated the "Start core puller via
robot interface" program (setting on Core puller Page "Enlarged settings", see chapter 9).
For lower mould dependent core pullers (Setting in menu "Mould table / Configuration, chapter
11), the core puller signals refer to those core pullers which are in the robot station.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 28 0514MC
Robot
"Machine cycle stopped" signal
(Special Battenfeld signal)
The signal will be set if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• The "Machine cycle stopped" signal from the robot is available in the automatic mode,
and the machine has finished the cycle and the mould is open.
• "Stop machine cycle" signal from the robot is not available in the automatic mode, and the
machine stops the machine cycle (Error classes 2 or 3).
• The signal is always set in the manual mode.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 29
Robot
F10-HandlingSchnittstelle1_V-Diagnose2_02
The current status of the Robot Interface will be displayed in this field. According to the optional
scope of the machine, the diagnosis signals may differ from the picture shown here.
Robot signals
„System stopped“ signal
Description see „1.6.3 Safety / Danger zone boundary“ (explanation of the interface signals: pin
C8 - system stopped).
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 30 0514MC
Robot
Machine signals
„Stop/continue system“ signal
Description see „1.6.3 Safety / Danger zone boundary“ (explanation of the interface signals: pin
ZC8 - stop/continue system).
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 31
Robot
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 32 0514MC
Robot
F10-Entnahmehandling_01
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 33
Robot
Parts removal stroke before moving in
If this program has been started, the parts removal stroke will be carried out before moving in.
For a deactivated program, the parts removal stroke will be carried out after moving in.
Manual mode
All movements of the parts removal robot will be carried out according to the program setting by
means of keys (right switch position). The left switch position moves the parts removal robot to
the home position again.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 34 0514MC
Robot
Parts monitoring
For the "Closed tong" position it will be monitored in the automatic mode whether the part has
been properly removed. In case of an error the cycle will be interrupted and may be continued in
the manual mode. There will be no parts monitoring in the manual mode. If the parts monitoring
is not required or if there is no limit switch installed the input has to be bridged.
Program setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Program setting 1:
• Move in.
• Ejector forward.
• Close tongs.
• Move out.
Program setting 2:
• Move in.
• Close tongs.
• Move out.
Program setting 3:
• Move in.
• Ejector forward.
• Close tongs.
• Parts removal stroke forward.
• Move out.
• Parts removal stroke backward.
Program setting 4:
• Move in.
• Parts removal stroke forward.
• Close tongs.
• Move out.
• Parts removal stroke backward.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 35
Robot
Program setting 5:
• Move in.
• Ejector forward.
• Close tongs.
• Parts removal stroke forward.
• Parts removal stroke backward.
• Move out.
Program setting 6:
• Move in.
• Parts removal stroke forward.
• Close tongs.
• Parts removal stroke backward.
• Move out.
Program setting 7:
• Parts removal stroke forward.
• Move in.
• Parts removal stroke backward.
• Ejector forward.
• Close tongs.
• Parts removal stroke forward.
• Move out.
• Parts removal stroke backward.
Program setting 8:
• Parts removal stroke forward.
• Move in.
• Close tongs.
• Move out.
• Parts removal stroke backward.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 36 0514MC
Robot
Program setting 9:
• Parts removal stroke forward.
• Move in.
• Parts removal stroke backward.
• Ejector forward.
• Close tongs.
• Move out.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 37
Robot
F10-UNIPICK P5-Einstellungen_01
UNIPICK P5
In this text line, the function of the robot will be enabled. If this program is switched off, the
Y-axis has to be in the home position to enable the interface signal for the injection moulding
machine (Close mould, Ejector for- and backward).
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 38 0514MC
Robot
Y-Lowering Stacking
The selection of this program makes the Y-axis lower in the "Z -limit position" to stack the parts
in the "Y-limit position".
If this program is switched off, the parts in the "Z-limit position" and the "Y-home position" will be
loosened.
Tilt (C-axis)
The selection of this program makes the gripper tilt around the C-axis. For the preselected
program, the lowering of the Y-axis is only possible if the gripper is tilted.
Swing (B-axis)
The selection of this program makes the gripper swing around the B-axis. For the preselected
program, the lowering of the Y-axis is only possible if the gripper is swung.
Parts clamping
When using a gripper finger, this program has to be switched on. Then the parts monitoring will
also be effective. If parts monitoring is not desired, the inputs have to be bridged.
When using a vacuum gripper, this program has to be switched off. Then the vacuum monitoring
will also be effective. If no vacuum monitoring is desired, the adjusting screw SET at the venturi
nozzle has to be turned until the red LED is lit up.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 39
Robot
Parts removal stroke after ejector
• Lower Y-axis.
• Ejector forward.
• X-axis forward.
• Parts transfer.
Manual mode
All movements of the LC robot will be carried out according to the program setting by means of
keys (right switch position). Use the left switch position to move back individual movements of
the LC handling.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 40 0514MC
Robot
F10-UNIPICK P5-Diagnose_01
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 41
Robot
F10-UNIPICK P5-Einrichten_01
Time Stacking
The Time "Stacking" will be started as soon as the "Z-axis" and the "Y-axis" of the robot are in
the "limit position". At the end of the time, the part will be loosened. This ensures that the gripper
is steadied in the stacking position.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 42 0514MC
Robot
Time Parts loosening
The Time "Parts loosening" starts when the part is loosened. At the end of the time the " Y-axis"
moves back to the " home position". This ensures a secure stacking of the part.
If the "Y-Lowering Stacking" program is switched off, the Time "Parts loosening" in the "Y-home
position" will be started when reaching the "Z-limit position" to loosen the part at the end of this
time.
UNIPICK P5 - Setting
UNIPICK P5 - setting can be selected in the setting mode only. After having selected the
function, an axis can be selected which can then be moved via the "+" and "-" keys. This
function will automatically be deactivated when changing the operating mode or leaving this
image.
Procedure:
1. Reset all active moving commands.
2. ventilate brake
3. Initiate Remote mode.
4. Start Teaching between the limit positions via the "+" key. The SPC 11 automatically
learns the positions of the limit positions.
5. At the end of the teaching movement the SPC 11 device delivers a "1" to exit A1.
This information is used to recognise the end of teaching. The teaching function is
automatically reset.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 43
Robot
Teach Y axis (P03 + P04) - central position -
Teach Y axis Mid positions can be selected in the setting mode only. Automatic teaching of the
limit positions must have be carried out before. This function will automatically be deactivated
when changing the operating mode or leaving this image.
Procedure:
1. Reset all active moving commands.
2. ventilate brake
3. Initiate Remote mode by means of the "+" or "-" keys.
4. The Teach mode is initiated. The possible "Teaching position", eg. P03 is flashing in the
display of the SPC 11.
5. Press the "Cancel" key to teach the next position (P04).
6. Use the "+" or "-" keys to move the drive into the wished position.
7. To save the position at the end of the teaching movement, the operator has to
acknowledge it by selecting the "O.K." button.
8. The output A3 or A4 is set.
9. The operator has to end the teaching function (switch off the function selection).
Acceptance
Acceptance of the "teached" position.
Cancel
Change over to the next position.
For the implementation of the described functions it is necessary to connect the following inputs
and outputs of the SPC 11 with the control (Beckhoff I/O module).
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 44 0514MC
Robot
F10-Peripherie-Schnittstelle_01
Info text
Enter an info text to show the periphery concerned. This entry is used to obtain a better
overview.
Operator station
Selection of the operator station to which the periphery interface refers.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 45
Robot
Diagnostic
The current status of the periphery interface will be displayed in this field.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 46 0514MC
Robot
F10-Wittmann Roboter1_01
When changing into this menu, a connection to the Wittmann robot is automatically established.
From then, the robot can be operated via this menu only.
You can store the teach program of the Wittmann robot in the machine (see chapter 25.1 and
25.2)
The alarms of the Wittmann robot are displayed in a separate error class on the machine and
entered into the log (see chapter 28).
The robot interface 1 (2) must be activated in order to be able to operate the Wittmann robot 1
(2) (see chapter 10.1.1).
The configuration for the Wittmann robot 1 (2) is in the menu "Robot interface 1 (2) / Wittmann
config" (see chapter 10.1.3)
For more information refer to the Wittmann robot manual.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 47
Robot
CAUTION
When a connection is established to the Wittmann robot, the Wittmann profile is set depending
on the user leves activated on the machine.
User level 90 —> Wittmann profile 7
User level 30 —> Wittmann profile 2
User level 20 —> Wittmann profile 1
CAUTION
Every 60 seconds, the time of the Wittmann robot will be synchronised with the machine time.
I.e. any time changes will not influence the Wittmann robot as long as the Wittmann robot is
connected with the machine.
CAUTION
If access to the machine is made via a remote connection (remote maintenance), the operation
of the robot on the remote PC is blocked. The menu „Wittmann Robot“ is displayed on the
remote PC only if it is not selected on the machine (only a VNC connection can be established).
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 48 0514MC
Robot
F10-HandlingSchnittstelle1_V67_1-Einstellungen_01
CAUTION
This function is included in vertical V machines with mould table (rotary table, sliding table) as
an optional function. It provides the option of a 2nd handling interface.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 49
Robot
CAUTION
For details, refer to the circuit diagram of the machine.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 50 0514MC
Robot
Insertion (start 2/3 for operator station)
Activation of an alternative handling station for this handling interface In this station, only parts
with a lower mould can be inserted. If this program is activated, the insertion statuses refer to
the set insertion station and the injection mouldings refer to the set removal station. In this case,
the other stations of the handling interface must be removal stations.
Pre-start 1 (2) for operator station (start 2/3 for operator station)
The handling pre-start is defined when the position tolerance of the mould table is reached
(while mould table axis is still in motion) and can be used to initiate a preliminary start
movement of the handling systems without interfering with the mould table axes!
CAUTION
„Release mould table movement“ must remain activated until signal „Start handling“ is issued,
as the mould table can otherwise not be positioned, due to missing release signal!
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 51
Robot
Number of insertion cycles (optional)
Enter here the desired number of insertion cycles.
Note
Each insertion cycle must be confirmed with the „Injection mouldings inserted“ signal.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 52 0514MC
Robot
F10-HandlingSchnittstelle1_V67_1-Einstellungen2_01
Start with mould open (possible only for "Robot on clamping unit" - operator station 1)
If you have started this program, the robot will move in for "Mould opened". The cycle will be
continued after the robot has finished.
Start with open stroke (possible only for "Robot on clamping unit" - operator station 1)
This program is required to gain some cycle time. If you start this program the robot will move
in at the set stroke position and the opening procedure will be continued. (From this stroke
marker the opening can also carried out if the "Mould area free" signal is deactivated - the signal
"Release Open Intermediate stop" is not required)
CAUTION
If the present set value has been set to small there is a risk of the robot bumping into the mould
or the clamping platen!
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 53
Robot
Start with intermediate stop (possible only for "Robot on clamping unit" - operator station 1)
If you have activated this program, the opening procedure will be interrupted at the entered
stroke marker and the robot will move in. The opening procedure will be continued after the
robot has finished. (For Start via intermediate stop, the opening can also be performed from this
stroke marker if the "Mould area free" signal is deactivated (starting from "Start stroke") - the
"Release Opening Intermediate stop" signal will however be required)
Ejector forward with intermediate stop (only available with “handling at stations A-E”)
Activating an intermediate stop position when moving the ejector forward. The intermediate
stop is carried out only if an injection moulding is available in this station. The "Release
Ejector forward" signal must be reset and set again in order to move on the ejector after the
intermediate stop.
Ejector back with intermediate stop (possible only for "Robot on station A - E")
Activating an intermediate stop position when moving the ejector back. The "Release Ejector
backward" signal must be reset and set again in order to move on the ejector after the
intermediate stop. If an intermediate stop program is activated for the ejector, the adjacent
stroke point for the ejector will mean move forward or move back depending on the program
selected.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 54 0514MC
Robot
F10-HandlingSchnittstelle1_V67_1-Signalgruppe1_01
The current status of the Robot Interface will be displayed in this field. According to the optional
scope of the machine, the diagnosis signals may differ from the picture shown here.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 55
Robot
When selecting "Robot on station A" ...
• The closing movement is enabled ("Release Close" signal will additionally be required).
• Opening movement enabled.
When selecting "Robot on clamping unit" ...
• The closing movement is enabled ("Release Close" signal will additionally be required).
• Opening movement enabled (For Start via intermediate stop or start stroke, the opening
can also be performed from the "Start stroke" when the signal is deactivated (starting
from "Start stroke") - The "Release Opening Intermediate stop" signal will however be
required).
• a possibly available upper parts ejector is enabled in the manual mode.
CAUTION
The station ejector movements will only be started, if the "Release Mould table movement or
Mould area free" signal is not active.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 56 0514MC
Robot
"Release Move in core pullers 1" signal
"Release Move in core pullers 2" signal
The signal will trigger the following actions:
• The core puller movement „Move in (screw in)“ will be released for core pullers assigned
to this signal.
The signal has to be activated up to the "Core puller is moved in" output signal. The assignment
of the core pullers to signal 1 or signal 2 is carried out at the core puller.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 57
Robot
Signal „EMERGENCY STOP channel 1“
Signal „EMERGENCY STOP channel 2“
Display of the two EMERGENCY STOP channels of handling.
Signal „Start 1 / 2 / 3“
With preselection „Start for operator station - table in position“, signal „Start handling“ is set,
provided the following conditions are met:
• Activated mould is located in one of the handling stations for removal/insertion.
• Mould table is „in position“.
With preselection „Start for operator station - station A to E“, signal „Start handling“ is set,
provided the following conditions are met:
• Activated mould is in the respective handling station.
• Mould table is „in position“.
• With preselection „Handling at operator station A“, the mould must be open.
With preselection „Start for operator station - clamping unit“, the „Start“ signal is set, if the start
condition is met.
NOTE
If signal „Injection mouldings available“ is active upon „Start for operator station“, the handling
system must remove the injection mouldings, provided that „removal“ is configured in the
handling station (see „Mould table / status“ menu, chapter 11).
If signal „Insert parts available“ is active upon „Start for operator station“, the handling system
must insert insert parts, provided that an „insertion unit“ is configured in the handling station
(see „Mould table / status“ menu, chapter 11).
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 58 0514MC
Robot
"Ejector is in the front position" signal
The signal will be set if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• After the last stroke the ejector is in the foremost position (front position).
The signal will be deactivated when leaving the position.
CAUTION
The core puller signals refer to those core pullers which have activated the "Start core puller via
robot interface" program (setting on Core puller Page "Enlarged settings", see chapter 9).
For lower mould dependent core pullers (Setting in menu "Mould table / Configuration, chapter
11), the core puller signals refer to those core pullers which are in the robot station.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 59
Robot
"Injection mouldings available" signal
The signal will be set if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• Parts which can be removed are in the lower part of the robot station.
The signal will be deactivated again with the "Parts removed" signal.
End of production
The signal will be set if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• The "Machine cycle stopped" signal from the robot is available in the automatic mode,
and the machine has finished the cycle and the mould is open.
• "Stop machine cycle" signal from the robot is not available in the automatic mode, and the
machine stops the machine cycle (Error classes 2 or 3).
• The signal is always set in the manual mode.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 60 0514MC
Robot
F10-Bildverarbeitung1_01
When changing into this menu, a connection to the image processing system is automatically
established. From then, the image processing system can be operated via this menu only.
The configuration for the image processing system (setting of the IP address) is in the menu
„Robot interface 1 (2) / Image processing config“ (see chapter 10.1.4).
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 61
Robot
10.8.2 Description
10.8.2.1 Introduction to Image Processing
10.8.2.2 Principles
Medical seeing:
… takes place mostly in the 3D-area and is accompanied by many additional pieces of
information (sensory organs,…) "that one just knows".
Image processing:
… the camera receives the light reflected differently from the part as only information. As a
result, image processing technology can analyse only this type of information, which exists as
black/white transitions and/or gray values.
CAUTION
A high-quality image is a prerequisite for a suitable result!
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 62 0514MC
Robot
The size of the object to be measured or the desired object field is decisive for lens selection.
Compact dimensions
Inexpensive
Conical projection
Example:
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 63
Robot
Telecentric measurement lenses
Example:
Close the aperture as far as possible in order to achieve greater depth of field.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 64 0514MC
Robot
10.8.2.4 Illumination
Possible influences:
• Inconsistent ambient light (standard room illumination, sun reflections, etc.)
• Light source aging (=> changing grey values)
• Frequency-dependent flickering of the light source (especially with incandescent lamps)
• Heat transfer from the light source to the measurement object and the measuring range
The measuring lenses are usually very different in practice (colour/material, size, shape, …).
Therefore, the illumination for the object to be measured must be selected to achieve best
results.
Type of illumination:
Illumination itself is divided into the categories of incident light and transmitted light:
Incident light
• The most common and simplest means of illumination
• Higher influence of ambience lighting
• Simple gripper construction
• Shadows and reflections visible (also for recognition of surface defects)
• Flexible use
Beispiel
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 65
Robot
Transmitted light
• High contrast (rule of thumb: three times higher edge quality than with incident light)
• Lower influence of ambient light
• Gripper must be transparent,
• Light must be guided on gripper.
• Surfaces and unevenness invisible (for contours)
Beispiel
Designs:
LED lighting
• Longevity
• Different sizes, colours, shapes
• Practical
• Cost-efficient
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 66 0514MC
Robot
Cold light
• Homogenous light
These cameras record the image over a sensor field that consists of many small CCD sensors,
also known as pixels. When these sensors are struck by light, they release electrical charges.
These charges are recorded by means of vertical and horizontal shift registers. The source job
delivers the trigger signal.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 67
Robot
Camera system
"In-Sight Micro 1403-10" camera
It is an "intelligent camera" which contains the corresponding assessment program, i.e. the
job, carries out the assessment accordingly and sends the result to the robot via an interface.
It is a monochrome 2 megapixel camera with a resolution of 1200x1600 pixels. The special
computational algorithm PatMax makes complex measuring functions possible. The lens thread
is a "C mount".
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 68 0514MC
Robot
Spacer ring set
The set consists of rings with C-mount-thread and different lengths. These rings enable changes
to the camera's field of vision. For a small section / part to be displayed on the camera recording
(visual field) as large as possible, one or several spacer rings are screwed between the lens
and camera. This changes not only the field of vision but also the working distance between the
camera and object.
Lens
The lens has a focal length of 25 mm, a manually adjustable focus ring and a ring for the
aperture.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 69
Robot
Lighting "LED ring lamp"
Lighting is performed by a red LED ring lamp triggered by the camera.
Diffuser
Located on the lighting, serves to distribute light to prevent reflections.
Ethernet interface
The interface enables direct access to the camera. For example, connection of an external
customer-side computer and use of the programme Vision View PC (demo version on USB
drive) or the programme In-Sight Explorer (on included CD) can be used here to set the WiBa
standard job for the product and generate an individual job. The interface is accessible by
opening the left door on the operator's side.
In-Sight Explorer on CD
The programme enables changes to the included file WiBa*.job or generation of a separate job.
USB stick
contains important data such as the Wiba*.job file.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 70 0514MC
Robot
Camera system with integrate visualisation
In addition to the camera system scope, this development level has a control integrated in
the B6 via the "Vision View VGA" converter. The interfaces are accessible by opening the left
operating-side door.
Interfaces
VGA interface: To set up image processing at product changes, it is possible to connect an
external screen via the VGA connection.
USB interface: A USB mouse can be connected here for setting up image processing. This
USB interface also enables exporting images or a sensor backup on a USB storage medium.
Depending on settings, e.g. all reject part images can be stored at intervals.
The interfaces for this are on the machine operator side and accessible by opening the hinged
door in the left lower area.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 71
Robot
10.8.3.2 IP addresses
The individual components (camera, CIO-Micro, Vision View VGA, robot, machine)
communicate via an Ethernet connection. Thus, each component has a fixed IP address.
IP addresses preset
Camera:
172.16.19.144
255.255.0.0
CIO-MICRO - Board:
172.16.19.145
255.255.0.0
Laptop:
172.16.19.222
255.255.0.0
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 72 0514MC
Robot
Setting of IP addresses
All / some IP addresses must be set in the following situations:
• Commissioning of the machine
• Replacement of components (camera, CIO-MICRO, Vision View VGA)
• Connection to a company network (e.g. for Web service)
The setting of the IP addresses on the individual components is described in the following.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 73
Robot
2.) Changing the IP address of camera and CIO-MICRO
Scan for new devices ....
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 74 0514MC
Robot
Changing the IP address of the camera (In-Sight-Micro 1403):
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 75
Robot
3.) VisionViewVGA settting (option)
Connect a VGA monitor and a USB mouse to the appropriate interface below the camera slight.
Set the language...
Display setting...
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 76 0514MC
Robot
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 77
Robot
Picture setting
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 78 0514MC
Robot
Network setting
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 79
Robot
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 80 0514MC
Robot
Select camera ...
Note: Operation via BS touch screen is only possible if you are logged in on the BS machine
control.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 81
Robot
This chapter describes the setting of the image processing for a product, i.e. injection moulding.
The following guidelines include the setting of the hardware components (lens, light, working
distance, image position / detail) and/or the delivered file Wiba*.job (measuring instruments,
tolerances) for the respective product.
The display on the B6 machine control is mainly used for visualising the camera image. If any
change to the tolerances or measuring windows is required, this is possible by logging into the
B6-control as of level 20. However, it is recommended to connect an external screen to the
intended VGA connection or a USB mouse or external computer to the Ethernet interface.
1. According to the application, one picture per shot / production cycle may be taken.
Activation of "Whole Shot: One Robot-Stop/One Evaluation/One Result"
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 82 0514MC
Robot
Deactivation of "Whole Shot: One Robot-Stop/One Evaluation/One Result"
Consequence(s):
• Robot stops once per shot depending on the number of camera positions set.
• Camera outputs a separate result for "Part Detection" and "Part Inspection" to robot for
each recording / camera position.
Advantage:
• For very small cavities / decision criteria, a maximum resolution of the area can be
achieved, leading to maximum measuring accuracy.
Disadvantage:
• Due to the separate assessment for each cavity + new placement of the gripper, this is
included in the cycle time.
The basic settings activation / deactivation of mode "Whole Shot: One Robot-Stop/One
Evaluation/One Result" is described in the following items. The change cannot be made during
automatic operation because a change into offline operation leads to machine stop.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 83
Robot
1.1. Change to offline mode
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 84 0514MC
Robot
1.3. Activation / Deactivation of "Whole Shot:
ONE Stop/Evaluation/Result". When this function is activated, the number of cavities /
monitoring areas to be monitored per shot during this one recording must be pre-selected by
checkmark. Four cavities were selected in this example. Subsequent acknowledgement with OK
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 85
Robot
2. Good part placement via camera.
This can be done by injecting parts and stopping the gripper via the camera or by suction /
clamping of parts with the gripper, followed by placement above the camera.
3. Set image
3.1. Vision View: Offline mode
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 86 0514MC
Robot
3.3. Focus
3.4. Placement of the good part above the camera (see robot documentation)
3.4.1. Positioning the robot gripper in the X axis
3.4.2. Setting the camera slight in the Z axis
CAUTION:
Checking the lens for cleanliness before any other settings are made saves time!
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 87
Robot
3.6. Contrast / brightness
Clear light-dark transfers with minimum grey area at the edge are usually the objective.
Factors of influence …
3.6.1. Aperture
Choose aperture (on lens) as small as possible (=> minimise ambience influences)
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 88 0514MC
Robot
4. Align measuring window for base A / B for image.
The file WiBa*.job is set up so that the measuring fields and tolerances for each cavity can be
determined separately.
Function:
This measuring tool can be activated as additional form safety. When activating the robot's
teach box, the machine waits before closing the mould until image processing recognises that
all parts have been removed. => influence on cycle time
The measuring tool is placed at the part gate area. The average grey value of all pixels is
determined within the measuring instrument. If this value is within the upper / lower thresholds,
the corresponding cavity in the gripper is considered present, i.e. removed from the mould.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 89
Robot
Define "Detection Area"
Position and size can be adjusted by the button.
Position:
The measuring instrument is placed above the area filled first. This should mainly ensure that
presence is recognised even in case of parts not fully filled.
Size:
The measuring field size should not be larger than necessary to avoid unnecessary influence on
the cycle time.
Position and size can be adjusted with the button "Search Area: ADJUST“.
In the delivery condition, all upper limit values are set to 255 and the lower limit values to 0,
opening the measuring range as far as possible, so that assessment is always in the tolerance
range, i.e. present!
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 90 0514MC
Robot
4.2. Part Inspection
Function:
This measuring tool is used to differentiate between good and reject parts. Depending on this,
the parts are placed in the respective deposit position by the robot.
The measuring tool lends a reference contour (measuring window 1) and finds it in a definable
area (measuring window 2). Placement is in the area where over-/underpacking is most likely.
CAUTION:
This measuring instrument looks for an edge; if no edge is present in the measuring window,
the program searches until the fixed timeout time has elapsed. This influences the cycle time
afterwards! In particular in case of several cavities for which no contour can be found, this
becomes obvious by long waiting times of the gripper above the camera.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 91
Robot
1. Determination of measuring window 1
"Reference Picture: DIMENSION+POSITION: ADJUST": Determine position / size of the
measuring window.
• If possible, a camera image area should be selected that is present in this manner
only once to avoid wrong measurements. The selected area must be a contour. The
measuring window should not be too large, because it may influence the cycle time.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 92 0514MC
Robot
4. Determination of minimum matches of measuring window 1 in measuring window 2 by
threshold value for:
Min. value for pattern match [%]
Once the match between reference pattern found "measured value for Pattern Match" and
reference pattern taught in undercuts the threshold value "min. value for Pattern Match", the
part is recognised as reject part. To receive sensible assessment, the threshold value of "min.
value for Pattern Match" should be as high as possible and no smaller than 70 %.
HB6GB10J
0514MC
Chapter 10 - 93
Robot
> Example "overpacked" => Assessment "NG"
In the delivery condition, the value for "Min. value for Pattern Match [%]" is set to 0 %. Once
an edge contour is taught in and recognised approximately in measuring window 2, the part is
assessed to be OK.
5. After all settings were performed, the job must be saved actively so that all changes /
adjustments are maintained after loss of the supply voltage. This should be done using
a new name so that the standard application "WiBa*.job" can also be used as a basis for
other products. It is also recommended to store the reference images for OK parts and
NOK parts for each cavity or to back up the camera sensor. This can be done via the
USB interface. For precise procedure, see the instructions for Vision View.
HB6GB10J
Chapter 10 - 94 0514MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Dreheinheitservoelektrisch-Allgemein_04
Use the Servo-electric rotary unit menu (option for machines with horizontal clamping unit and
ACOPOS rotary unit) to set the rotary unit and the parameters required.
If a tandem mould is operated with the servoelectric rotary unit, the menu text is changed
from "Rotary unit servoelectric" to "Tandem Mould locking". Additionally, the "Information:
servoelectric rotary unit for tandem mould locking" is displayed below the "Rotary unit" program
preselection.
Rotary unit servoelectric
Use this program preselection to activate the servo-electric rotary unit. If the rotary unit is
switched off, the limit switches will not be checked and other movements will not be locked.
CAUTION
With the rotary unit being activated, an "Ejector safety stroke" is requested which disables
the rotary unit, the closing unit, and the cycle start if the safety stroke is exceeded. The safety
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 1
Rotary unit / Mould table
stroke can be entered in the ejector menu (see also chapter 8).
Please also observe the safety settings in the menu „Safety / General“ (see chapter 1.6.1).
Oscillation preselection
Oscillation off
Oscillation mode is activated with program preselection „Mould table enabled for continuous
rotary movement“ in the „Machine general / safety“ menu, see chapter 1. In addition „Oscillation
range 1“ or „Oscillation range 2“ must be activated. If program preselection „Mould table
enabled for continuous rotary movement“ and the oscillation preselection do not correspond,
error message „Incorrect oscillation configuration“ is displayed.
After this program is activated, the system checks the activated lower moulds. The lower moulds
that can be used are determined by „Oscillation range 1“ and „Oscillation range 2“. In the „Mould
table / status“ menu, only the lower moulds defined for the oscillation range are shown.
Oscillation range 1
Oscillation range 2 (3, 4 option)
Here you can choose between the available oscillation ranges: The oscillation ranges have
been preset at the factory. The valid oscillation range is shown in the „Mould table / status“
menu. Only the lower moulds that can reach „Station A (closing station“ with the set oscillation
range.
This means that oscillation is only possible between the lower moulds shown here.
CAUTION
There are not additional oscillation range end switches, i.e. the oscillation ranges are defined by
the program preselection only.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 2 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
v (speed)
Enter here the required speed in [degrees/s] for turning the rotary unit cw and ccw.
Position
Here, a correction value [degrees] for correcting the limit positions of the rotary unit can be
specified. Only trained specialists may change these positions. Changing these entries is only
possible in user level 20.
Current position
The current position of the rotary unit is indicated in [degrees].
Motion time
Display of the current motion time for turning the rotary unit cw or ccw in [s].
CAUTION
You may only activate the program numbers described below for the rotary unit. Changes of
the rotary unit programs in the automatic mode are not recommended since these changes will
not be accepted unless there is no active movement (e.g. during the change over or the cooling
time).
Program number 0
"Turn rotary unit ccw / cw" before closing (depending on the mould statuses). This program will
be carried out only in combination with the "Mould table" menu.
Program number 21
Turn rotary unit "cw / ccw" for Mould opened but, however, before the ejector movement is
started (or if the ejector is switched off).
Program number 22
Turn rotary unit "cw / ccw" for Mould opened and ejection finished.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 3
Rotary unit / Mould table
Program number 23
Turn circular disc "cw / ccw" for Position Intermediate stop Open. The intermediate stop for
Open will be entered in the "Start" column.
Program number 24
Turn rotary unit "cw" (ccw) for "Start stroke Open" parallel to the movement. The stroke marker
for "Start stroke" will be entered in the "Start" column.
If the rotary unit is in position when reaching the stop stroke, "Open" will be continued.
If the rotary unit has not yet reached its position when reaching the stop stroke, "Open" will be
interrupted. Only after the rotary unit has reached its position will "Open" be continued. The
stroke position for "Stop stroke" will be entered in the "Stop" column.
CAUTION
If the rotary unit is configured with the mould table menu (menu "Mould table" available), the
following reasonable combinations with the program number will be possible.
The removal and insertion station will be defined in the "Mould table" menu (see present chapter
11.4.10 "Configuration station").
First injection station is that station in which the first pre-moulded part is produced (assembly
with the start priority injection cycle = 1).
Last injection station is that station in which the complete injection moulding is completely filled.
Removal if index platen is in front position or ejector is in front position: The removal station
should be the first station and ejector program 2 or 3 should be preselected. The operator
intervention is enabled after having turned the index platen.
Insertion station can only be the first or last injection station.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 4 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Priority
If rotary unit and core pullers are to react to the same event, priority can be used to determine a
sequence.
(e.g. After the clamping unit has been opened, first the cores are to move out and then the
rotary unit is to be turned)
Start
Enter the start stroke for Turn rotary unit "cw" (ccw) in [mm] / [inch] in this field.
This input is only required for program preselections 23 and 24 which will be indicated by
changing the colour of the set value from grey to blue.
Stop
Enter the stop stroke for Turn rotary unit "cw" (ccw) in [mm] / [inch] in this field.
This input is only required for program preselection 24 which will be indicated by changing the
colour of the set value from grey to blue.
s (current stroke)
The current start / stop stroke is displayed in [mm] / [inch]. This is the stroke which will trigger a
rotary unit movement.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 5
Rotary unit / Mould table
Block
The axis (movement) blocked by the rotary unit will be displayed here.
Description of the abbreviations displayed:
CU1+ Opening
CU1- Closing
EU1+ Ejector forward (upper parts ejector)
EU1- Ejector back (upper parts ejector)
RE1+ Station ejector 1 forward (rotary table machines only)
RE1- Station ejector 1 back (rotary table machines only)
RE2+ Station ejector 2 forward (rotary table machines only)
RE2- Station ejector 2 back (rotary table machines only)
RE3+ Station ejector 3 forward (rotary table machines only)
RE3- Station ejector 3 back (rotary table machines only)
RT1+ Mould table left (mould table machines only)
RT1- Mould table right (mould table machines only)
NU1- Injection unit 1 (A) forward
NU1+ Injection unit 1 (A) back
NU2- Injection unit 2 (B) forward
NU2+ Injection unit 2 (B) back.
IP1+ Metering / Decompression (Injection unit 1 = A).
IP1- Injection (Injection unit 1 = A).
IP2+ Metering / Decompression (Injection unit 2 = B).
IP2- Injection (Injection unit 2 = B).
Example
Display EU1- (for Turn rotary unit ccw). Ejector back movement will be disabled as long as the
rotary unit has not reached the left limit position.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 6 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Reference
In this field the axis (movement) the rotary unit refers to will be indicated i.e. depending on
which movement the rotary unit will turn cw or ccw.
For a description of the abbreviations displayed please refer to "Block Axis" (see present
chapter).
A red X, which is displayed before the movement arrows of the status, means that the
movement was stopped.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 7
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Dreheinheitservoelektrisch-Einrichten_02
If the index bolt is not moved out or the clamping unit not opened, this downtime force [kN] /
[shtn] will regulate the rotary unit to its position. Select such a high downtime force that the drive
of the rotary unit can maintain the position when being idle. However, the value of the downtime
force should be selected low enough to prevent any overtemperature (see errore message on
NC error analysis).
An overtemperature could be reached if moulds are used which displace the rotary unit during
the clamping procedure.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 8 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Turn rotary unit cw Setting-v
Turn rotary unit ccw Setting-v
If the setting mode is active, the rotary unit is operated at the reduced set values set in this field.
Referencing procedure
The reference point must be newly determined after having assembled the adaptive rotary unit.
Referencing is only possible in user level 20.
Procedure:
1. Specifiy the actually determined position of the rotary unit as the set value.
2. Activate function selection "Referencing".
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 9
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Dreheinheitservoelektrisch-Indexbolzen_GB03
Index bolt
Rotary unit Index bolt remains moved in
After positioning the rotary unit, the index bolt moves in and remains moved in until the next
movement of the rotary unit. A change of this operating mode is only possible in user level 20.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 10 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Note
also refer to „Clamping unit safety position for index moved in“, chapter 1.6.1
also refer to „Start move out index for Open Stroke“,Chapter 11.4.12
NC error analysis
This menu lists the number of errors, the number of warnings, the error number and the error
text of the corresponding error message of the servo-electrical rotary unit.
Activate the function key "Alarms, submenu NC errors" (also refer to chapter 28) to access this
menu.
Motor diagnosis
In the NC diagnosis menu, the current motor temperature and the drive utilization of the rotary
unit can be read. Additionally, motor-specific data of the rotary unit are displayed.
Activate the function key "Diagnosis, submenu NC diagnosis" (also refer to chapter 22) to
access this menu.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 11
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Werkzeugtisch-TandemMould_01
via this menu. A description of the individual buttons and statuses is given in chapter 11.4 Mould
table.
The menus "Production data page 1 and page 3" and "Monitorings page 2" show separate
settings for Tandem Mould LM1 and LM2 (see chapter 18).
CAUTION
The program switch of the rotary unit activates the "Tandem Mould" option.
Sequence
The activation of the Tandem Mould (locking mechanism of the mould half) is set via the rotary
unit (see chapter 19).
The status of the locking can be taken from the rotary unit, too.
Rotary unit left = mould LM1 locked
Rotary unitright = mould LM2 locked
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 12 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Injection moulding cycle:
- Mould LM1 active (LM2 is locked)
- Cycle start
- Clamping process
- High pressure build-up.
- Injection process for LM1
- Lock LM1 (= unlock LM2)
- Form this time, LM2 is active
- Metering for LM2
- High pressure reduction.
- Opening movement
- Ejecting the unlocked mould LM2 via core puller
- Clamping process
- High pressure build-up.
- Injection process for LM2
- Lock LM2 (= unlock LM1)
- Form this time, LM1 is active
- Metering for LM1
- High pressure reduction.
- Opening movement
- Ejecting the unlocked mould LM1 via machine ejector
Status Display
The menu "Media centre" contains a status for Tandem Mould which can be copied into the
status bar.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 13
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Dreheinheit-Einstellungen_01
Use the Rotary unit menu (option for machines with horizontal clamping unit and hydraulic
rotary unit) to set the rotary unit and the parameters required.
If a tandem mould is operated with the hydraulic rotary unit, the menu text is changed from
"Rotary unit" to "Tandem Mould locking". Additionally, the "Information: rotary unit for tandem
mould locking" is displayed below the "Rotary unit" program preselection.
Rotary unit
Use this program preselection to activate the rotary unit. If the rotary unit is switched off, the
limit switches will not be checked and other movements will not be locked.
CAUTION
With the rotary unit being activated, an "Ejector safety stroke" is requested which disables
the rotary unit, the closing unit, and the cycle start if the safety stroke is exceeded. The safety
stroke can be entered in the ejector menu (see also chapter 8).
Please also observe the safety settings in the menu „Safety / General“ (see chapter 1.6.1).
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 14 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Preselection of direction of rotation
The direction of rotation of the rotary unit is set in this field. If the oscillation operation is
switched on, the program preselection "Mould table enabled for continuous rotary movement"
(see menu Machine in general / Safety, see chapter 1) must be activated additionally.
CAUTION
You may only activate the program numbers described below for the rotary unit.
If the machine is equipped with the Tandem Mould option, the entry of the program number
must not be changed and, thus, it is shielded.
Program number 0
"Turn rotary unit ccw / cw" before closing (depending on the mould statuses). This program will
be carried out only in combination with the "Mould table" menu.
Program number 21
Turn rotary unit "cw / ccw" for Mould opened but, however, before the ejector movement is
started (or if the ejector is switched off).
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 15
Rotary unit / Mould table
Program number 22
Turn rotary unit "cw / ccw" for Mould opened and ejection finished.
Program number 23
Turn rotary unit "cw / ccw" for Position Intermediate stop Open. The intermediate stop for Open
will be entered in the "Start" column.
Program number 24
Turn rotary unit "cw" (ccw) for "Start stroke Open" parallel to the movement. The stroke marker
for "Start stroke" will be entered in the "Start" column.
If the rotary unit is in position when reaching the stop stroke, "Open" will be continued.
If the rotary unit has not yet reached its position when reaching the stop stroke, "Open" will be
interrupted. Only after the rotary unit has reached its position will "Open" be continued. The
stroke position for "Stop stroke" will be entered in the "Stop" column.
CAUTION
This program can be run only if the machine has been designed for parallel movement or if the
"Pneumatic rotary unit" program has been preselected.
CAUTION
If the rotary unit is configured with the mould table menu (menu "Mould table" available), the
following reasonable combinations with the program number will be possible.
The removal and insertion station will be defined in the "Mould table" menu (see present chapter
11.4.10 "Configuration station").
First injection station is that station in which the first pre-moulded part is produced (assembly
with the start priority injection cycle = 1).
Last injection station is that station in which the complete injection moulding is completely filled.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 16 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Program number 22 was preselected:
Removal station should be that station in which the complete injection moulding is filled.
Insertion station should be the first injection station.
p Pressure
Enter the required pressure in [bar] for turning the circular disc cw or ccw or damping turning the
rotary unit cw or ccw.
v Speed
Enter the required speed in [%] for turning the circular disc cw or ccw or damping turning the
rotary unit cw or ccw in this field.
Start
Enter the start stroke for Turn rotary unit "cw" (ccw) in [mm] / [inch] in this field. This input is only
required for program preselection 24 which will be indicated by changing the colour of the set
value from grey to blue.
Stop
Enter the stop stroke for Turn rotary unit "cw" (ccw) in [mm] / [inch] in this field. This input is only
required for program preselection 24 which will be indicated by changing the colour of the set
value from grey to blue.
s Current stroke
The current start / stop stroke is displayed in [mm] / [inch]. This is the stroke which will trigger a
rotary unit movement.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 17
Rotary unit / Mould table
Block Axis
The axis (movement) blocked by the rotary unit will be displayed here.
Description of the abbreviations displayed:
CU1+ Opening
CU1- Closing
EU1+ Ejector forward (upper parts ejector)
EU1- Ejector back (upper parts ejector)
RE1+ Station ejector 1 forward (rotary table machines only)
RE1- Station ejector 1 back (rotary table machines only)
RE2+ Station ejector 2 forward (rotary table machines only)
RE2- Station ejector 2 back (rotary table machines only)
RE3+ Station ejector 3 forward (rotary table machines only)
RE3- Station ejector 3 back (rotary table machines only)
RT1+ Mould table left (mould table machines only)
RT1- Mould table right (mould table machines only)
NU1- Injection unit 1 (A) forward
NU1+ Injection unit 1 (A) back
NU2- Injection unit 2 (B) forward
NU2+ Injection unit 2 (B) back.
IP1+ Metering / Decompression (Injection unit 1 = A).
IP1- Injection (Injection unit 1 = A).
IP2+ Metering / Decompression (Injection unit 2 = B).
IP2- Injection (Injection unit 2 = B).
Example
Display EU1- (for Turn rotary unit ccw). Ejector back movement will be disabled as long as the
rotary unit has not reached the left limit position.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 18 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Program Time
In addition to the other parameters, there is also an option to make the rotary unit turn cw or ccw
via the time in [s].
CAUTION
Time for turning ccw / cw is the absolute rotation time. The input into the damping line will be
subtracted from the absolute rotation time.
Ex.:
Turn cw 2.0 s
Damping 0.5 s
The rotary will be moved for 1.5 s with the "Pressure / Speed turn cw" setting. The remaining
0.5 s, it will be turned to its limit position with the damping settings.
CAUTION
After switching on this program the rotary unit has to be moved to either of the two limit
positions.
Delay Time
Specify the delay for the "Turn rotary unit cw" or "Turn rotary unit ccw" movement in [s] in this
field.
Priority
This column is at the moment still under way.
Valve switch-off
When activating this program preselection, the valve will remain switched on for rotary unit
"left" (right) after the position "Rotary unit is left" (is right) has been reached. This will also be
displayed under rotary unit status.
If this program preselection is deactivated the valve will be switched off after reaching the
respective position.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 19
Rotary unit / Mould table
Pneumatic rotary unit
When activating this program preselection the rotary unit will be triggered pneumatically.
i.e. Hydraulic pressure and speed will not be triggered. Pressure and speed need not be
entered. The activation of the pneumatic rotary unit will additionally be indicated by changing the
colour of these entries to grey.
If this program preselection is deactivated, the hydraulic rotary unit is activated.
Reference Axis
In this field the axis (movement) the rotary unit refers to will be indicated i.e. depending on
which movement the rotary unit will turn cw or ccw.
For a description of the abbreviations displayed please refer to "Block Axis" (see present
chapter).
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 20 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Dreheinheit-Diagnose_01
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 21
Rotary unit / Mould table
Rotary unit is on the left (green colour) and valve remains triggered
Rotary unit is on the right (yellow colour) and valve remains triggered
A red X, which is displayed before the movement arrows of the status, means that the
movement was stopped.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 22 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Dreheinheit-Nullung_01
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 23
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Werkzeugtisch-Status_01
All presettings required for the operation of the mould table will be performed in the following
menus. The settings may only be changed in manual mode under user level 20. The current
angle position is displayed in the centre of the table. The graphic representation of this menu is
adapted to the respective machine type (rotary table, sliding table, V machine, Tandem Mould).
CAUTION
Please also observe the safety settings in the menu „Safety / General“ (see chapter 1.6.1).
General information
Fully automatic operation for all vertical machines will only be enabled if the machine is
equipped with an attached robot interface. Without this interface the machine can only be
operated in the semiautomatic mode.
In the semiautomatic mode, the safety gate (pneumatic safety gate) will be opened if the
operation is enabled, or, in case of a light curtain, a light (white illuminated pushbutton for Cycle
Start, optional: green light opposite to the operator) will be activated. This light indicates that
the part can be removed from the mould or that a part can be inserted without interrupting the
cycle. In case the parts removal procedure cannot be finished within the injection procedure,
the nozzle movement and the opening movement (rotary and sliding table machines only), the
subsequent cycle will be interrupted until the parts removal procedure has been finished. After
finishing the parts removal procedure the cycle will be continued when pressing the Cycle Start
key.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 24 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Lower moulds
Pressing the button in the left upper part of the lower mould, change is made to the menu for the
lower mould configuration. The status of the lower mould is displayed on the right of that entry.
Four flexible statuses are displayed in the lower part of the mould. The configuration of this
statuses are entered in the menu "Configuration / Status".
The left status shows the number of the current removal cycles and the right status shows the
number of the current insertion cycles. The digit shows the number of the removal / insertion
cycles carried out.
Information for vertical machines without robot (or deactivated robot interface):
After acknowledging "Insert part inserted" using the "Cycle Start" key, the lower mould status
will be accepted. (see also chapter 8, station ejector programs). The operator station has to be
defined as insertion station.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 25
Rotary unit / Mould table
All insert parts have been inserted into the respective lower mould (if insert parts are
necessary). The mould is released for an injection cycle.
Status green The injection process of injection unig A (B, C) was considered as good part
Status red The injection process of injection unig A (B, C) was considered as reject part
Status grey No consideration of good / reject part possible (e.g. by manual resetting the
removal cycles)
Configuraton error
The display of this symbol indicates a configuration error of this mould half. In
the configuration mould menu, the wrong entry is marked by a warning triangle.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 26 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Upper mould
Pressing the button in the left upper part of the upper mould, change is made to the menu for
the upper mould configuration. The status of the upper mould is displayed on the right of that
entry. Four flexible statuses are displayed in the lower part of the mould. The configuration of
this statuses are entered in the menu "Configuration / Status".
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 27
Rotary unit / Mould table
Stations
Configuraton error
The display of this symbol indicates a configuration error of this station. In the configuration
station menu, the wrong entry is marked by a warning triangle.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 28 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Set and reset statuses
Use these buttons to correct the statuses of the individual lower moulds. In case the lower
moulds have to be emptied / equipped manually (e.g.: in case of a down-time of the machine),
the mould status of the respective lower mould also has to be corrected by means of the
buttons.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 29
Rotary unit / Mould table
All parts removed
Use this program preselection to reset all lower mould statuses. In case the lower moulds have
to be emptied manually (e.g.: in case of a down-time of the machine), the mould status also has
to be reset.
CAUTION
Setting and resetting the mould statuses can only be carried out in manual operation if the table
is in position. Otherwise, the buttons are shielded.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 30 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Werkzeugtisch-Allgemein_04
The graphic representation and the number of entries of this menu is adapted to the respective
machine type (rotary table, sliding table, V machine).
Oscillation preselection
Oscillation off
The oscillation operation is activated in the menu "Machine in general / Safety" (see chapter 1)
via the program preselection "Mould table enabled for continuous rotary movement". In addition
"Oscillation range 1" or "Oscillation range 2" has to be activated. If the program preselection
"Mould table enabled for continuous rotary movement" and the preselection for the oscillation
preselection do not match, the "Incorrect oscillation configuration" error message will be
displayed.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 31
Rotary unit / Mould table
After switching on this program the activated lower moulds will be checked. The possible lower
moulds are determined by "Oscillation range 1" and Oscillation range 2". In the menu "Mould
table / Status" only those lower moulds determined by the oscillation range will be displayed.
Oscillation range 1
Oscillation range 2
Here you can choose between two oscillation ranges: The oscillation ranges have been preset
at the factory. The valid oscillation range is displayed in the menu "Mould table / Status". Only
those lower moulds are visible which are able to reach "Station A (clamping station)" for the set
oscillation range.
I.e. the oscillation can only take place between the lower mould displayed on this screen page.
CAUTION
There are no additional oscillation range switches i.e. the oscillation ranges will only be
determined by means of the program preselection.
Index preselection
Mould table Index moves back
After positioning the table, the index moves forward and then immediately backward.
Note
mechanical limit positioning sequentially - table not locked
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 32 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Mould table Index remains forward
After positioning the table, the index moves forward and remains forward until the next
movement of the table. If with the start of the opening movement, processing of all operator
stations has already been finished (removal / insertion), the mould table index is moving out
already parallel to the open mould movement.
Note
Mechanical limit positioning - table locked
Cycle simulation
Simulate cycle start key
A time delay (in seconds) for triggering a cycle start pulse is entered in the entry field "Simulate
cycle start key". A cycle start pulse is always triggered if the cycle start key is illuminated
(release operation).
When activating this preselection, the machine has to be started manually in the semiautomatic
mode during the first cycle only. Afterwards, the actuation of the cycle start key is simulated.
Program 2
Same procedure as for "Simulate cycle start key" The first manual cycle start is not necessary.
This program can only be used for service purposes.
Program 3
Reserve
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 33
Rotary unit / Mould table
Dry operation cycle
All movements are active
All activated machine axes are active.
Delete injection status Removal station when changing over to automatic mode
When changing to the automatic mode, the "Status injection moulding" is deleted (all injection
mouldings removed).
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 34 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Drop-out preventer (optional for MicroPower)
If this program is switched on, a new cycle will be disabled until the injection moulding has
passed the photoelectric barrier. If the injection moulding does not pass the photoelectric barrier
during the change over time (injection moulding will be ejected), the next cycle will not be
started. The control system signals an error.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 35
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Werkzeugtisch-Produktionsende_02
In this menu, the reaction of the "Manual end of production" key is defined. The key "End of
production" initiates the manual end of production.
Furthermore, the reaction of the robot signal "End of production by robot" is defined.
Deactivated
Key "End of production" is deactivated. Pressing the key does not initiate an end of production.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 36 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Automatic production end with shut-down sequence
The automatic end of production is initiated by alarms of error class 6, 7 and "Parts counter
switch-off". In automatic mode, the machine cycle will be stopped at Cycle End at the end of the
shut-down sequence (description see "Definiton of shut-down sequence").
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 37
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Werkzeugtisch-Konfiguration-Seite1_01
Mould selection
In the right upper part of the Pull Down menu, you select the mould half to which the following
settings refer. Depending on the machine type, up to 6 lower moulds (LM1 to LM6) can be
available.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 38 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Active in the production process
Use this preselection to activate the respective lower mould. An activated lower mould has to be
installed and will be integrated in the machine procedure.
Note
The program monitorings for Move in core puller remain active and the performance of the
programs for Move out core pullers are continued.
This lower mould program will be used with very heavy lower moulds where the mould table will
be unevenly loaded with the mould weight. Tilting of the mould table is avoided and thus the
mechanical stress reduced (bearing, drive, ...).
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 39
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Werkzeugtisch-Konfiguration-Seite2_01
Note
The program preselection "Cavity pressure transducer depending on mould" must be set (see
"Holding pressure / General / CPT selection", chapter 6).
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 40 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Assignment Injection parameter record (option)
Assignment of an injection parameter record for the preselected mould.
This entry can only be made if there is an injection parameter record option available. If this
option is not available, "Injection parameter record 1" has been entered.
This means that the lower moulds can be run with different settings (for the injection cycle). You
can select two injection parameter records.
The settings for the actual injection parameters will be made on the pages for "Injection",
"Holding pressure" and "Metering". The two injection parameter records are changed over in the
headline (see chapter 0).
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 41
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Werkzeugtisch-Konfiguration-Seite3_01
Deactivated
The ejector plate protection is not monitored.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 42 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Close mould / move in core(s)
Mould platen protection disables Close
If the lower mould is in the clamping station (for an activated mould platen protection) and the
input for the mould platen protection is not active, the closing procedure will be disabled.
The mould table can be moved. However, the "Ejector plate protection / Mould platen protection"
error message will be displayed.
Close mould
Mould platen protection disables Close
If the lower mould is in the clamping station (for an activated mould platen protection) and the
input for the mould platen protection is not active, the closing procedure will be disabled.
The mould table can be moved. However, the "Ejector plate protection / Mould platen protection"
error message will be displayed.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 43
Rotary unit / Mould table
Move in core(s)
Mould platen protection disables core pullers
Core puller movement (move in) will be disabled, if the mould platen protection and the core
puller are assigned to the same lower mould (upper mould).
Ejector back
Mould platen protection disables ejector
If the lower mould is in the ejector station (for an activated mould platen protection) and the
input for the mould platen protection is not active, the respective station ejector backward
movement will be disabled.
If the lower mould is in the clamping station (for an activated mould platen protection to upper
mould) and the input for the mould platen protection is not active, the upper mould ejector
backward movement will be disabled.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 44 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Werkzeugtisch-Konfiguration-Seite4_01
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 45
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Werkzeugtisch-Konfiguration-Seite5_01
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 46 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Werkzeugtisch-Konfiguration-Status_01
In this menu, flexible statuses can be assigned to the individual mould halves. An info text can
be assigned to the selected statuses. These statuses with info text will then be displayed in the
respective mould halves in the menu "Mould table / Status".
Removal cycles
The status shows the number of the current removal cycles.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 47
Rotary unit / Mould table
Insertion status
Status 0 No insert part in the respective lower mould
Status 1 Insert parts of the first insertion station inserted in the respective lower mould
Status 2 Insert parts of the first and second insertion station inserted in the respective
lower mould
Status 3 Insert parts of the first to third insertion station inserted in the respective lower
mould
Insertion cycles
The status shows the number of the current insertion cycles.
Vacuum status
Here, the vacuum status of the respective mould is displayed.
Status 0 Vacuum off
Status 1 vacuum valve on
Status 2 Vacuum OK (production pressure reached)
Status 3 Vacuum not OK (production pressure not reached)
Status 4 Pre-evacuation OK (demoulding pressure reached)
Status 5 Pre-evacuation not OK (demoulding pressure not reached)
Status 0 Temperature control zone switched off (this evaluation is valid only for individual
zones)
Status 1 Temperature control zone o.k.
Status -1 General temperature error in the temperature control zone assigned to the
respective mould.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 48 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Mould heating zone in the mould
Additionally, the wished temperature control zone must be selected. Entering "Zone 0" means a
monitoring of all mould heating zones assigned to the mould. Zone 1-4 corresponds to the "First
(to 4th) mould heating zone in the mould" assigned.
Status 0 Mould heating zone switched off (this evaluation is valid only for individual
zones)
Status 1 Mould heating zone o.k.
Status -1 General temperature error in the mould heating zone assigned to the respective
mould.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 49
Rotary unit / Mould table
Entering "Parameter 1-9" means a monitoring of the following quality parameters.
Parameter 1 Start-up waste
Parameter 2 Quality table
Parameter 3 Envelope
Parameter 4 Injection monitoring
Parameter 5 HP SLAVE change-over
Parameter 6 Injection integral monitoring
Parameter 7 CPT monitoring
Parameter 8 Demoulding time monitoring
Parameter 9 Injection stopped
Parameter 10 Metering integral monitoring
Status 0 No reject part
Status 1 Reject part (due to the selected parameter 1-9).
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 50 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-WerkzeugtischStation-Konfiguration-Seite1_01
In the station settings, the ejector assignments will be made and the respective station will be
defined. The settings assigned her are displayed for your information in the menu "Mould table /
Status" for the corresponding station.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 51
Rotary unit / Mould table
CAUTION
In machines with horizontal clamping station, the ejector is automatically assigned to the
removal station.
Exception: in the case of index platen mould (rotary unit program 20).
Up to 3 removal stations can be defined. The removal station number defines the order of the
removal stations. For the definition of a second (third) removal station the machine must be
equipped with a second (third) independent operator station (cycle start key 2 (3)).
For example: Removal station 1: sprue removal, removal station 2: injection moulding removal
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 52 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-WerkzeugtischStation-Konfiguration-Status_01
In this menu, flexible statuses can be assigned to the individual stations. An info text can be
assigned to the selected statuses. These statuses with info text will then be displayed in the
respective stations in the menu "Mould table / Status".
Vacuum pump
Status of the vacuum pump in the respective station
Status 0 Vacuum pump switched off
Status 1 Vacuum pump OK
Status -1 Vacuum pump error (e.g. Motor protection triggered)
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 53
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Werkzeugtisch-Konfiguration_03
0° - standard
With this preselection, the default view of the mould table status is shown. This option is
normally used for rotary table machines.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 54 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Fading of the stations and moulds not used
This program preselection can be used to hide the moulds and stations which are not active
and/or cannot be approached.
These settings only refer to the display of the stations and moulds on the page "Mould table /
Status" and do not influence the machine sequence.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 55
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Werkzeugtisch-Mehrstufiges Einspritzen_01
Use this menu to perform the settings for the multilvel injection.
Note: Only the last shot in the respective shot parameter record is used for the QT evaluation.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 56 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
2nd application example:
If the material is injected in independent cavities. Injection level 1 is used to fill cavity 1, and
injection level 2 is used to fill cavity 2. Each injection level 2 can consist of up to 10 injection
cycles.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 57
Rotary unit / Mould table
for the last injection cycle of level 2: In injection level 2 only, a holding pressure change-over
depending on the preselection (see chapter Holding pressure, master change-over) will be
carried out for the last injection cycle.
Note: If no holding pressure change-over in the respective injection cycle is released, material is
filled into the mould up to the last injection profile point (suggestion: 1 mm).
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 58 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Dreheinheitextern-Allgemein_02
In the „External rotary unit“ menu (option in machines with horizontal clamping unit and external
rotary unit), you can configure the rotary unit and the associated parameters.
The parameters and program settings for the „External rotary unit“ are the same as for the
„Rotary unit servoelectric“. For a description of the parameters and programs, see chapter
11.1.1 „Rotary unit servoelectric / general“.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 59
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Dreheinheit-Diagnose_01
Rotary unit position 0 degrees (90, 120, 180, 240, 270 degrees)
(pins 16 to 21)
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 60 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Door opening release
(pin 22)
Rotate cw
(pin 4)
Rotate ccw
(pin 5)
Ejector is back
(pin 6)
Pins 3 and 8: Signal from PLC to ensure that the safety doors are kept closed!
This signal also serves as a 2nd additional release signal for the rotary unit and thus ensures
that the rotation is safe and only possible when the safety devices are closed.
The signal is active, if the doors are closed and the lock magnets are fully powered (keeping
doors locked).
Pin 4: Rotate cw
This signal starts clockwise rotation. The signal remains active until the feedback signal
„Rotation unit position OK“ is received from pin 15.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 61
Rotary unit / Mould table
Pin 5: Rotate ccw
This signal starts counterclockwise rotation. The signal remains active until the feedback signal
„Rotation unit position OK“ is received from pin 16.
NOTE
If the rotary unit is in an intermediate position, the following signals are not issued: „Position OK“
(pin 15) and „Rotary unit ready“ (pin 14).
In this status, rotation can be started at a low speed. For details see the manual of the external
rotary unit.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 62 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Pin 15: Rotary unit position OK
This signal communicates that the rotary unit is located at one of its end positions (end positions
are signalled through pins 16 to 21, (0 to 270 degrees)).
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 63
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Überwachungen-Überwachung_01
Mould monitoring
Activating the mould monitoring.
Group 1-6
Activating the limit switch group.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 64 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Monitoring active
Under this line, the set monitoring function for the operating mode required at the time (setting,
manual, or automatic mode) can be activated. If monitoring is not active for an operating mode,
all blockings are removed when changing to this operating mode, the monitorings are no longer
active.
Info
Here, a short description of the group can be given, the description is displayed on the status
bar of the group.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 65
Rotary unit / Mould table
No limit switch active
Limit switch in position A active
Limit switch in position B active
Limit switch in position A+B active
Activating the limit switches for monitoring the respective position. Always the limit switches and
the edges of the two limit positions are monitored for a position.
If only 1 limit switch is required for a function (e.g. insert part monitoring), monitoring can
be carried out for limit switch available (e.g. position A) or not available (e.g. position B). If
monitoring is made for limit switch not available (e.g. limit switch available for position A and
monitoring is made for position B), the negative edges of the limit switch of position A are
checked if the edges are monitored.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 66 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
F11-Überwachungen-Programme_01
The monitoring programs can be set for the upper mould or separately for each station. Each
individual cell can be assigned to a monitoring program.
No.
Setting of the monitoring program. When preselecting "0", the current cell is no longer treated.
Start
Here the setting is made when the monitoring program will be active.
• ...: This preselection deactivates the current program line.
• before: The axis is monitored only before start from the limit position, no monitoring is made
during the movement.
• during: The axis is monitored during the complete movement. For example, this setting
cannot be made for the table unit.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 67
Rotary unit / Mould table
• to pos.: This setting can only be made for the clamping unit. Monitoring takes place only to
the set stroke position "Clamping unit safety position". This stroke position must be set
under the settings of the ejector plate protection.
• from pos.: This setting can only be made for the clamping unit. Monitoring takes place only
from the set stroke position "Clamping unit safety position". This stroke position must be
set under the settings of the ejector plate protection.
• after: This function is valid only for the closing movement. Monitoring is made with closed
mould during the clamping force build-up.
Axis
The axis to be monitored is set in this line. If there are several axes of this type (e.g. core puller
2), also the axis index (e.g. "2") must be set in the next field.
(Insert parts)
In this line, the insert parts of the lower mould in the station can be monitored.
• 0: The insert parts are not taken into consideration for this monitoring program.
• 1: The monitoring is active only if there are insert parts available.
• -1: The monitoring is active only if there are no insert parts available.
(Injection mouldings)
In this line, the injection mouldings of the lower mould in the station can be monitored.
• 0: The injection mouldings are not taken into consideration for this monitoring program.
• 1: The monitoring is active only if there are injection mouldings available.
• -1: The monitoring is active only if there are no injection mouldings available.
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 68 0515MC
Rotary unit / Mould table
Formation of edges: When changing the statuses of the limit switches between HIGH and LOW,
the corresponding edges are saved and can be monitored. The edge saving is deleted in the
clamping station during the rotation (rotary table, rotary unit) or at start opening.
(Response on monitoring)
In this line the setting is made how the reaction on an incorrect position of the limit switches
should be.
• Stop: The axis is blocked until all limit switches are in their correct positions. The blocking
can be reset only in manual or setting mode, an automatic mode must therefore be
interrupted.
• Stop / Back: The axis is blocked until all limit switches are in their correct positions and
the axis was moved back to its starting position. The axis can be returned in the manual
mode only..
• Stop/Ackn.: If an error of the limit switches occurs, the axis is blocked. In the automatic
mode its is possible, after all active movements were finished, to intervene into the
machine and correct the error. Opening a safety door or breaking through the light curtain
will activate the cycle start lamp, the machine continues after having remedied the error
and operated the cycle start key.
• Alarm / removal: This program only checks the limit switches, the machine continues
even with an incorrect position of the limit switches, only the status is written on the lower
mould. If the lower mould is in the removal station, the machine is stopped and a manual
removal can be carried out. No removal with the robot will take place. The program is
possible only for the clamping unit, the injection unit or the injection plunger.
• End / removal: With an incorrect position of the limit switches, this program is used to stop
the movement (only during clsoing or injection unit forward) and to return it immediately.
The status is written on the lower mould and the movement will be continued to the
insertion station. Here, the insertion process can be repeated manually. No insertion with
the robot will take place.
• Alarm / bl.dem.: (Alarm / blocking demoulding): This program operates as "Alarms /
removal", the machine is stopped in the removal station. The blocking can be reset only in
the manual mode after having remedied the problem.
• End / blocking dem. (End / blocking demoulding): The program operates as "End
/ insertion". In case of an errore movement is continued to the removal station and the
machine is topped here. The blocking can be reset only in the manual mode after having
remedied the problem.
• Stop/continue: The axis is blocked until all limit switches are in their correct positions. The
movement is immediately started as soon as the limit switch is in its correct position. The
block must not be acknowledged.
(Change of direction)
If this program is active, a started movement must be completely ended in order to be able for
an movement in the opposite direction.
A blocking by this program does not cause a status display for the axis.
HB6GB11K
0515MC
Chapter 11 - 69
Rotary unit / Mould table
HB6GB11K
Chapter 11 - 70 0515MC
Multi-component settings
12 Multi-component settings
F12-Allgemein_GB04
Multi-component settings
These settings will determine the status of the injection units of the multi-component machine.
The program selection "Injection unit active in the automatic mode" determines the injection
units being active in the automatic cycle. Independent of the activated injection units of the
program preselection "Injection unit active in the automatic mode", the preselection keys of the
injection units on the operator panel can be used for selecting which one will be active in the
manual or setting mode.
The automatic mode always starts with a start cycle by which stepwise producing of pre-
moulded part 1, pre-moulded part 2 (only for 3-components) and finished moulded part is made
possible. The start cycle is active if a rotary unit (see chapter Rotary unit) has been selected.
The "Start priority" program preselection indicates the injection unit with which the start cycle is
started and the order in which other injection units are added in the following cycles.
HB6GB12H
0115MC
Chapter 12 - 1
Multi-component settings
For the 2-component operation, only the injection unit with "Start priority" 1 is active in the first
machine cycle to produce the pre-moulded part. In the second cycle, a second injection unit with
"Start priority" 2 is added to inject the second component for the finished moulded part, while
the first injection unit is, at the same time, again producing a pre-moulded part.
CAUTION
The consequence is that, with an installed but deactivated injection unit, its position is no longer
inquired. For this reason, a lowering of the injection unit, e.g., can cause damage to the mould.
CAUTION
After having loaded a product data record for the current mould, the correctness of the setting
"Injection unit active in automatic mode" should be checked before starting automatic operation.
HB6GB12H
Chapter 12 - 2 0115MC
Multi-component settings
Start priority (injection cycle)
The start priority determines the order of the injection units activated in the program preselection
"Injection unit active in automatic mode". If the program preselection "Injection unit parallel
advance" is active, the priority applies only to the injection sequence.
CAUTION
The start priority must begin with "1". Start priority must be assigned in ascending order.
e.g.: 2-component machine
Injection unit A starts before injection unit B
Enter start priority A: 1
Enter start priority B: 2
HB6GB12H
0115MC
Chapter 12 - 3
Multi-component settings
Start priority (metering cycle)
The start priority determines the order of the injection assemblies which are in sequential
operation (marked by the green tick at the right of the program preselection). The priority only
influences the order of metering.
CAUTION
The start-up priority is independent of the injection priority selected. This priority is used to
enable the individual injection assemblies for the production cycle.
Thus, as soon as 2 injection units are used for production, the preselected injection priority (start
priority) defines the order of the injection sequence.
HB6GB12H
Chapter 12 - 4 0115MC
Multi-component settings
Typical application example for cavity sliding technology by means of core puller 1:
• Move in core puller 1, closing, pre-moulded part injection, metering/cooling with injection
unit B (IP2), opening, (central) ejector forward/back (sprue demoulding)
• Move out core puller 1, closing, main moulded part injection, metering/cooling with
injection unit B (IP2), opening, (central) ejector forward/back (demoulding of moulded
part)
Caution
As soon as 3 injection units are used for production, the preselected injection priority (start
priority) defines the order of the injection sequence of the respectively active injection
assemblies in a cycle.
Central ejector
This program preselection is required if the pre-moulded parts must be demoulded with the
respective ejector, too. When deactivating the central ejector, demoulding is carried out only
for the complete injection moulding (all injection units have injected). Application with transfer
system (starting control).
HB6GB12H
0115MC
Chapter 12 - 5
Multi-component settings
F12-Intervallspritzen_Seite1_01
Example:
Interval with A, B
1. Start with A
2. B is started by A
3. A is started by B
4. etc.
Injection unit A
Injection unit B
HB6GB12H
Chapter 12 - 6 0115MC
Multi-component settings
Sandwich operation (1 interval)
Sandwich operation starts with one unit. The other component enters at a starting point. The
main component generally switches over to holding pressure whereas the auxiliary component
does not have to switch over.
Injection unit A
Injection unit B
Holding pressure
Sealing (2 intervals)
For sealing, the order of events is the same as with sandwich operation. However, the main
component moves to a stopping point and is restarted by the other component.
Injection unit A
Injection unit B
Holding pressure
CAUTION
Changes in the program preselections performed in the automatic mode will only be accepted
when changing over to the manual mode.
HB6GB12H
0115MC
Chapter 12 - 7
Multi-component settings
F12-Intervallspritzen_Seite2_GB01
Set the individual interval steps for interval injection in the "Multicomponent settings Page
2" menu. To obtain a better overview, an info text can be assigned to the two injection units.
Additionally, the "Volume of the last cycle" is displayed in [cm³] for the two injection units and the
"complete volume of the last cycle". "V[%]" displays the percentages of the two volumes in the
complete volume.
Interval steps Start, Stop
Enter the volume into the Start input field, at which the other component is to be started. Enter
the target position for the component into the Stop input field. The injection unit which will start
first is alway on the left side. The second injection unit (which will follow) is always on the right
side. Wrong entries are marked by a yellow warning triangle.
CAUTION
Changes in the program preselections performed in the automatic mode will only be accepted
when changing over to the manual mode.
Whether a component terminates the injection cycle with or without holding pressure depends
on the entered stopping point.
i.e.: if the injection plunger reaches the stopping point before it reaches the change-over point
for holding pressure and no further interval steps are defined, the injection cycle ends without
holding pressure. If however, an additional interval step is set with set value "0", the injection
cycle ends with the selected holding pressure.
HB6GB12H
Chapter 12 - 8 0115MC
Multi-component settings
F12-ExtSpritzeinheit_SpritzeinheitB_01
Cooling time
Cooling time begins at „Injection finished“. At the end of the cooling time, the function Open
mould will be started.
The actual value for the currently expiring cooling time will be indicated on the left of the set
value.
HB6GB12H
0115MC
Chapter 12 - 9
Multi-component settings
Remote power of the external injection unit
An activation of the button will switch on or out the external injection unit. After activation, the
button will automatically be reset.
Diagnostic
Here, the current interface state of the external injection unit is being displayed.
Signal „Triggering of the needle valve nozzle on the mould“ (pin 22-30)
This signal is used for direct triggering a needle valve nozzle for the second component in the
mould.
HB6GB12H
Chapter 12 - 10 0115MC
Multi-component settings
Signals from the machine (machine signals)
Signal „Remote changeover Manual - Automatic“ (pin 4-12)
The signal will be set if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• The machine is operating in the (semi-) automatic mode.
The signal will be deactivated if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• The machine runs in manual mode.
NOTE
Status bar
Please refer to „Main axes“ in the menu „Media Centre / Status bar / Page 1“ for the status
display for the status bar of the external injection units.
Monitoring functions
The monitoring of filling and metering times can be found in the menu „Production data /
Monitoring functions / External injection unit“.
Quality table
The following parameters are available for recording in the quality table:
140-142 External injection units A-C: Filling time
143-145 External injection units A-C: Metering time
HB6GB12H
0115MC
Chapter 12 - 11
Multi-component settings
F12-Mehrstufiges Einspritzen_01
HB6GB12H
Chapter 12 - 12 0115MC
SmartEdit
13 SmartEdit
13.1 Editor
F13-Editor_GB01
All available sequences are displayed in the "Editor" menu.
Edit sequence
Activation of this button will open the editing mode (see 13.1.1 Editing mode).
Overview
Activation of this button will open the routine overview (see 13.1.2 Overview).
Sequences
A sequence is allocated to each tab with the first always being the main sequence and any
further sequence representing a partial sequence.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 1
0515MC
SmartEdit
F13-Editor_MainPad_GB01
Insert
Here, you can define an object and insert it into the routine.
Delete
Here, you can delete single objects from the routine.
Delete all
When pressing the button, all flexible object (inserted by you) will be deleted at once.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 2 0515MC
SmartEdit
"Insert" procedure
• Press the "Insert" button
• Select the wished object by clicking on it.
• The configuration pad opens
• Select the wished configuration (e.g. core puller / core puller 1 / move in)
• Press the "Insert node" button
• Selection panel and configuration pad close again
• All objects where insertions can be made are marked with "+"
• Search the wished position and then press the "+" marking.
• The configured object is now inserted at the selected position.
"Delete" procedure
• Press the "Delete" button
• All objects which can be deleted are marked with "X"
• Search the wished object and then press the "X" marking.
• The selected object is now removed from the routine.
• You can leave the delete mode by pressing the button again.
BEFORE
The configured object is inserted before the selected object
AFTER
The configured object is inserted after the selected object
INTERMEDIATE STOP
The selected object is duplicated and the configuted object is inserted between the given object
and the duplicated object.
NOTE:
An intermediate stop position must be set at the first movement of the intermediate stop. This
can be done by clicking on the object.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 3
0515MC
SmartEdit
The object is deleted from the routine by pressing the "X" mariking.
This object marks the start of a partial sequence (e.g. partial sequence "M4"
Decision
According to the defined condition for this object decision is made which branch (condition
fulfilled / not fullfilled) should be continued.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 4 0515MC
SmartEdit
Close decision
The decision branch is closed. This does, however, not stop the routine.
End of a sequence
This object signifies the end of an individual sequence.
This symbol is displayed on the setting pages of the objectes which were inserted into the
routine.
If, for example, core puller 1 was inserted in the routine, this symbol will be shown on the core
puller side (program numbers are faded out). This will show you at once that this axes is started
via SmartEdit (and not via the program number). Clicking on the symbol will cause a page
change to the SmartEdit main page.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 5
0515MC
SmartEdit
Standby
Object during standstill
Active
Object / movement active (display of progress over filling)
Ready
Object / movement finished
Stopped
Object / movement was stopped
Disabled
Object / movement was not activated (e.g. core puller 1 deactivated)
Not Available
Object not available
This will be displayed if a data record was loaded on a machine where, for example, core puller
1 is not available.
SmartEdit InsertPanel_00
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 6 0515MC
SmartEdit
Parallel branch
Here you can open or close a parallel branch.
It is required to insert a parallel movement (e.g. move in core puller parallel to closing)
Closed decision
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 7
0515MC
SmartEdit
In this case the routine is stopped until the clamping force has been built up.
Symbol in the routine:
Waiting for clamping force built up
Decision
A decision object can be inserted here.
It is required to be able to switch to an alternative branch, if necessary, if the configured
condition has not been fulfilled.
Here a query is made whether the clamping force has been built up.
If so, the routine is continued via the "yes" branch.
If not, the routine is continued via the "no" branch and the "yes" branch will be skipped.
Symbol in the routine:
Decision with "yes" and "no" branches
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 8 0515MC
SmartEdit
After having carried out the wished changes, the "Change node" button must be pressed in
order to accept these changes in the routine.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 9
0515MC
SmartEdit
Clamping unit
CAUTION
A vertical clamping unit is represented by a vertical symbol.
Ejector
CAUTION
The upper parts ejector of vertical machines is represented by a vertical symbol.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 10 0515MC
SmartEdit
Station ejector
Injection unit
CAUTION
A vertical injection unit is represented by a vertical symbol.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 11
0515MC
SmartEdit
Injection plunger
Movement Injection
Movement Injection active
Movement Injection stopped
Movement Injection finished
Movement Metering / Decompression
Movement Metering / Decompression active
Movement Metering / Decompression stopped
Movement Metering / Decompression finished
CAUTION
A vertical injection unit is represented by a vertical symbol.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 12 0515MC
SmartEdit
Screwing-out movement
Screwing-out movement active
Screwing-out movement stopped
Screwing-out movement finished
Screwing-in movement
Screwing-in movement active
Screwing-in movement stopped
Screwing-in movement finished
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 13
0515MC
SmartEdit
CAUTION
Symbol "Rotary unit servoelectric"
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 14 0515MC
SmartEdit
Robot
Start robot
Robot started
Robot stopped
Robot finished
Timer
Timer
Timer Time started
Timer Time stopped
Timer Time elapsed
Air valve
Cooling time
Cooling time
Cooling time started
Cooling time stopped
Cooling time elapsed
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 15
0515MC
SmartEdit
13.1.2 Overview
F13-Editor_Übersicht_GB00
Screenshot (camera)
An activation of the symbol opens the window for for the screen photo. The displayed routine
can be printed as a picture and saved as file in different formats.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 16 0515MC
SmartEdit
13.2 Monitorings
F13-Überwachungen_GB01
Insert
Here, different objects (monitorings, axis stops) can be inserted.
Delete
Here, different objects (monitorings, axis stops) can be deleted.
Delete all
Here, all inserted objects can be deleted at once.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 17
0515MC
SmartEdit
Please refer to chapter 13.1.1 (Edit mode) for the procedures concerning inserting or deleting
an object.
Monitoring active
This object means that the axis status will be monitored.
Axis stopped
This object means that the axis was stopeed by a monitoring object.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 18 0515MC
SmartEdit
Monitoring selection
NOTE:
Only for the "Interruption" stop type can the alarm message be hidden (with alarm message:
OFF) Alarm messages are always issued for all other stop types.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 19
0515MC
SmartEdit
Monitoring
A monitoring object can be inserted here.
In this case monitoring reacts if core puller 1 has not been moved in.
Symbol in the routine:
Monitor Core puller 1 moved in
Stop axis
A stop axis object can be inserted here.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 20 0515MC
SmartEdit
• Stop
Axis stop without acknowledgement. The automatic cycle is stopped at once.
• Stop/Ackn.
The automatic cycle is immediately stopped. After having pressed Cycle start (closing
key), the cycle is continued. An alarm message is displayed.
The alarm is activated and closing is stopped if the core has not been
moved in when closing the clamping unit. After having pressed Cycle
start (closing key), the core is moved in the closing is continued.
• Ackn/End
The automatic cycle is stopped at cycle end. After having pressed Cycle start (closing
key), a new cycle is started. An alarm message is displayed.
• Stop/End
The automatic cylce is stopped at cycle end and all drives are switched off. An alarm
message is displayed.
• Interruption
Stopping of an automatic cycle until the corresponding monitoring enables the cycle
again. An alarm message is displayed.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 21
0515MC
SmartEdit
13.3 Settings
F13-Einstellungen_GB01
In the "Settings" menu, you can deactivate the SmartEdit or specify settings to be viewed.
Sequence view
Specify here whether the sequence should be displayed "horizontally" or "vertically".
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 22 0515MC
SmartEdit
CAUTION
The movements can always be performed, independently of any limit positions.
Show scrollbars
You can specify here whether the scrollbars (for shifting the routine view) shall be displayed.
NOTE
If you deactivate the scrollbars, the routine view can be shifted by pressing or pulling.
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 23
0515MC
SmartEdit
HB6GB13B
Chapter 13 - 24 0515MC
Function keys (B6E)
F14-Machinekeys-Seite1_01
The main functions of the machine can be selected in this menu. They are used to switch on the
drive and the heating as well as to select the operating mode. The selected function is displayed
by means of luminous rings in red, green, and yellow.
Additionally, the movement keys of the main axes and the special programs can be selected in
this menu.
A detailed description of the individual function keys is given in Chapter A.2 Control elements.
CAUTION
If access to the machine is made via a remote connection (remote maintenance), the operation
of the machine on the remote PC is blocked.
HB6GB14C
Chapter 14 - 1
0114WT
Function keys (B6E)
F14-Machinekeys-Seite2_01
The main functions of the machine can be selected in this menu, too.
Additionally, the movement keys of the core puller can be selected in this menu.
HB6GB14C
Chapter 14 - 2 0114WT
Special programs
15 Special programs
F15-Wochenschaltuhr_02
The control system includes a weekly time switch. The control system includes a weekly time
switch you can use to activate the automatic switching on and off of the heaters, the hydraulic
motor, and the periphery.
Day
Select the day(s) of the week to which the following settings should apply. The current day of
the week is displayed in black.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 1
Special programs
Start / Stop
Enter the time for the switching on and off of the units to be switched for each weekday
selected.
If "Switch-on delay" or "Switch-off delay" is entered, this will be started at the time entered. The
respective unit will only be switched on or off at the end of this delay period.
CAUTION
The mould heating and the temperature control units have to be switched on in the respective
displays (see Chapter 2).
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 2 0515MC
Special programs
F15-Sonderprogramme-Seite1_02
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 3
Special programs
Material conveyor with intervals
Enter the "Number of material conveying intervals", the "Material conveying time" and the
"Material change over time".
When falling short of the "Material level reached" limit switch, the material output and the
"Material conveying time" starts. When this has been completed the "Material change over time"
is started. When the material change over time has been completed the "Material conveying
time" restarts. The limit switch "Material level reached" must be activated within the "Number of
material conveying intervals", otherwise the material output will be switched off and the "Error
material conveyor" message will be displayed. The machine continues to run, however, until the
switch-off function of the metering time monitoring responds.
Acknowledge the error message "Error material conveyor" by switching off / on the material
conveyor on the manual control panel.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 4 0515MC
Special programs
Material Change over time
Required for the program preselection "Material conveyor with intervals" and "Material conveyor
parallel to metering".
This preselection determines whether the socket is always switched on or whether it is switched
parallel to the heating programs, the motor or the peripheral equipment.
One of the following options is available:
Socket cut-off
Always on
The sockets are continuously switched on.
always off
The sockets are continuously switched off.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 5
Special programs
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 6 0515MC
Special programs
F15-Sonderprogramme-Seite2_04
Off
The hooter is deactivated.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 7
Special programs
CAUTION
During the prewarning for weekly time switch (if the respective unit is to be switched on before
long), the hooter is additionally activated (independent of the program preselection Hooter).
With the program activated the "Counter Belt Conveyor" will be increased for each clamping
force build up. When the set counter set value is reached the "Delay Time Conveyor Belt" is
started. When this time has ended the conveyor belt will be triggered as input under "Conveyor
Belt Time".
CAUTION
If the program is not selected, the monitoring of the coupling is deactivated, too.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 8 0515MC
Special programs
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 9
Special programs
F15-Sonderprogramme-Seite3_01
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 10 0515MC
Special programs
Delay time Switch-off
The cooling water valve is switched off at the end of this delay time.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 11
Special programs
F15-Sonderprogramme-Seite4_01
If you select and highlight this field, the drop-out flap will be activated.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 12 0515MC
Special programs
First sprue then parts
Procedure in the automatic mode if jolt ejector Stroke rate = 0:
• Close mould -> flap is switched to position "Reject parts".
• Injection process -> if a reject part is evaluated, the flap remains in the position "Reject
parts" until the next cycle, thus the sprue and the injection moulding (reject part) will be
disposed of to the sprue side.
• Injection process -> if a good part is evaluated, the mould is opened, the ejector moves to
the intermediate stop and the sprue is ejected.
• Start of the "Delay time Ejector back" at intermediate stop and, at the same time, of the
"Delay time Drop-out flap".
• At the end of the "Delay time Drop-out flap", the flap is switched to the position "Good
parts".
• At the end of the "Delay time Ejector back" at intermediate stop, the ejector continues
moving to its limit position (perhaps with vibrating stroke) and the injection moulding is
ejected.
• Start of the next cycle.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 13
Special programs
First parts then sprue
Procedure in the automatic mode if jolt ejector Stroke rate = 0:
• Close mould -> flap is switched to position "Good parts".
• Injection process -> if a reject part is evaluated, the flap is switched to the position "Reject
parts" and remains in this position until the next injection process, thus the sprue and the
injection moulding (reject part) will be disposed of to the sprue side.
• Injection process -> if a good part is evaluated, the mould is opened, the ejector moves to
the intermediate stop and the injection moulding is ejected.
• Start of the "Delay time Ejector back" at intermediate stop and, at the same time, of the
"Delay time Drop-out flap".
• At the end of the "Delay time Drop-out flap", the flap is switched to the position "Reject
parts".
• At the end of the "Delay time Ejector back" at intermediate stop, the ejector continues
moving to its limit position (perhaps with vibrating stroke) and the sprue is ejected.
• Start of the next cycle.
CAUTION
In manual operation, the flap generally remain in the position "Reject parts".
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 14 0515MC
Special programs
Delay time Drop-out flap
Enter the delay time for the drop-out flap in [s] in this field. The actual value will be displayed on
the left of this value.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 15
Special programs
F15-Sonderprogramme-Seite5_01
off
The mould area lamp is switched off.
always on
The mould area lamp is always switched on.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 16 0515MC
Special programs
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 17
Special programs
F15-Airmould_02
The "Modular Airmould® System" permits the production of high-quality mouldings by means
of the "Airmould®" (internal gas pressure) and the "Airmould® Contour" (surface gas pressure)
process. For this reason, the machine, for example, may be operated with shorter cycle times
and lower clamping forces.
Use this menu, to activate the "Airmould Mobile" and to preselect the start time for injecting the
nitrogen into the mould.
Injection unit
This Pull Down menu is for machines with two or more injection units. Enter the injection unit to
determine for which injection unit the air mould settings will become effective.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 18 0515MC
Special programs
Start volume-dependent
When the set volume is reached the Airmould is started. Enter the set value for the volume
dependent start of the Airmould here.
CAUTION
The injection pressure dependent start of the Airmould will only be enabled after having reached
the release volume. See entry "Release after volume".
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 19
Special programs
F15-WKZverschlußdüse-WKZverschlußdüse_GB02
CAUTION
When using mould shut-off nozzles (mould shut-off nozzles), the operator has to ensure that
there are no hazardous pinching or shearing points!
On this screen page the opening and closing can be set, stroke or time dependently, as well as
both stroke and time dependently.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 20 0515MC
Special programs
njection unit
This Pull Down menu is for machines with two or more injection units. Enter the injection unit to
determine for which injection unit (master group) the mould shut-off nozzle settings will become
effective. A slave group or slave groups can be given inside the brackets. Slave groups initiate
an opening of the standard mould shut-off nozzle. i.e. The mould shut-off nozzle is opened
before injection and closed again at the end of the injection process (see prgr.no. 1).
Injection parameter record
This Pull Down menu is for machines with two or more injection parameter records. Entering
the injection parameter records determines the active injection parameter record with which the
mould shut-off nozzles will be started. Setting "1-x" means that the settings of the mould shut-off
nozzles will be started independent of the active injection parameter record.
Prog.No. (option)
This program preselection is used to determine the function of the respective mould shut-off
nozzle.
Entering value:
0: Cascade (parallel to the injection process)
1: Mould clamp (serial to the injection). The mould shut-off nozzle is opened before injection
and closed again at the end of the injection process.
2: Mould clamp (parallel to the injection). The mould shut-off nozzle is opened parallel to
injection and closed again at the end of the injection process.
3: Mould clamp (parallel to nozzle contact force build-up, in the automatic mode only). In the
automatic mode, the start time of the mould shut-off nozzle is started parallel to the build-
up of the nozzle contact force. At the end of the time the mould shut-off nozzle is opened
(with start of injection at the latest) and closed again after the injection process.
4: Cascade (parallel to the injection process, delayed closing after end of holding pressure).
The program preselection "Open during holding pressure" must be activated. The time
"Open during holding pressure" is started at the end of holding pressure. At the and of the
time, the mould shut-off nozzle is closed.
5: Cascade (parallel to the nozzle contact force build-up, delayed closing after end of
holding pressure). Open mould shut-off nozzle, see prog. 3, close mould shut-off nozzle,
see progr. 4;
6: Cascade (parallel to nozzle contact force build-up, in the automatic mode only). Open
mould shut-off nozzle, see prog. 3, close mould shut-off nozzle after the injection process.
permanently open
If the selected mould shut-off nozzle is to remain continuously open this program has to be
switched on.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 21
Special programs
Start [ccm] / [cuin]
This stroke marker sends the start pulse for the mould shut-off nozzle during the forward
movement of the injection plunger.
The zero point of the stroke measuring system is the foremost position of the injection plunger,
i.e. the numerical values increase towards maximum as the injection plunger moves back.
Start [s]
This time specifies the start pulse for the mould shut-off nozzle. It starts at the same time as
"Injection start".
With program preselection "3", this time is started parallel to the build up of the nozzle contact
force.
Cascade control
If the mould shut-off nozzles are to be switched on one after the other (cascade format) the
stroke marker "Start [mm]" has to be preselected in such a way that it is prior to the stroke
marker "Stop [mm]" of the preceding mould shut-offnozzle.
Example:
Mould shut-off nozzle 1 Start: 200 Stop: 180
Mould shut-off nozzle 2 Start: 185 Stop: 150
Mould shut-off nozzle 3 Start: 155 Stop: 130
etc.
This ensures that one mould shut-off nozzle is always open. The stroke marker "Stop [mm]"
of the preceding mould shut-off nozzle always has to receive the set value "0", otherwise the
"Injection" function will be interrupted.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 22 0515MC
Special programs
Stop [s]
This time will be started with Start Injection. The stop pulse is sent at the end of the "Stop [s]"
time.
The Start via stroke or time or Stop via stroke or time programs can be combined or all can be
selected. The mould shut-off nozzles then start or stop depending on the preselection, when the
stroke marker has been reached or at the end of the respective times.
Status bar
During Clamping injection plunger (Metering limit position) the injection plunger is maintained in
position.
This will be indicated by the symbol in the status bar.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 23
Special programs
F15-WKZverschlußdüse-Allgemein_01
when setting
The mould shut-off nozzles are relieved in the setting mode.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 24 0515MC
Special programs
when the mould heating is blocked
The mould shut-off nozzles are relieved if the mould heating and/or the hot runner show one of
the following errors:
• Switched off
• Learning mode active
• Sensor breakage
• Short circuit
• Softstart (starting control active)
• Set value error
• Outside the minus tolerance
CAUTION
In general, the mould shut-off nozzles are relieved in the case of EMERGENCY STOP. These
program preselections are deemed to protect your mould.
CAUTION
During this time, the pump is actively triggered in the case of a hydraulic mould shut-off nozzle.
Position monitoring
The position of the mould shut-off nozzles towards the injection process is monitored here.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 25
Special programs
Plausibility monitoring of Start / Stop
Here is checked whether the plausability of the start and stop points are correct during cascade
connection. An error message will be displayed in the case of error. i.e. if one mould shut-off
nozzle is closed, another Mouldmaster nozzle must be opened.
• No monitoring
• stroke-dependent monitoring
• Time-dependent monitoring
• Monitoring depending on stroke and time
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 26 0515MC
Special programs
F15-Vacuum_02
Vacuum - Valve
Injection unit
This Pull Down menu is for machines with two or more injection units. Enter the injection unit to
determine for which injection unit the vacuum valve settings will become effective.
Off
Use this preselection to switch off the vacuum valve.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 27
Special programs
On, with pressure monitoring
Use this preselection to switch the vacuum valve on with the pressure monitoring activated.
The pressure monitoring is only activated "For evacuate start stroke (Intermediate stop)" or
Clamping force build-up.
If the pressure switch of the vacuum monitoring is activated the clamping procedure will be
continued.
Version 1:
The vacuum pressure must be set directly at the pressure switch.
Version 2:
The vacuum pressure must be preset via the screen page under "Vacuum pressure".
At the end of the "Time Intermediate Stop" the pressure switch of the vacuum monitoring has
to be activated. If this is not the case, the machine cycle will be stopped and the "Vacuum
monitoring Pressure" alarm message will be displayed.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 28 0515MC
Special programs
For start stroke (Intermediate stop)
Closing of the mould is interrupted by "Evacuate start stroke". The times"Time Intermediate
Stop" and "Time evacuation before injection" begin to run and the evacuation is started.
At the end of the "Time Intermediate stop", the mould will be closed.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 29
Special programs
Evacuate start stroke
Enter the start stroke at which the actual evacuation is started. The "Time Evaucation before
Injection" begins to run and the evacuation is started.
This set value is to be entered when preselecting the programs "for Start stroke (Intermediate
stop Close)" and "for Start stroke (parallel to Close)".
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 30 0515MC
Special programs
F15-Vacuum-Bedienstation_01
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 31
Special programs
Vaccum shut-off at production stoppage in
With activated program preselection, the timer "Vacuum switch-off at production stoppage in xx
[min]" is started in the case of production stoppage. After the timer has run down, the vacuum
pump and the valves will be switched off.
Vacuum valve
Vacuum valve mode
Possible settings:
• off
Use this preselection to switch off the vacuum valve.
• on, without monitoring
Use this preselection to switch on the vacuum valve while no pressure monitoring or time
monitoring is activated.
• on, with production pressure monitoring
Use this preselection to switch the vacuum valve on with the pressure monitoring
activated.
Version 1:
The vacuum pressure must be set directly at the pressure switch.
Version 2:
The vacuum pressure must be preset via the screen page under "Vacuum pressure".
Evacuation is finished as soon as the monitoring pressure has reached. At the end of
the "Time Evacuation" the pressure switch of the vacuum monitoring has to be activated
at the latest. If this is not the case, the machine cycle will be stopped and the "Vacuum
monitoring Pressure" alarm message will be displayed.
• on, with time monitoring
Use this preselection to switch the vacuum valve on with the pressure monitoring
activated. The pressure monitoring is only activated "For evacuate start stroke
(Intermediate stop)" or Clamping force build-up.
At the end of the "Time Evacuation" the pressure switch of the vacuum monitoring has to
be activated. If this is not the case, the machine cycle will be stopped and the "Vacuum
monitoring Pressure" alarm message will be displayed.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 32 0515MC
Special programs
Evacuation Start
This setting starts evacuation.
Possible settings:
• Evacuation off
• Evacuation before Ejector backward
• Evacuation with Intermediate stop Ejector backward
• Evacuation parallel to Ejector backward
• Evacuation after Ejector backward
• Evacuation after first insertion cycle
• Evacuation after second insertion cycle
• Evacuation Start with application program (special solution via core puller programs
starting with 50)
Pre-evacuation Start
This setting starts pre-evacuation. Pre-evacuation is determined to monitor the demoulding
pressure. Alternatively, it can be used to empty the lines before starting the actual evacuation.
Possible settings:
• Pre-evacuation off
• Pre-evacuation before Ejector backward
• Pre-evacuation with Intermediate stop Ejector backward
• Pre-evacuation parallel to Ejector backward
• Pre-evacuation after Ejector backward
• Pre-evacuation after first insertion cycle
• Pre-evacuation after second insertion cycle
• Pre-evacuation Start with application program
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 33
Special programs
Monitoring pressure evacuation
The cycle will be continued after having reached the vacuum pressure set here.
Typical entry: -0.1 to -0.9 bar (-1.45 to -13.05 psi)
Time pre-evacuation
Input of the pre-evacuation time.
Time post-evauation
Input of the evacuation time.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 34 0515MC
Special programs
F15-Reinigung_01
Off
Use this preselection to switch off the demoulding / brushing device.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 35
Special programs
• Move in the robot unit or move a platen (to eject the parts) to Position moved in.
• Ejector back to Position Vibrating stroke.
• Ejector forward to Position Ejector in front position.
• Move out the robot unit or move back the platen to Position moved out.
Sequence selection
Using this selection, individual sequences of the demoulding / brushing device can be created.
Number of strokes
Enter the number of strokes which the demoulding / brushing device shall be moved out and
moved in for each cleaning cycle.
Left
Right
Selection of the direction of rotation of the brush during moving in
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 36 0515MC
Special programs
Rotating during moving out
Select whether the brush shall rotate during moving out.
Left
Right
Selection of the direction of rotation of the brush during moving out
No valve switch-off
When activating this program selection, the valves for the demoulding / brushing device remain
switched on after having reached the corresponding limit position. This prevents the cleaning /
spraying device from lowering.
If this program preselection is deactivated the valve will be switched off after reaching this
position.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 37
Special programs
F15-AirmouldAquamould-Anwahl_01
Use this menu to make the wished programs and set value presettings for a "Modular Airmould /
Aquamould® System integrated into the IMM.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 38 0515MC
Special programs
Start criterion Time [s]
When the set time has been completed the Airmould / Aquamould is started. Enter the set value
for the time-dependent start of the Airmould / Aquamould here. This time will be started with
Start Injection.
CAUTION
The injection pressure dependent start of the Airmould / Aquamould will only be enabled after
having reached the release volume. See entry "Release after volume".
Injection unit
This Pull Down menu is for machines with two or more injection units. Enter the injection unit to
determine for which injection unit the Airmould / Aquamould settings will become effective.
Injection modules 1 to 8
Pulse pressure program 1 to 8
Selecting this screen activates or deactivates the pulse program for the wished injection
module.
In the IMM’s "Automatic" mode the "Pulse pressure program" enables the cleaning of the pin
from plastics residues. To this end, the pin is blown out with nitrogen at regular intervals. The
mould is in the "Mould open" position and the ejector in the "Ejector is forward" position.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 39
Special programs
Pulse pressure
The pressure for blowing out the injection module pin is entered in this field.
Pulse interval
Enter the number of intervals (injection cycles) after which the pin should be blown out
(Example: after 5 injection cycles the pin should be blown out, pulse interval = 5).
Pulse counter
Enter the number of pressure pulses per interval for blowing out the injection module pin.
Pulse time
The time for blowing out the injection module pin is entered in this field.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 40 0515MC
Special programs
F15-AirmouldAquamould-Manuell_01
Use this menu to check the function of the Airmould / Aquamould in the "Manual" operating
mode.
CAUTION
A function test is only possible if the safety gate of the clamping unit and the injection unit
(nozzle) are closed!
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 41
Special programs
Pressure regulator module 1 to 8
• Actuate the "Manual mode" key.
• Activate the field "Pressure regulator module 1" in the menu "Airmould / Aquamould /
Selection".
• Enter a set value in the numerical field "Pressure regulator module 1". Press the "ENTER"
key to acknowledge this value.
• Actuate the "Airmould" key. Nitrogen is flowing through the mono or pressure regulator
module 1 to the machine nozzle or the injection modules.
• Check the undisturbed flowing off of the nitrogen.
• Check whether the "appropriate" injection module has been connected.
• Check whether there are leakages within the pipework, if any, remedy the leakages.
When you release the key, the Airmould mono- or pressure regulator module will be switched
off. However, the respective exhaust air valve will remain triggered until the nitrogen pressure
has dropped below 5 bar (73 psi).
Proceed accordingly for all other pressure regulator modules.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 42 0515MC
Special programs
F15-AirmouldAquamould-Druckregelmodul_01
Use this menu to enter the set values for the injection profile of the pressure regulator module 1
to 8.
After the set value input the set value graphic shows the time / pressure development of the
set values. Time is shown on the X axis and pressure is shown on the Y axis. The appropriate
maximum values can be read off next to the diagram axes.
Pressure profile
• You can specify pressure profile values separately for two fixed time sections
and seven time sections which may be activated. The pressure profile is subject to linear
interpolation between the individual time sections. Activate the wished number of time intervals.
• Specify the individual time values and the corresponding pressure values.
• The pressure profile starts at the end of the "Delay time Gas feed"
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 43
Special programs
CAUTION
Note that for the "Point of time [s]:" set values the total time must be entered! I.e. the right set
value must always be greater than the left set value!
It is not always necessary to use all gradations for simple injection moulded parts. However, in
case of complex injection moulded parts, it is useful to set all profile points.
Deactivate not used profile points!
Generally, the nitrogen injection profile should be set so that all injection moulded parts will be
"good" even if the setting differs from the therotical ideal setting.
Monitoring time
The "Monitoring time" starts at the same time as "Delay time Degassing".
The "Monitoring time" ends if it has run out or if the "Dealy time Degassing" has run out, even if
the "Monitoring time" has been set longer.
During the "Monitoring time", the nitrogen pressure of all activated pressure regulator modules
must not be decreased by more than the "Monitoring pressure" in its last profile point.
Enter a set value >0 to activate the "pressure monitoring".
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 44 0515MC
Special programs
Monitoring pressure
For reasons of quality assurance, you may monitor the nitrogen pressure after injection into the
injection moulded part in the "Automatic mode".
An extreme pressure drop is significant for leakages within the mould or at the nitrogen injection
points, e.g. nitrogen leakage between the injection module pin and the plastics.
During the "Monitoring time", the nitrogen pressure of all activated mono- or pressure regulator
modules must not be decreased by more than the "Monitoring pressure" in its last pressure
profile.
The "monitoring pressure" will only be effective, if a set value > 0 has been entered for the
"Monitoring time".
If for example a pressure profile with a set value of "p 1" to "p 3" has been preselected, the
pressure in step "p 3" will be monitored.
If the monitoring pressure value ("Set pressure" minus "monitoring pressure") has been fallen
short of during the "Monitoring time", the "Pressure monitoring Airmould controller n" alarm
message will be displayed.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 45
Special programs
F15-ReinigungV_Seite1_01
Monitoring functions
The monitoring inputs and the "Brush moved out" signal are requested even with the brush
being switched off and must be bridged if the brush is not connected.
The mould table movement is enabled only with the brush being moved out.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 46 0515MC
Special programs
Manual mode:
Option:
Press the "Next position" kontrol key (right key) to carry out a cleaning / spraying cycle.
Press the "Home position" control key (left key) to move the cleaning / spraying device back to
its home position.
Option:
A complete brushing process is carried out by pressing the "Move brush in" key.
Note:
The cleaning / spraying device always starts a cleaning / spraying cycle if the respective start
condition has been met according to the program preselection.
Setting mode:
Option:
Press the "Next position" control key (right key) to move the cleaning / spraying device into the
next target position (single-step operation).
Press the "Home position" control key (left key) to move the cleaning / spraying device back to
its home position.
Option:
A complete brushing process is carried out by pressing the "Move brush in" key.
Note:
The cleaning / spraying device always starts a cleaning / spraying cycle if the respective start
condition has been met according to the program preselection.
Automatic mode:
After having reached the preset "Interval cleaning / spraying", the cleaning / spraying device
starts the preselected cleaning / spraying cycles if the respective start condition has been met
according to the program preselection.
Option:
The brush is started only if the "Move brush in" key has been pressed. The blue "Move brush in"
lamp indicates that a brushing process can be started.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 47
Special programs
Operator station preselection
The selection parameters of the station to which the cleaning / spraying device interface refers
is listed in the right pull down menu.
Program preselections of the cleaning / spraying device (robot) for clamping unit
CAUTION
If the present set value has been set to small there is a risk of the robot bumping into the mould
or the clamping platen!
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 48 0515MC
Special programs
Start before clamping during start-up waste
If you have activated this program, the robot will move in before the "Close mould" movement.
The cycle will be continued after the robot has finished. This process will be continued until the
end of the start-up waste.
CAUTION
If the "Mould opened" position has been set to small there is a risk of the robot bumping into the
lower mould and being damaged subsequently.
Note:
If the robot moves from the home position to the limit position, it is always the upper mould
which will be cleaned / sprayed.
If the robot moves from the limit position to the home position, it is always the lower mould
which will be cleaned / sprayed.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 49
Special programs
Program preselections of the cleaning / spraying device (robot) for station A-F
Start after station ejector back
If you have activated this program, the robot will move in after the "Station ejector back"
movement. The cycle will be continued after the robot has finished.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 50 0515MC
Special programs
F15-Anguss_Seite1_01
Monitoring functions
The monitoring inputs and the „Sprue knock device moved out“ signal are requested even with
the sprue knock device being switched off and must be bridged if the sprue knock device is not
connected.
The mould table movement is enabled only with the sprue knock device being moved out.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 51
Special programs
Manual mode:
Option:
Press the „Next position“ control key (right key) to carry out a knock-off cycle.
Press the „Home position“ control key (left key) to move the sprue knock device back to its
home position.
Option:
A complete knock-off process is carried out by pressing the „Move in sprue knock device“ key.
Note:
The sprue knock device always starts a knock-off cycle if the respective start condition has been
met according to the program preselection.
Setting mode:
Option:
Press the „Next position“ control key (right key) to move the sprue knock device into the next
target position (single-step operation).
Press the „Home position“ control key (left key) to move the sprue knock device back to its
home position.
Option:
A complete knock-off process is carried out by pressing the „Move in sprue knock device“ key.
Note:
The sprue knock device always starts a knock-off cycle if the respective start condition has been
met according to the program preselection.
Automatic mode:
The sprue knock device always starts the preselected knock-off cycles if the respective start
condition has been met according to the program preselection.
Option:
The sprue knock device is started only if the „Move in sprue knock device“ key has been
pressed. The blue „Move in sprue knock device“ lamp indicates that a knock-off process can be
started.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 52 0515MC
Special programs
Operator station preselection
The selection parameters of the station to which the sprue knock device refers is listed in the
right pull down menu.
1st program preselection of the sprue knock device for clamping unit
CAUTION
If the present set value has been set to small there is a risk of the sprue knock device bumping
into the mould or the clamping platen!
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 53
Special programs
Start before Injection plunger - ejector back
If you have activated this program, the sprue knock device will move in before the „Injection
plunger ejector back“ movement. The cycle will be continued after the sprue knock device has
finished.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 54 0515MC
Special programs
Release parallel to mould table movement
If you have activated this program, the mould table movement is not locked during the knock-off
cycle. This program is required to gain some cycle time.
CAUTION
If the „Mould opened“ position has been set to small there is a risk of the sprue knock device
bumping into the lower mould and being damaged subsequently.
Blow out
If this program has been activated, blowing out is activated. Blowing off is started at the position
„Sprue knock device is in front position“. Now the „Delay time Move out sprue knock device“
starts running. After the time has elapsed the sprue knock device is moved out and blowing off
is finished..
Knock-off cycles
Here, the number of knock-off cycles is set which are to be carried out after the start of the
sprue knock device.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 55
Special programs
F15-ExtServoeinheit-Allgemein_01
In this menu, the parameters for the external servo unit can be set. The external servo unit can
be used for operation a mould shut-off nozzle or a core puller.
Enter the set values for the speeds in [mm/s] / [inch/s], the set values for the strokes in [mm] /
[inch], and the set values for the forces in [kN] / [shtn]. The respective maximum values can be
read off above the set value fields.
Limit switch monitoring for External servo unit is back (in front position)
This program selection activates the limit switch monitoring for "External servo unit is back (in
front position)". In addition, the position of the corresponding limit switch is displayed.
The limit switch "External servo unit is back (in front position)" may change its state only if a
movement of the external servo unit is triggered. If the state of a limit switch is not changed
during active movement, the monitoring reacts and the alarm "1139 External servo unit: Limit
switch monitoring" will be displayed. The response to this alarm is set under "Evaluation Limit
switch monitoring".
CAUTION
The program selections for limit switch monitoring are valid only for external servo units which
are operated via limit switches.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 56 0515MC
Special programs
Evaluation Limit switch monitoring
The setting of the error class refers to the alarm "1139 External servo unit: Limit switch
monitoring" The following settings are possible:
• Only alarm
• Cycle stop (at once)
• Cycle stop (at cycle end)
• Motor switch-off (at once)
• Motor switch-off (at cycle end)
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 57
Special programs
F15-ExtServoeinheit-Kernzugeinstellung_01
In this menu, core puller settings for the external servo unit can be specified. For this, the
external servo unit must be defined as core puller control (see chapter 15.10.4). The different
parameters are described in chapter 9 Core puller.
Core pullers via keys (in the manual and setting mode)
Switch mode without lockings (setting mode)
Description see chapter 9.1.2
Delay time, vibrating stroke, reference, block, 2nd movement ext. servo unit
Description see chapter 9.1.4
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 58 0515MC
Special programs
F15-ExtServoeinheit-Einrichten_01
Use this menu to preset the setting speed and the setting force for the external servo unit.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 59
Special programs
F15-ExtServoeinheit-Service_01
The basic settings of the external servo unit are specified in this menu.
NC counting inverted
Activate this program preselection if you wish to invert the direction of rotation of theexternal
servo unit.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 60 0515MC
Special programs
Referencing procedure
The reference point must be newly determined after having assembled the external servo unit.
Referencing is only possible in user level 20.
Procedure:
1. Specify the actually determined position of the external servo unit as the set value.
2. Activate function selection "Referencing".
Sensor interface
scale_rev
Number of motor rotations.
scale_unit
Example: Stroke External servo unit in 1/100 mm.
Take the two values from the technical data and enter them in the appropriate input field.
Example:
With 1000 motor rotations, the axis is moved by 60970 units (609.7 mm). This means, with one
revolution, the axis is moving by 0.6097 mm.
NOTE
The "NC counting inverted" program preselection and the parameters from the "Sensor
interface" can be changed only if the servo unit has been deactivated (Program preselection
"Off / Mould shut-off nozzle control / Core puller control" must be switched off). Re-
referencing is required after having changed one of these parameters.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 61
Special programs
F15-Waage_GB01
On the present page, you enter all the parameters required to operate the scale and you
may obtain all parameters returned by the scale. A basic distinction in made between the two
operating modes of the scale.
Manual mode
This mode is determined by the selection of the manual or the setting mode at the IMM and is
not explicitly selected on the present screen page. In the manual mode, the scale is activated
by a cyclical signal which enables permanent measuring. In addition, the following information
has to be observed. In the manual mode, the good / reject part display is inactive and no signal
will be sent to the robot. Although automatic taring can be selected, it will not be effective in the
manual mode.
Automatic mode
This mode is determined by the selection of the automatic mode at the IMM. In the automatic
mode, in case a robot is used, the scale is activated by a signal the robot sends to the scale.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 62 0515MC
Special programs
CAUTION
The following settings at the weigher are indispensable:
Mass unit: "g"
Baud rate: "1200 bauds"
Parity: "Odd"
Stop bits: "1 stop bit"
Operating mode: "Handshake Software"
Type of communication: "SBI"
Printing during weighing: "manually without stopping"
NOTE
These settings are the factory settings. They will also be activated by a reset to factory settings.
scale
Use this program preselection to activate the scale (Note that the scale has to be switched on
i.e. the mains plug has to be plugged in!). Besides this function, this program preselection is
used to acknowledge error conditions.
Taring
The taring function enables the zeroizing of the scale. This is necessary at regular intervals,
since the scale may indicate an incorrect value due to the ingress of dust, dirt or simply drift in
the course of time. This page provides different taring options, which differ by the IMM operating
modes (manual, automatic, etc.). The different taring modes are interlocked, i.e. manual taring ,
for example, is not possible in the automatic mode of the IMM. Please make sure that there are
no objects placed on the scale while the taring procedure is being carried out!
Manual taring
If the IMM runs in the manual or the setting mode, the scale can be zeroized at any time by
selecting the "Manual taring" field.
Automatic taring
The present taring function will predominantly be carried out in the automatic mode of the
IMM. At the end of the refresh time, after which the taring is to be repeated automatically, and
when the clamping unit opens, the taring procedure will be started. The time can be entered
under "Taring refresh time, but should, however, not exceed a maximum of 24 hours and not
undershoot a minimum of one hour.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 63
Special programs
Delay time Measurement
You can set the time (only active in the automatic mode of the IMM) which is to expire between
"Start Weighing" and the actual weighing procedure in this field. This time makes sense for the
following reason: when the injection moulding is placed on the scale, the scale needs a certain
time to reach a level position and to indicate a stable value. To give the scale the time required,
you can enter a delay value in this field. A suggested value cannot be provided since the level
out time of the scale depends on the scale type used. If the scale was set to "Printing during
weighing - manually after stopping", no "Delay time Measurement" must be set.
Weight
On the right of this field, the actual weight of the last injection moulding is displayed in green
writing. In the field on the right of the actual weight, you can enter the set value for your injection
moulding.
+/- tolerance
You can enter the tolerances for the monitoring of the set weight in this field.
Scale display
Here, the information of the scale display can be read, too.
Machine signals
"Scale ready" signal
The "Scale ready" signal will be set if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• Scale sends steady value
The "Scale ready" signal is deactivated using the positive edge of "Start Weighing".
NOTE
In the manual mode, the "Scale ready signal" is always set when weighing is not active.
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 64 0515MC
Special programs
"Reject part" signal
The signal will be set if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• Scale is ready
• Weight is outside the +/- tolerance
NOTE
If the "Weight" parameter has been entered in the QT, the +/- tolerances of the scale should be
equal to the +/- tolerances of the QT column, otherwise the coloured display in the QT does not
correspond to the reject part signal.
HB6GB15I
0515MC
Chapter 15 - 65
Special programs
HB6GB15I
Chapter 15 - 66 0515MC
Quality table
16 Quality table
F16-Qualitätstabelle-Übersicht_01
The quality table (QT) is designed for the evaluation of different machine parameters (maximum:
12, depending on the option) for quality assessment (Assessment of the injection moulds as
good or reject parts).
All set machine parameters of a shot are displayed graphically in the menu Quality table /
Overview. Additionally, the mean value (yellow) is displayed.
Values within the tolerance limits are shown in green. Values outside the prewarning range are
shown in magenta. Values outside the tolerance limits are shown in red.
NOTE
Use the "Quality table / Specifications" menu to configure the style of the bar view.
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 1
Quality table
F16-Qualitätstabelle-QT1-6_GB00
The quality table (QT) is designed for the evaluation of different machine parameters (maximum:
12, depending on the option) for quality assessment (Assessment of the injection moulds as
good or reject parts).
The actual values of the last 500 - 10,000 cycles (depending on the option) will be stored and
evaluated statistically in the quality table. Eight of these cycles will be depicted in the menu.
Monitoring
The "Evaluation" line will indicate whether an error message (good part, rejected part selection)
will be displayed if a recorded value is outside the set tolerance values. Activation of monitoring
is in the "Config. 1-6" and "Config. 7-12" menu.
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 2 0515MC
Quality table
Line No. and Shot rate
In the two columns on the left, the line number and the respective shot rate will be displayed in
the table (the last 10,000 cycles will be stored.)
Min. value
This line displays the minimum values (since the start of recording) for the respective actual
values in the entire ongoing process.
Max. value
In this line, the maximum values for the respective actual values of the entire process under way
will be displayed (maximum value since the beginning of the record).
Mean
This line displays the means of the last 200 stored actual values.
Xlat = Σ Xi / i
Xlat Mean
Xi Actual value
i Number of stored actual values (1..0.200)
Overall mean
In this line, the mean values of the complete active process are displayed. Every 200 machine
cycles the total mean value will be determined.
Xgeslat = Σ Xlat / m
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 3
Quality table
Standard dev.
The standard deviations for the last 200 stored actual values will be displayed in this line.
s = (xSQ / (n - 1))
xSQ = Σ (xi - xlat)2
xlat = Σ xi / i
Total errors
Displays the occurring tolerance errors (with "Evaluation" activated) for the complete ongoing
process.
Displayed parameters
Values within the tolerance limits are shown in green. Values outside the prewarning range are
shown in magenta. Values outside the tolerance limits are shown in red.
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 4 0515MC
Quality table
F16-Qualitätstabelle-Konfig1-6_GB00
Use the "Quality table configuration" menu to set the parameters for the quality table.
Use the Pull Down menus to select the machine parameters and set the corresponding set
values, tolerances, and prewarning limits. Parameters which are not available on this machine
will be shielded.
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 5
Quality table
011. Decompression after Metering Time
012. min. melt cushion
013. Change over volume
014. Volume at HP end
015. Peak value Injection pressure
016. Change over injection pressure
017. Peak value Melt pressure
018. Change over melt pressure
019.Peak value cavity pressure MASTER
020.Change-over cavity pressure MASTER
021.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 1
022.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 1
023.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 2
024.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 2
025.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 3
026.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 3
027.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 4
028.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 4
029.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 5
030.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 5
031.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 6
032.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 6
033.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 7
034.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 7
035.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 8
036.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 8
037.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 9
038.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 9
039.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 10
040.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 10
041.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 11
042.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 11
043.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 12
044.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 12
045.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 13
046.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 13
047.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 14
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 6 0515MC
Quality table
048. Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 14
049.Peak value cavity pressure SLAVE 15
050.Change-over cavity pressure SLAVE 15
051.Shot volume before injection
052. Integral Injection
053. Integral Metering
054. Vacuum unit Pressure
055. Vacuum unit Change-over stroke
056. Current time
057.MMQ
MMQ (monitoring of material quality) is an analysis tool for injection moulding in order to
be able to detect batch fluctuations in the material or material mixes (e.g. new material
mixed with regenerated material).
The "MMQ" value is determined from the energy, which is taken at the screw during
metering, and the metered melt volume. The metered melt volume result from the start to
the stop signal of the metering process, without decompression.
058.Scale weight
059.Metering piston forward Time
060.Peak value mould wall temperature MASTER
061.Change-over value Mould wall temperature MASTER
062.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 1
063.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 1
064.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 2
065.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 2
066.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 3
067.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 3
068.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 4
069.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 4
070.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 5
071.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 5
072.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 6
073.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 6
074.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 7
075.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 7
076.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 8
077.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 8
078.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 9
079.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 9
080.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 10
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 7
Quality table
081.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 10
082.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 11
083.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 11
084.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 12
085.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 12
086.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 13
087.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 13
088.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 14
089.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 14
090.Peak value mould wall temperature SLAVE 15
091.Change-over value Mould wall temperature SLAVE 15
092.Peak value Holding pressure
093.max.torque screw in
094.max.torque screw out
095.Screw in time
096.Screw out time
097..........
098..........
099..........
100. Melt temperature
101. Yoke temperature
102. Temperat. barrel zone 0.1
103. Temperat. barrel zone 0.2
104. Temper. barrel zone
105..........
106. Temperature Heater
107. Optional temperature control zone
108. Temperature Mould zone 1-41
109.Temperature Mould zone 42-65
110.Temperature Mould zone 66-96
111..........
112..........
113..........
114..........
115..........
116..........
117..........
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 8 0515MC
Quality table
118..........
119..........
120. Mould table ri (cw) Time
121. Mould table le (ccw) Time
122. Stat.ejector 1 back Time
123. Stat.ejector 1 forward Time
124. Stat.ejector 2 back Time
125. Stat.ejector 2 forward Time
126. Stat.ejector 3 back Time
127. Stat.ejector 3 forward Time
128.Cellmould 1 fluid flow rate / cycl
129.Cellmould 2 fluid flow rate / cycl
130.Flow figure
131.Stroke holding pressure (= stroke change-over to holding pressure - stroke holding
pressure end)
132.Max. back pressure metering
133.Max. stroke metering
134..........
135..........
136..........
137..........
138..........
139..........
140.Ext.injection unit A: Filling time
141.Ext.injection unit B: Filling time
142.Ext. injection unit C: Filling time
143.Ext.injection unit A: Metering time
144.Ext.injection unit B: Metering time
145.Ext. injection unit C: Metering time
146..........
147..........
148..........
149..........
150.QS of robot 1 (see also chapter 10.1.5)
151.QS of robot 2 (see also chapter 10.1.5)
152..........
153..........
154..........
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 9
Quality table
155..........
156..........
157..........
158..........
159..........
160.QS from external device
161.Total energy per cycle
162..........
163..........
164..........
165..........
Zone
Entry of the zone number additionally to the machine parameter.
Example: Setting of barrel heating zone 1
034. Temper. barrel zone zone 1
Parameter record
Enter the record number of the injection parameter additionally to the machine parameter, if the
machine is equipped with the option injection parameter records.
0 The set machine parameter is recored independent of the injection parameter record of
each machine cycle.
1 Injection parameter record 1
2 Injection parameter record 2
When selecting injection parameter records 1 or 2, only the values of the currently
activated injection parameter record will be entered in the quality table, i. e. there will be
blank lines in the quality table if the other injection parameter record is active at present.
Injection unit
In the case of a multicolour machine, the injection unit is entered additionally to the machine
parameter.
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 10 0515MC
Quality table
Monitoring
In the program preselection fields of the "Monitoring" line, choose whether an error message
(good part, reject part selection) will be displayed if one of the recorded values is outside the set
tolerance values.
off No monitoring active
Reject parts Reject part if tolerance has been exceeded
Demoulding blocked No demoulding and reject part if tolerance has been exceeded
Only alarm Only alarm display if tolerance has been exceeded (the part is not
considered as reject part)
set value
Enter into this line the required set values for the respective parameters .
+ Tolerance
In this line you specify by how many shots the set value may be exceeded. If one of the values
is outside this tolerance, this will be indicated in red. On the printout of the quality table, a "+"
can be found on the right of the actual value if one value is outside this tolerance.
- Tolerance
In this line you specify by how many shots the set value may be fallen short of. If one of the
values is outside this tolerance, this will be indicated in red. On the printout of the quality table, a
"-" can be found on the right of the actual value if one value is outside this tolerance.
+ Prewarning %
In this line you specify by how many per cent of the "+Tolerance" the set value may be
exceeded to trigger a prewarning. If one of the values is outside this prewarning range, this will
be indicated in magenta. On the printout of the quality table, a ">" can be found on the right of
the actual value if one value is outside this prewarning range.
Example: When entering a "+ Tolerance" of 10.0 and a "+ Prewarn." of 50.0 %, the Error
Prewarning will be displayed if the set value has been exceeded by 5.0.
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 11
Quality table
- Prewarning %
In this line you specify by how many per cent of the "- Tolerance" the set value may be fallen
short of to trigger a prewarning. If one of the values is outside this prewarning range, this will be
indicated in magenta. On the printout of the quality table, a "<" can be found on the right of the
actual value if one value is outside this prewarning range.
CAUTION
Reset is carried out only when triggering the quality table, i.e. in the automatic mode when the
next values are entered into the quality table.
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 12 0515MC
Quality table
F16-Qualitätstabelle-Trend1-6_GB00
The last 200 actual values (from the quality table) will be displayed graphically in the trend
diagrams as a trend curve.
The curves of the trend diagrams 1-12 correspond to the columns 1-12 of the quality table.
The respective parameters of each trend depiction are located above the diagrams.
x-min. / x-max.
In this field you select the automatic or the manual adjustment of the display range of the trend
diagrams. We recommend to activate the automatic adjustment since the optimum display
range will be set and determined.
If values are entered for "x-min" and "x-max", the X axis is scaled according to these values.
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 13
Quality table
CAUTION
Entering "x-min" and "x-max" of "0" activates the automatic setting of the display area.
The value for "x-max." must be greater than the value for "x-min" since otherwise the automatic
setting of the display area is activated.
Diagram representation
The trend curves (actual values from the quality table) are shown in green and the tolerances in
red. The actual value of the adjusted QT parameter is applied to the X-axis and the respective
shot number will be depicted on the Y-axis.
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 14 0515MC
Quality table
F16-Qualitätstabelle-Vorgaben_00
Quality standards
An activation of the "Set quality standards" button in the "Config. 1-6" and "Config. 7-12" menu
will automatically set the quality standards (set value, +/-tolerance and +/- prewarning) of all 12
columns. The required factor and specification for the prewarning are entered here.
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 15
Quality table
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 16 0515MC
Quality table
The SPC chart function evaluates the preselected actual values from the columns of the quality
table (QT) for process parameter control cards.
The calculated statistics will be graphically depicted in this menu. Data for the last 25 random
samples will be displayed.
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 17
Quality table
Quality control card for the mean value (upper left)
The course of the mean random sample values for the individual random samples is recorded
on this control card.
Formulae:
Mean: Xlat = (x1 + x2 + ...x-n) / n
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 18 0515MC
Quality table
Distribution (upper right)
The standard distribution of the mean random sample values are depicted in a bar diagram. The
range between the upper (UAL) - and the lower action limit (LAL) will be divided into 8 sections.
The frequency of the individual mean random sampling values being within these ranges will be
shown by means of bars.
The distribution field indicates whether the present distribution is a Gaussian distribution (Gauß,
mathematician).
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 19
Quality table
Quality control card for the standard deviation (lower left)
The progression of the standard deviations for the last 25 random samples is recorded on this
control card. In addition, the resulting mean and the upper action limit for the standard deviation
are also shown.
Formulae:
Standard deviation: S = ((S(Xi - Xlat)2) / n - 1)
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 20 0515MC
Quality table
Quality control card for Range (lower right)
The course of the difference between maximum and minimum value (Range) of the last 25
random samples is recorded on this control card.
Formulae:
Range R = xmax - xmin
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 21
Quality table
Footer
The process capability indices "CP" and "CPK" will be shown in the menu’s footer.
CP
The CP value defines the process capability. It is calculated from the last 25 means.
Formulae:
CP = (UT - LT) / (6 * SS)
with
SS = Rlat / d2
CPK
The CPK value defines the process’ position relative to the tolerance limit. It also is calculated
from the last 25 mean values.
Formulae:
CPK = Zcrit / 3
with
Zcrit = (UT - MVlat) / SS
or
Zcrit = (MVlat - LT) / SS
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 22 0515MC
Quality table
Y axis automat.
In this field you select the automatic or the manual adjustment of the display range of the SPC
charts. We recommend to activate the automatic adjustment since the optimum display range
will be set and determined.
If the selection has been activated, you can set the Y axes of the respective SPC chart.
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 23
Quality table
Table of constants used in the calculations:
n A2 d2 D4 B4
2 1,880 1,128 3,267 3,267
3 1,023 1,693 2,574 2,568
4 0,729 2,059 2,282 2,266
5 0,577 2,326 2,114 2,089
6 0,483 2,534 2,004 1,970
7 0,419 2,704 1,924 1,882
8 0,373 2,847 1,864 1,815
9 0,337 2,970 1,816 1,761
10 0,308 3,078 1,777 1,716
11 0,285 3,173 1,744 1,679
12 0,266 3,258 1,717 1,646
13 0,249 3,336 1,693 1,618
14 0,235 3,407 1,672 1,594
15 0,223 3,472 1,653 1,572
16 0,212 3,532 1,637 1,552
17 0,203 3,588 1,622 1,534
18 0,194 3,640 1,608 1,518
19 0,187 3,689 1,597 1,503
20 0,180 3,735 1,585 1,490
21 0,173 3,778 1,575 1,477
22 0,167 3,819 1,566 1,466
23 0,162 3,858 1,557 1,455
24 0,157 3,895 1,548 1,445
25 0,153 3,931 1,541 1,435
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 24 0515MC
Quality table
F16-SPC Chart-Konfiguration_GB02
Interval
Enter the cycle number after which a random sample is taken in this field.
Minimum: 3.
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 25
Quality table
Random sampling depth
Enter the number of cycles to be taken into account for the random samples in this field.
Input range: 2 to 25.
CAUTION
The random sampling depth must not exceed the entered interval.
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 26 0515MC
Quality table
F16-SPC Chart-Vorgaben_GB00
Quality standards
An activation of the "Set quality standards" button in the "SPC chart / Configuration" menu will
automatically set the quality standards (upper/lower tolerance, interval and random sampling
depth) of all 12 SPC charts. The required factor and specification for Interval / Random sampling
depth are entered here.
HB6GB16I
0515MC
Chapter 16 - 27
Quality table
HB6GB16I
Chapter 16 - 28 0515MC
Actual value graphics
F17-Istwertgrafik-Anzeige_01
The actual value graphics is used to record machine parameters during the injection and
holding pressure phase. The machine parameters are set in the menu "Configuration". Up to 16
curves (according to the option) can be displayed.
You can have the current data displayed by means of the measuring cursor (vertical black short-
dash line). The measuring cursor values are displayed below the actual value graphics.
Left diagram
The course of the injection phase (left diagram) will be entered on the stroke axis (shot volume).
The value in the lower left specifies the beginning of the injection procedure; the value on its
right shows the volume for the change over to holding pressure time.
HB6GB17F
0114WT
Chapter 17 - 1
Actual value graphics
Right diagram
The course of the holding pressure phase (right diagram) is represented on a time axis.
The holding pressure time, starting with 0 (change-over time) until the end of the holding
pressure procedure is represented on the "X axis".
HB6GB17F
Chapter 17 - 2 0114WT
Actual value graphics
F17-Istwertgrafik-Konfiguration_01
The menu "Actual value graphics Configuration" is used to set the machine parameters for
recordings in the actual value graphics.
Select the machine parameters via the Pull Down menus and set the corresponding maximum
value (Ymax) for the display in the graphcis.
HB6GB17F
0114WT
Chapter 17 - 3
Actual value graphics
Parameters for the actual value graphics and the envelope
00. Volume flow (injection speed)
01. Volume
02. Injection pressure (for a controlled injection unit)
03. Melt pressure (option)
04. Cavity pressure MASTER (option)
05. Cavity pressure SLAVE 1 (option)
06. Cavity pressure SLAVE 2 (option)
07. Cavity pressure SLAVE 3 (option)
08. Cavity pressure SLAVE 4 (option)
09. Cavity pressure SLAVE 5 (option)
10. Cavity pressure SLAVE 6 (option)
11. Cavity pressure SLAVE 7 (option)
12. Clamping force (option)
13. Airmould / Aquamould pressure 1 (option)
14. Airmould / Aquamould pressure 2 (option)
15. Airmould / Aquamould pressure 3 (option)
16. Airmould / Aquamould pressure 4 (option)
17. Airmould / Aquamould pressure 5 (option)
18. Airmould / Aquamould pressure 6 (option)
19. Airmould / Aquamould pressure 7 (option)
20. Airmould / Aquamould pressure 8 (option)
21.Cellmould pressure 1 (option)
22.Cellmould pressure 2 (option)
23..........
24..........
25..........
26..........
27. System pressure pump system 1
28. System pressure pump system 2 (option)
29. System pressure pump system 3 (option)
30. System pressure pump system 4 (option)
31.Mould wall temperature MASTER
32.Mould wall temperature SLAVE 1
33.Mould wall temperature SLAVE 2
34.Mould wall temperature SLAVE 3
35.Mould wall temperature SLAVE 4
36.Mould wall temperature SLAVE 5
HB6GB17F
Chapter 17 - 4 0114WT
Actual value graphics
37.Mould wall temperature SLAVE 6
38.Mould wall temperature SLAVE 7
39........
CAUTION
All parameters are displayed. Option-dependent parameters are recorded only if the option is
avalable, too.
HB6GB17F
0114WT
Chapter 17 - 5
Actual value graphics
17.2 Envelope
17.2.1 Envelope / Display
F17-Hüllkurve-Anzeige_01
In this menu, you may monitor one of the characteristics of injection within tolerance. The
respective curve must be have selected beforehand using the "Configuration" menu. The
characteristics is only recorded in this display. If the envelope monitoring is activated, the
characteristics will be recorded no matter which screen page is currently displayed. Up to eight
envelopes (according to the option) are available and can be selected via the Pull Down menu
in the upper right part of the picture.
The change over moment will be marked by a cyan vertical line.
You can have the current data displayed by means of the measuring cursor (vertical black short-
dash line). The buttons for shifting are displayed below the diagram. A clilck on the diagram can
also shirt the measuring cursor position.
The red arrow above the diagram shows the first envelope error of the respective injection
process.
CAUTION
The family of curves is deleted when changing over from an envelope to another or when
recording the ideal curve..
HB6GB17F
Chapter 17 - 6 0114WT
Actual value graphics
Measuring cursor values - actual curve
The actual value of the selected characteristics and the current measuring cursor position will
be output in this field.
CAUTION
An activation of this button also delete all families of curves on "Envelopes / Overview".
HB6GB17F
0114WT
Chapter 17 - 7
Actual value graphics
F17-Hüllkurve-Konfiguration_02
In this menu, the value to be monitored will be adjusted for the desired envelope via the Pull
Down menu. The same machine parameters as in the actual value graphics can be preselected.
An overview of the parameters can be read up in chapter "17.1.2 Actual value graphics /
Configuration".
HB6GB17F
Chapter 17 - 8 0114WT
Actual value graphics
Injection parameter record monitoring
In case there are several injection parameter records available (option), you may select the
injection parameter record you want to start the injection monitoring with in this field.
CAUTION
The selected injection unit and the selected injection parameter record is shown above the
envelope diagram.
Envelope monitoring
In case you select this field, an error message will be generated if, during an injection process,
the actual curve is outside the envelope range. This will also be indicated by a red arrow above
the diagram (position of red arrow = first envelope error of the respective injection process).
CAUTION
It is not necessary that the envelope covers the complete course of the recorded characteristics.
It is also possible to monitor a part of the segment. This will be set via the entries "Start and stop
of monitoring".
Family of curves
If you have selected this field, the actual curves of the last 100 cycles will still be represented.
If this field is deactivated, the actual curve will be freshly drawn for each shot.
CAUTION
Do not leave the envelope picture to record a family of curves since the characteristics will be
recorded only if you are in this picture.
Upper Tolerance
Use this field to adjust the upper distance to the set curve.
HB6GB17F
0114WT
Chapter 17 - 9
Actual value graphics
Lower Tolerance
Use this field to adjust the lower distance to the set curve.
Delay Record
The recording of the envelope starts at the time preset in this field, after the injection procedure
has been started. If the present delay time is changed, this will not influence the recording time.
At the end of the delay time, the recording will be started, i.e. the delay will be added to the
recording time.
Recording time
The time for the recording is determined in this field.
CAUTION
The recording time may be some tenths of a second longer than the set time.
On the upper left of the diagram, the desired range of the Y-axis has to be determined for the
curve.
Start monitoring
Stop monitoring
Here, the start time (stop time) for the envelope monitoring is determined. This start value
(stop value) can be entered or accepted. The values are accepted by means of the buttons
"Acceptance start / Stop monitoring" on the envelope page.
HB6GB17F
Chapter 17 - 10 0114WT
Actual value graphics
F17-Hüllkurve-Übersicht_01
This menu shows an overview of the envelopes which can be selected via the Pull Down menu
in the upper right part of the picture.
HB6GB17F
0114WT
Chapter 17 - 11
Actual value graphics
HB6GB17F
Chapter 17 - 12 0114WT
Production data
18 Production data
F18-Produktionsdaten-Seite1_GB03
In this menu you enter the data essential to the production (e.g. machine no.).
In addition, separate parts counters for good parts, unfinished parts (which still are to be
produced) and for reject parts (reject) may be found here. You may enter the number of good
parts required as set value.
If the program "Number of parts - GOOD" (in the Monitorings / Page 3 menu) is switched on, the
control system will automatically switch off the drive at the end of the cycle if the set number of
parts has been reached.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 1
Production data
Mould cavity number
Enter the number of mould cavities of the mould. This figure multiplied by the number of cycles
is the total number of parts.
Shot number
Current total number of injection moulds (good parts + reject parts).
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 2 0115MC
Production data
Reset parts counter
Select this field to reset all counters to 0. After resetting the counter, the program will
automatically be switched off.
CAUTION
The quality table will also be reset (see chapter 16) during a parts counter reset.
Shot weight
To be able to calculate the material consumption, the shot weight has to be entered in this field.
CAUTION
The values for "Shot weight" and "Expected material consumption" refer to the injection unit.
with h/d
Specify the planned production time for a day in hours (example: with production time 08:30
per day you must specify 8.50 h/d). By means of this input calculation is made in which days.
hours:minutes (dd.hh:mm) production will be finished.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 3
Production data
F18-Produktionsdaten-Seite2_03
Order no.
The job number entered here is printed in the header of the printouts (see chapter 27) for
information purposes.
Article no.
Material no.
Staff ID
Machine no.
Mould no.
Barrel no.
Gripper no.
Enter the respective material number in this field.
Note
Enter your notes in this field. There are two lines available with 30 characters each.
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 4 0115MC
Production data
Notepad
This field displays the note of the notepad. Press the button "To to -> edit notepad" to change
into the "Notepad" menu (see chapter 21.2).
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 5
Production data
F18-Produktionsdaten-Seite3_01
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 6 0115MC
Production data
F18-Produktionsdaten-Großansicht_01
In this menu the number of GOOD parts and the cycle time is displayed in large scale view.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 7
Production data
18.2 Times
18.2.1 Times / Page 1
F18-Zeiten-Seite1_02
CAUTION
The values in the menu are a summary of the delay times, change over time and the cooling
time. Changes concerning these entries will be transferred to the respective menus.
Cycle time
Display of the current cycle time in [s]. The cycle part-times are measured without taking into
account the delay times, i.e. total of all part times + total of all delay times = cycle time.
Closing time
Display of the current closing time in [s]. The closing time will be measured from "Start Close" to
"End Pressure build-up".
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 8 0115MC
Production data
Delay Injection unit forward
Enter the delay for the forward movement of the injection unit in [s]. (see also chapter 4).
Delay Injection
Enter the delay for the injection in [s] in this field. (see also chapter 5).
Filling time
Display of the current filling time in [s]. The filling time will be measured from "Start Injection" to
"Change over to holding pressure".
Metering time
Display of the current metering time in [s]. The metering time will be measured from melt
cushion or "Decompression before Metering Volume End" to "Shot volume reached" (depending
on the "Decompression before metering" program).
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 9
Production data
Cooling time
Enter the cooling time in [s] in this field. (see also chapter 6).
Opening time
Display of the current opening time in [s]. The opening time will be measured from "Start Open"
to "Mould open".
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 10 0115MC
Production data
F18-Zeiten-WerkzeugStation_01
CAUTION
(only for vertical machines)
The values from the menu are a summary of the delay times. Changes concerning these entries
will be transferred to the respective menus.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 11
Production data
Delay Station ejector 1-3 forward
Enter the delay for the forward movement of the station ejector in [s].
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 12 0115MC
Production data
F18-Zeiten-Entformung_01
Robot 1 (2, 3, 4, 5)
Demoulding
Insertion
Display of the current demoulding time (insertion time) of robot 1 (2, 3, 4, 5) in [s]. The time is
measured from Start robot to robot in home position and finished.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 13
Production data
F18-Überwachungen-Seite1_02
CAUTION
These monitoring functions are only effective in the automatic mode.
You may monitor the times for the total cycle and the "Close", "Open", "Injection", and
"Metering" movements as well as some other movements.
The monitoring starts with the switching on of the respective program in the automatic
mode. You have to enter set values for the monitored procedures. If the set values are being
exceeded, an error message will be triggered and the machine will be switched off immediately
or when reaching Cycle End (depending on the program preselection).
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 14 0115MC
Production data
Cycle time
Enter the cycle time in [s] in this field. Complete machine cycle time of the previous cycle. The
cycle part-times are measured without taking into account the delay times, i.e. total of all part
times + total of all delay times = cycle time.
Closing time
Enter the monitoring time within which the clamping procedure from "Start Close" to "End
Pressure build-up" in [s] has to be finished in this field.
filling time
Enter the filling time in [s] in this field. From "Start Injection" to "Change over to holding
pressure".
Metering time
Enter the metering time in [s] in this field. From melt cushion or "Decompression before
Metering Volume End" to "Shot volume reached" (depending on the "Decompression before
metering" program).
Opening time
Enter the opening time in [s] in this field. From "Start Open" to "Mould opened".
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 15
Production data
F18-Überwachungen-Seite2_02
Number of parts - GOOD
Enter the number of good parts required in this field. If the program is started the machine
switches off after reaching the " Number of parts - GOOD".
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 16 0115MC
Production data
Switch-off Heater for Motor Stop
Select this field if the complete heating unit (barrel heating, mould heating, temperature control
units) is to be switched off when the motor comes to a standstill.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 17
Production data
Cycle stop during slave change-over (at once) / (at cycle end)
Select the corresponding field if the slave change-over is to stop the cycle at once or at the end
of the cycle. The machine is not switched ofg. Additionally, the alarm is displayed. After having
pressed Cycle start (closing key), the cycle is continued.
Motor switch-off during slave change-over (at once) / (at cycle end)
Select the corresponding field if the slave change-over is to switch off the machine at once or at
the end of the cycle. Additionally, the alarm is displayed.
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 18 0115MC
Production data
Cycle stop during envelope monitoring (at once)
Select this field if the envelope monitoring is to stop the cycle immediately. The machine is not
switched ofg. Additionally, the alarm is displayed. The cycle cannot be continued with cycle start.
Motor switch-off during envelope monitoring (at once) / (at cycle end)
Select the corresponding field if the envelope monitoring is to switch off the machine at once or
at the end of the cycle. Additionally, the alarm is displayed.
Change over to holding pressure without holding pressure during envelope monitoring
If change over to holding pressure without holding pressure is to be carried out during envelope
monitoring, this field must be selected.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 19
Production data
F18-Überwachungen-WerkzeugStation_02
CAUTION
(only for vertical machines)
These monitoring functions are only effective in the automatic mode.
You can monitor the times for the mould table and the station ejectors 1 to 3.
The monitoring starts with the switching on of the respective program in the automatic
mode. You have to enter set values for the monitored procedures. If the set values are being
exceeded, an error message will be triggered and the machine will be switched off immediately
or when reaching Cycle End (depending on the program preselection).
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 20 0115MC
Production data
Station ejector 1-3 forward Time
Enter the motion time for the forward movement of the station ejector in [s]. From "Start Ejector
forward" to "Ejector is in front position".
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 21
Production data
F18-Überwachungen-Entformung_01
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 22 0115MC
Production data
Function of the maximum demoulding time monitoring:
Monitoring of the maximum demoulding time is ended as soon as the station ejector for this
lower mould is started and leaves its home position. Optionally, the maximum demoulding time
can be ended as soon as the ejector has reached its "front" position.
Exceeding the desired value will generate an alarm message and the "Reject part" robot signal
will be activated.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 23
Production data
F18-ZykluszeitAnalyse-Analyse1_01
32 times for the cycle time analysis can be selected. For the selection refer to configuration
menu 1 or 2.
The time of the last cycle, the current time and the ideal cycle time are displayed. The graphics
shows a complete cycle. The selected partial times are displayed in the graphics in time.
Additionally, vertical orange lines are displayed in the bar which show the events of the different
axes.
CAUTION
The complete movement of an axis is displayed.
Ex.:
Closing is displayed including clamping force build-up. This is why the bar display is different
compared with the closing time shown in the menu "Production data / Times". The start of the
clamping force build-up is shown by means of a vertical orange line in the bar.
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 24 0115MC
Production data
Event display in the bars (vertical orange line):
Closing: Start Clamping force build-up
Opening: Clamping force reduced:
Injection unit forward: Start of nozzle contact force build-up
Injection (incl. holding pressure) Start of holding pressure
MicroPower: Melt flow front has reached the mould
(Start of the actual filling phase)
Cooling time: Start cooling time of the other injection assemblies
(only for multicolour machine)
Metering: Start metering (if decompression before metering is
activated) and start decompression after metering (if
activated).
Injection plunger back (MicroPower): Start of the material transfer boring
Metering piston forward (MicroPower): Material transferred to the injection plunger
Metering piston metering (MicroPower): Metering end reached
Robot: Release clamping, release mould table, and mould
area free
Operation Cycle start: With magnetic safety gate locking, the time of locking
force reduced (safety gate can be opened) will be
displayed.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 25
Production data
F18-ZykluszeitAnalyse-Konfiguration1_01
In these two menus, the times for the cycle time analysis are selected. First, select the wished
axis in the left pull down menu. Now, select the wished time of the axis in the right pull down
menu. By activating the program preselection, the selected time is represented in the cycle time
analysis.
NOTE
The „Injection plunger 1 (2, 3)“ selection corresponds to the injection plungers of injection unit A
(B, C).
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 26 0115MC
Production data
F18-Energieanzeige_GB02
The headline displays the kind of energy consumption which will be calculated.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 27
Production data
Number of cycles for calculating the average energy consumption
The calculation of the average energy consumption will require a number of machine cycles
which can here be specified. The higher the here set number of cycles, the more relevant will
the average energy consumption be.
Note
Changing the "Number of cycles for calculating the average energy consumption" will reset the
average energy consumption "per cycle", "per hour", and "per kg of material" and the calculation
will be started again.
After a restart of the machine and the heating, a relevant result of the average energy
consumption will be given only after approx. 0.5 to 1 hour in a constant cycle. Only at the end
of this time can be assumed that the barrel is evenly heated and the power consumption of the
barrel heating will be constant.
When selecting the "Energy display reset" function, the current time is taken as the reset time
and "Cycles after Reset" and "Total energy after Reset" are set to 0. Recording will be started
anew.
NOTE
The power of the individual zones (heater bands, heating elements) must be specified for the
calculation of the heating energy consumption (when calculation is made via power supply
module). These power values will be specified in the "Barrel heating / Controller values" menu
(see chapter 2.1.2) and in the "Mould heating / Controller values" (see chapter 2.2.4).
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 28 0115MC
Production data
F18-Anfahrprogramme_02
In this menu, you can activate pre-defined production data for a certain period of time
(depending on cycle / time).
NOTE
In the meny "Media Centre / Status bar / Page 3", a symbol for direct image change to this
menu can be set in the status bar (see chapter 21).
deactivated
In general, the start-up program is deactivated.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 29
Production data
Start-up reject cycles
During the start-up reject cycles, production is carried out with the second injection parameter
record. The program is only active until the start-up reject sequence are ended for the first time.
After having reached the start-up reject cycles, a change-over to the production parameter
record (parameter record which was allocated to the respective lower mould) will be made in
general.
Combined with "Hot runner start-up circuit" and "Defined reject cycles", the start-up reject
sequence can be finished before reaching the start-up reject cycles (if the production
temperatures were reached).
deactivated
In general, the restart program is deactivated.
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 30 0115MC
Production data
Defined reject cycles with start-up circuit hot runner (option)
After having exceeded the cycle time, the "Start-up circuit hot runner" program is started again
(see present cahpter "Start-up circuit hot runner - defined reject cycles").
This program is only possible in combination with the "Start-up circuit hot runner" option and the
activated "Start-up circuit with defined reject cycles" program.
Cycle time
After having exceeded the preselected cycle time, the respective restart program becomes
active unless the restart sequence has been started.
Optionally, the cycle time an also be evaluated during the restart sequence. In this case, the
reject cycles are permanently corrected.
CAUTION
Variothermal process control (option) and hot runner start-up circuit cannot be used in parallel
since the temperature entry „Set 2“ is used for both options. If the variothermal process control
is activated, the hot runner start-up circuit is automatically deactivated.
NOTE
In the meny "Media Centre / Status bar / Page 3", a symbol for direct image change to this
menu can be set in the status bar (see chapter 21).
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 31
Production data
Time-dependent (option)
Activate this program and enter a time. After having reached the adjusted time, a change-over
from the hot runner start temperature (Set 2) to the production temperature will be made. In the
automatic mode, the machine continues to produce reject parts until the production temperature
will be reached.
After having reached the maximum start-up reject cycles, a change-over to the production
temperature will be made in general.
In all operating modes, you can switch on and off the start-up circuit alway by means of the
control keys.
You can activate the time-dependent start-up circuit by means of a defined manual console key
(option).
The preselected produciton temperature must be reached in order to activate the start-up circuit.
This means that the hot runner must not be in the learning mode, soft start (start-up circuit) and
not without the minus tolerance.
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 32 0115MC
Production data
F18-Prozesskontrolle-PRIAMUS_GB00-Prozesskontrolle-PRIAMUS_00
The PRIAMUS BlueLine system is a decentralized measuring and control system with modular
structure which can be used for the process control of Plastics injection moulding machines.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 33
Production data
Signal "Finish holding pressure B (EndHold2)" ... Signal for injection unit B
Signal "Finish holding pressure C (EndHold3)" ... Signal for injection unit C
The real-time switching signal EndHold1 (2, 3) is used to inform the injection moulding machine
to finish the holding pressure A (B, C).
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 34 0115MC
Production data
Signal "Software controller active (ControlOn)"
The ControlOn signal is used to inform the injection moulding machine of the software
controller. With this, the machine can recognise whether the Priamus system controls machine
parameters, hot runner temperatures, or shut-off nozzles. If the signal is LOW, alarm "1043
external change over to holding pressure equipment: error" will be sent.
Machine signals
Signals transferred from the injection moulding machine to the Priamus BlueLine system.
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 35
Production data
Signal "End of holding pressure A, cooling time (EndHold1)"
Signal "End of holding pressure B, cooling time (EndHold2)" ... Signal from injection unit B
Signal "End of holding pressure C, cooling time (EndHold3)" ... Signal from injection unit C
With the EndHold1 (2, 3) input signal, the injection moulding machine informs the Priamus
BlueLine system that the holding pressure phase has been ended and the produced part is
currently cooling down.
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 36 0115MC
Production data
F18-Prozesskontrolle-PRIAMUSKonfig_GB00
HB6GB18I
0115MC
Chapter 18 - 37
Production data
Reject part in case of 'Warn1/Warn2'
If the signal Warn1 or Warn2 is given, the part is counted as reject part.
Cycle stop in case of 'Warn1/Warn2' (at cycle end)
If the signal Warn1 or Warn2 is given, the machine is stopped at the end of the cycle.
HB6GB18I
Chapter 18 - 38 0115MC
Help
20 Help
20.1 Manual
20.1.1 Manual 1 / 2
F20-Hilfe-Handbuch-Handbuch 2_01
The manual can be read on the help page. Furthermore, the hydraulic plan, the wiring diagram
and the parts list of the machine are on this page.
For reading a chapter of the manual, just activate the wished chapter under selection. The
selected chapter is automatically opened. If you want to change to another chapter, activate
selection again.
HB6GB20B
0114WT
Chapter 20 - 1
Help
20.2 Manual
20.2.1 Miscellaneous / Selection
F20-Hilfe-Verschiedenes_01
PDF files can be read on the "Miscellaneous" help page. Select the data carrier. Clicking on the
file name will automatically call the PDF file.
With the function „Copy file“ is the currently selected PDF document is stored in internal
memory or on other drives.
With the function „delete file“ is the currently selected PDF document to be deleted from the
internal memory or from other drives.
HB6GB20B
Chapter 20 - 2 0114WT
Media centre
21 Media centre
F21-Statusbalken-Seite1_04
In the status bar, the states, strokes of the axes and other states of the machine will be
displayed. Three configurable status bars are available. An activation of tabs 1-3 in the lower
part of the status bar will change over the 3 status bars.
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 1
Media centre
Deleting statuses
Procedure:
• Press the delete button. The delete button is in the lower right part of the picture.
• The delete button is marked with a red frame.
• Delete the wished status from the status bar by clicking on it.
CAUTION
The configured status bars can be stored and loaded (see data records, chapter 25).
init
Press this button to reinitialise all status bars. If changes to the status bar depending on the
software were made, the bar must be reinitialised in order to adopt the changes. The status
bars already created will be deleted during this procedure. Initialising of the status bars is only
enabled in user level 15 (customer service IT level).
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 2 0115MC
Media centre
Clamping unit
Mould is opened (green colour)
CAUTION
A vertical clamping unit is represented by a vertical symbol.
In addition, the current stroke of the clamping unit is displayed.
Ejector
Ejector is back (green colour)
CAUTION
The upper parts ejector of vertical machines is represented by a vertical symbol.
In addition, the current stroke of the ejector is displayed.
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 3
Media centre
Station ejector
Additionally, the number and the current stroke of the station ejector are displayed.
Injection unit
CAUTION
A vertical injection unit is represented by a vertical symbol.
The left arrow indicates the metering piston status and the right arrow indicates the metering
screw status. In addition, the current metering volume of the metering piston is displayed.
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 4 0115MC
Media centre
injection piston
Metering is active
CAUTION
A vertical injection unit is represented by a vertical symbol.
Symbol of the MicroPower injection unit
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 5
Media centre
Core pullers (option)
Core puller is moved out (green colour) and valve remains triggered
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 6 0115MC
Media centre
Screw-off unit status (option)
Screw-off unit is screwed out (yellow colour) and valve remains triggered
Rotary unit is on the left (green colour) and valve remains triggered
Rotary unit is on the right (yellow colour) and valve remains triggered
The status of the “External rotary unit” is indicated by the plug symbol.
The status of "Rotary unit (hydraulic)" is marked with "1".
The status of "Rotary unit servoelectric" is marked with "2"
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 7
Media centre
Tandem Mould (Option)
LM2 locked and clamping unit open (the injection moulding in the mould half is shown in
red)
LM1 locked and clamping unit open (the injection moulding in the mould half is shown in
red)
Additionally, the active mould half (LM1 or LM2) and the active injection parameter record are
displayed.
The left arrow indicates the mould table status and the right arrow indicates the status of the
mould table index. In addition, the current lower mould which is in the injection station will be
displayed.
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 8 0115MC
Media centre
Status Mould table (Sliding table)
The upper arrow indicates the mould table status and the left bottom arrow indicates the status
of the mould table index. In addition, the current lower mould which is in the injection station will
be displayed.
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 9
Media centre
Barrel and mould heating, temperature control zones
The red T shows the status of the heating circuits, the blue T the status of the cooling circuits
and the magenta T shows the status of the monitoring circuits.
Barrel heating on by means of weekly time switch and temperature outside the tolerance
CAUTION
No tolerances will be requested)
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 10 0115MC
Media centre
F21-Statusbalken-Seite2_04
Production data
In this region, you can, for instance, select the following statuses:
Number of units:
Display of the number of good and remaining parts (also refer to chapter 18).
Remaining production:
Display of the remaining production time and the expected material consumption (also refer to
chapter 18).
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 11
Media centre
Pressures:
Display of the current injection, melt, and cavity pressure (option).
Times:
Display of the motion times of the individual axes.
Drive Stop
In the lower part of the status, the following partial times are displayed:
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 12 0115MC
Media centre
Working data:
Display of the total shot number in automatic mode and of the total operating hours of the
machine since the first starting up.
Parameter record:
If the machine is equipped with several injection parameter records, here the currently active
parameter record of injection unit A (B, C) is displayed. The change over between parameter
records always takes place after Holding pressure End.
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 13
Media centre
F21-Statusbalken-Seite3_06
Pump system
In this region, you can, for instance, select the following statuses:
Pump system 1 - 4:
Display of the current oil temperature and the current hydraulic pressure of the respective pump
system.
Hydraulic accumulator 1:
Display of the current hydraulic accumulator pressure and of the hydraulic accumulator status.
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 14 0115MC
Media centre
Shut-off nozzle (option):
Display of the shut-off nozzle status (also refer to shut-off nozzle and pressure mould, chapter
5).
Foammould 1, 2: (option):
Display of the melt pressure and of the current absolute gas feed pressure (also refer to
Foammould, chapter 7).
Air-/Aquamould 1 - 8: (option):
Display of the current pressure regulator module of Air- / Aquamould 1. (also refer to Airmould /
Aquamould, chapter 15). Additionally, a display shows whether the respective pressure regulator
module is just active.
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 15
Media centre
Start-up program (option)
Display of the status of the start-up program and/or the hut runner start-up circuit. The green tick
means that the start-up parameters and/or the hot runner start-up circuit are active. Additionally,
these two statuses can be used to change to the menu start-up programs (see chapter 18.6).
Additionally, the number of the external servo unit and the current stroke are displayed.
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 16 0115MC
Media centre
F21-Statusbalken-Seite4_GB06
Mould / Station
The status of the lower mould which is in the respective station is displayed here. A detailed
explanation is given in chapter 11.4.1 "Mould table / Status".
Dummy mould
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 17
Media centre
Display change.
K4Web IOS (option)
This symbol is used for direct image change to the K4Web (see also chapter 26.7).
WebCam
This symbol is used to change screen to view the WebCam (see also chapter 26.8).
Browser
Ths symbol is used for direct image change to the browser (see also chapter 26.9).
RobCam
Ths symbol is used for direct image change to the image processing system (see also chapter
10.8).
Help
This symbol is used for direct image change to display your own PDF documents (see also
chapter 20.2).
T.I.G.Web (option)
This symbol is used for direct image change to the T.I.T.Web (see also chapter 26.10).
SmartEdit
This symbol is used for direct image change to the SmartEdit (see also chapter 13).
Userpage 1-3
This symbol is used for direct image change to Userpage 1-3 (see also chapter 24).
Functions
All parts removed
All lower mould statuses are reset with this program preselection (also refer to chapter 11.4.1
Mould table / Status)
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 18 0115MC
Media centre
F21-Statusbalken-Funktionstasten_02
In the case of B6E, function keys can be inserted in the status bar for the main functions and
the movements of the machine. It is thus possible to operate the machine from the status bar
(Operation of the machine is blocked for "Remote access" with "Logon Pad" or VNC).
CAUTION
With B6E, the function keys "Drive Stop / Start" and "Setting mode / Manual mode" are fixly
assigned to the lower two keypads. These two keypads cannot be cancelled from the status bar.
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 19
Media centre
Ejector - forward / back
Injection plunger (with MicroPower only) - injection and holding pressure / injection
plunger back
Tie-bar pulling
NC QUIT
Air valve
Unipick
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 20 0115MC
Media centre
Activate / deactivate start-up parameter
Activate / deactivate hot runner start-up circuit
Screw-off unit
Tandem Mould - Open mould half 2 (nozzle side) / mould half 1 (ejector side)
Airmould
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 21
Media centre
Cooling water valve
Purging
Setting mode
Manual mode
Semiautomatic mode
Automatic mode
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 22 0115MC
Media centre
A detailed description of the individual function keys is given in Chapter A.2 Control elements or
in the chapter of the corresponding function.
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 23
Media centre
F21-Statusbalken-WittmannRoboter1_01
For machines with an integrated Wittmann robot 1 (2) starting from software versin 8.16.00, the
keys of the robot emergency-stop block can be entered into the status bar. It is thus possible
to operate the robot from the status bar (Operation of the robot is blocked for "Remote access"
with "Logon Pad" or VNC).
The configuration for the Wittmann robot 1 (2) is in the menu "Robot interface 1 (2) / Wittmann
config" (see chapter 10.1.3) Here, the software version of the Wittmann robot is displayed, too.
For further information concerning the function of the individual keys refer to the Wittmann robot
manual.
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 24 0115MC
Media centre
F21-Notizblock_02
In the notepad, you can store messages (e.g. for the night shift). By activating the note, an
information in the area of the status displays is represented.
Edit note
An activation of the button displays the alphapad. Now, the note can be created and edited.
An activation of the "Confirmation" button (ticked in blue) in the alphapad will store the note.
An activation of the "Abort" button (red x) in the alphapad will discard the changes.
HB6GB21K
0115MC
Chapter 21 - 25
Media centre
Importance of note: Low
The importance of the note is set here. With importance "Low", an information is shown in the
area of the status displays when the note is activated.
Note is active
An activation of this program preselection the note will become active. An active note can only
be reset by means of the button "Note read".
Note read
The note will be deactivated again after having read the note and having pressed this button. If
a note with the importance "High" was read, a new automatic cycle can be started afterwards.
NOTE
All actions done with the notepad are stored in the log.
The not is saved together with the product data record.
HB6GB21K
Chapter 21 - 26 0115MC
Diagnostic
22 Diagnostic
22.1 PV Monitor.
F22-PV-Monitor_01
With the PV monitor, you may gain access to any RPS parameter and have the respective
contents displayed.
This page enables faster diagnosis of problems.
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 1
Diagnostic
• RPS Variable :
The variable's spelling is principally determined by the applicable level (local, rps-global/
proc-global, tk- global or dynamic). The " test" variable is shown as an example of the
spelling in each level:
Validity: Local nu__clc1:test
Where nu__clc1 is the task name in the RPS, because this variable is only valid locally in this
task.
Validity: rps-global test.
Only the variable name is entered.
Validity: tk - global.
not used in the RPS.
Validity: dynamic nu__clc1:*test.
Enter the task name and * (asterisk), because this is a dynamic variable.
CAUTION
The content (value) of both variables (Visual display variable and RPS variable) must be the
same. If the variable name appears in "red" (variable not found) after entering the variable name
and pressing ENTER To acknowledge, then either the name has been mistyped, the variable
does not exist in the RPS/VIS or it has the wrong validity range.
Values
Depending on the user level, this field is either used only as a display or the value of the
variable entered can be changed.
CAUTION
The values shown here correspond to the units in the control unit.
I.e.:
Unit Visualisation Control
mm mm 0.1 mm
mm/s mm/s 0.1 mm/s
bar bar 0,1 bar
cm3 cm3 0.1 mm
kN kN 0.1 bar
rpm rpm 0.1 rpm
cm3/s cm3/s mm/s
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 2 0115MC
Diagnostic
22.2 Scope
22.2.1 Scope / Curve 1-8
F22-Scope-Kurve1-8_01
With the scope, you may gain access to any RPS parameter and have the respective contents
displayed as a curve on a time axis.
This page enables faster diagnosis of problems.
Measuring cursor
The cursor, which is moved by means of the two arrow keys, is displayed as a vertical "black
broken line". The corresponding value to the cursor position is displayed on the RPS. The index
of the array and the time where the measuring cursor blinks are displayed.
Zoom X
The user may change the scale of the x axis. Move the measuring cursor to the wished zoom
position and press the button Zoom (magnifying glass) "X-min" or "X-max". Press the button
"Reset Zoom X" in order to restore the original scaling values. This button is displayed only in
the case of a zoomed graph.
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 3
Diagnostic
New recording
If the single recording preselection (see "Scope / Configuration") is activated, a new recording
is enabled by pressing this button. Recording is done once if there is a trigger event. Another
recording is enabled only if this button is pressed again.
Stop recording
Press this button to stop the scope recording. With activate "Continuous recording" only one
cycle will be recorded. With "Single recording", the data are sent straight to the screen even
if the trigger event has not yet happened. If, however, a cycle has already been recorded and
displayed on the VIS, pressing of "Stop recording" is ignored. Corresponding status messages
are displayed on the lower edge of the screen.
Status
Display of the scope status. The time at the moment of display is shown to the right of the status
display.
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 4 0115MC
Diagnostic
F22-Scope-Konfiguration_01
By means of the Scope function you may record and display control data.
This page enables faster diagnosis in the case of problems.
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 5
Diagnostic
Sending the data to the visual display
After the Scope function has been stopped, a calculation is carried out in the trc_clc task and
then sent to the screen.
Settings
The trigger parameter settings, the recording variables and the recording time can be entered
on the setting pages. With the Tab key "Curves 1-8", the user can change to the picture for the
recording variables.
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 6 0115MC
Diagnostic
Recording time after triggering "Rec. time after trigger"
By entering a value of 0-100 %, a so-called "Pre-trigger" can be set. Hence if a value of, say, 90
% is entered and 2.4 seconds are recorded, then recording starts 10% (ca. 240ms) before the
actual trigger event
Info
The text which was entered here is displaye on the "Curve 1-8" page as curve description. If a
dot or a space is entered as the first character of the info text, the variable name is displayed as
curve description on the "Curve 1-8" page.
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 7
Diagnostic
Example: Actual speed of closure
ACP[CU1]92
or ACP[CU1,0]92
Example: Actual speed Metering
ACP[IP1,2]251
Selected list of frequently used parameter numbers:
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 8 0115MC
Diagnostic
Units
Nine different units for the recording variables can be selected by the user for recording.
Available units: °C, mm/s, bar, mm, cm3, mV, %, dig, and kN.
Axis number
The axis number must be given for automatic axis selection. If it is not known which axis has
which number, the axis diagnosis can be accessed by the "PLC" tab key and "Axis" rider and if
a valid entry is made in the "Axis number" field (1 - input limit), the axis type will be displayed to
the right of the axis type input field.
The following axes are currently available:
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 9
Diagnostic
22.3 PLC
22.3.1 PLC / General
F22-PLC-Allgemein_02
Use the main task diagnosis to call the state of the different automatic step by step switches.
This aid may be applied in different situations in case it is not possible to establish an online
communication with the control unit via the service computer.
MainTask
automatic (PV.Acaut[0])
Display of the current step in the main automatic step sequence the machine is in.
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 10 0115MC
Diagnostic
60 Waiting for automatic step sequence NU/IP ready, PC:Aciu[] >= 100
70 Start Opening
71 Waiting for TandemMould
72 Waiting for Mould opened / Start Ejector forward
81 Waiting for Ejector in front position/ Start Ejector back
85 Start Spraying/brushing device
86 Waiting for spraying/brushing device ready
91 Waiting for Ejector back
94 Waiting for tandem mould ejector in front position
95 Waiting for Mould opened / Start Brushing / Spraying device
100 Start Clamping force control
101 Waiting for End Clamping force control
110 Waiting for brushing/ spraying device
111 Mould open time
112 Waiting for nozzle is back
113 Error analysis / start of "New cycle" go to step 1, 3 or 10
114 Stop nozzle assembly
115 Start nozzle ejection position
116 Waiting for nozzle in injection position
117 Start ejection program
118 Waiting for end ejection program
119 Waiting for error analysis for switch-off (Time Switch-off delayed)
120 Waiting for cycle start after error class 3
199 Automatic abort operation not ok
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 11
Diagnostic
IP1 automatic (PV.Aciu[0]):
IP2 automatic (PV.Aciu[1]):
IP3 automatic (PV.Aciu[2]):
Display of the current step in the automatic substep sequence the nozzle assembly / injection
plunger is in.
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 12 0115MC
Diagnostic
Switch cabinet temperature
Display of the switch cabinet temperature. After exceeding 60 °C/ 140 °F, the machine will be
switched off.
B6 Manager
Click on this button to call up the B6 manager.
The following actions can be carried out in this menu:
• Save log files (RPS, BATVIS, log) on USB data carrier.
• Manuel searching of installation files.
• RPS:
Restart of the RPS.
Terminating the RPS.
Status of operating system.
Warm and cold start of the RPS
• VIS:
Restart of the VIS.
Terminating the VIS
• Display of VIS Control Cen
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 13
Diagnostic
F22-PLC-Pumpe_01
Use the pump diagnosis to call the state of the different pump systems. This aid may be applied
in different situations in case it is not possible to establish an online communication with the
control unit via the service computer.
This page enables faster diagnosis of problems.
Pump
Possible pump number entry (0... display off, 1... maximum number of pumps).
Release
Display of pump release status.
RPS (PLC) Var.: Pp_com[Pump number].Pbrel
0 Pump is being used by an axis .. not available
1 Pump (pump system) available for next movement
The Pp_com[Pump number].axis variable indicates which axis has called up the pump, or if no
movement is active, this variable shows the number of the last axis to use the pump.
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 14 0115MC
Diagnostic
Start
Display of the step in the programmed step sequence where the starting procedure of the drive
currently is.
RPS Var.:Pp_com[Pump number].CaseStrNo
0 Drive off / Waiting for Start
10 Switching Start Contactor
20 Switching main contactor / Wating for end star run-up
30 Checking "Drive running" (digital input from main contactor
40 Waiting for release (delay)
50 Drive running/ Waiting for stop
60 Waiting for Start key released
Controller control
Display of current pump controller configuration. RPS (PLC) variable (WORD): Pp_com[Pump
number].control
Bit Function
Control bits for pump
Bit 0:
Bit 1:
Bit 2: Direct SPC access
Bit 3: Exclusive access
Bit 4:
Bit 5:
Bit 6: Minimum pressure / quantity output
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 15
Diagnostic
Status
Display of current pump status.
RPS (PLC) variable (WORD): Pp_com[Pump number].status
Bit Function
Status bits for pump
Bit 0: Slave
Bit 1:
Bit 2: Direct SPC access
Bit 3: Direct SPC access with Add-/Max term
Bit 4: Idling active
Bit 5: No loading
xx org-status
The field index of the variable Pp_com[Pump number].orgstat[xx] can be entered here.
RPS (PLC) Variable (BYTE[10]) : Pp_com[Pump number].orgstat[xx]
No. Function
Status of Pump organisation task
0
1 Drive running (e.g. release additional axes)
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 16 0115MC
Diagnostic
F22-PLC-Achse_02
Use the axis diagnosis to call the state of the different axes. This aid may be applied in different
situations in case it is not possible to establish an online communication with the control unit via
the service computer.
This page enables faster diagnosis of problems.
Axis
The wished axis is selected here. Number and type of the axis (e.g. 1, CU1) is displayed on the
right of the selection. The following axis types are currently available (see table):
Axis type English des. German des.
CU clamp unit Schließeinheit
EU ejector unit Auswerfereinheit
NU nozzle unit Düseneinheit
IP injection piston Spritzkolben
MH mould height Einbauhöhenverstellung
MT metering unit Dosiereinheit
CP core pull Kernzug
HU handling unit Handling
IH integrated handling Integriertes Handling
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 17
Diagnostic
PB pressure box Druckdose
RE round table ejector Rundtisch Stationsauswerfer
RT round table Rundtisch
TT turn table Dreheinheit
PB pressure box Druckdose
VU vacuum unit Vakuumeinheit
RI round table index Rundtisch Index
UU unscrewing unit Abschraubeinheit
OU option unit Optionsachse
SG safety gate Schutzgitter
AP APS axis APS Achse
DY Dummy axis Dummy Achse
The number displayed to the right of the axis type, e.g. CP2, indicates that this is the second
axis of this type i.e. core puller 2.
Start - oc
Start - ocom
Display of the number (Start number), used to call up the axis.
Clamping unit: Axis number = CU$[1]
No. Designation
0 idle
1 Close with clamping force build-up
3 Close
5 Clamping force build-up
2 Reduce clamping force with opening
4 Open
6 Clamping force reduction
7 Closing Setting mode
8 Opening Setting mode
9 Closing Service setting mode
10 Opening Service Setting mode
11 Pressure box(es) back Setting mode (HM machines)
12 Pressure box(es) forward Setting mode (HM machines)
15 Move lockings in Setting mode (HM)
16 Move lockings out Setting mode (HM)
17 Mould height adjustment (
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 18 0115MC
Diagnostic
Nozzle unit: Axis number = NU$[1]
No. Designation
0 idle
1 Nozzle forward
2 Nozzle back
7 Nozzle forward Setting mode
8 Nozzle back Setting mode
9 Nozzle forward Service Setting mode
10 Nozzle backward Service Setting mode
The nozzle unit (NU) for the microsystem is available only for a multicolour machine.
The start commands of this NU must be taken from the clamping unit.
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 19
Diagnostic
17 Injection plunger forward to the waiting position (Micro)
18 Injection plunger back to the waiting position (Micro)
Start step
Display of axis step number (internal step number, organisation task in the start routine). See
description of the corresponding axis.
Stop step
Display of axis stop step number (internal step number, organisation task in the stop routine).
See description of the corresponding axis.
Ready
If an axis correctly completes its movement (e.g. profile end reached), the lat call (= start -
ocom) is displayed here.
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 20 0115MC
Diagnostic
Stop pos. / Stop neg.
Indicates whether the selected axis is or has been stopped by an interlock in the positive /
negative direction.
0 No stop
<> 0 stop (direction of movement disabled). Cklicking on the finger to the right of the status
value will display a description of the axis/functin which triggered the stop.
Description of the stop numbers for machine axes "ocom_.nStp & ocom_.Stp!"
(Version: 0.02.3, Rev: 1061)
001 Error class 8
002 Gen. safety device (purge guard, safety doors, maintenance doors)
003 CU safety device (safety gate / photoelectric barrier)
004 Scotch on the left or STD scotch / clamping safety device (HM series)
005 Scotch on the right
006 Gen. safety device not closed after cycle start
007 Mould has been injected on
008 Hydr. Mouldmaster nozzle active, MM pump = IP pump
009 Injection pressure / holding pressure too high (temperature)
010 Profile monitoring Mouldmaster nozzle
011 STD / UM ejector not back
012 Safety position Nozzle unit 1
013 Safety position Nozzle unit 2
014 Safety position Nozzle unit 3
015 Mould-depending stop (plate protection ...)
016 Mould table not in position
017 Table index 1 not OK
018 Vacuum unit 1
019 Barrel heating (max. temp. monitoring, OFF, learning. graduated heating-up, screw
thorough-heating time)
020 Mould heating and external heating (temperature control unit)
021 Mouldmaster nozzles
022 Optional temperature control zones (HT group 14, 15, 16)
023 No mould for axis
024 Invalid oscillating range
025 Mould not opened
026 Station ejector 1 not back
027 Station ejector 2 not back
028 Station ejector 3 not back
029 Central lubrication
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 21
Diagnostic
030 Robot release (EM, LC, UNIPICK)
031 Robot release cleaning (BH)
032 Robot release sprue knock device (SK)
033 Reserve
034 Reserve
035 Reserve
036 Station ejector 1 not in safety position
037 Station ejector 2 not in safety position
038 Station ejector 3 not in safety position
039 Block of Mouldfix
040 Actualisation of the robot mould active
041 General stop for robot interface
042 Step sequence station ejector started
043 No robot mould available
044 Table index 1 not back
045 Control job aborted
046 Purging flap
047 Purging cup / Purging box
048 Injection upper mould
049 General blocking for nozzle unit (sequence)
050 General blocking for injection plunger (sequence)
051 Height adjustment injection unit
052 Mould not closed
053 Mould not closed or external injection block
054 Nozzle unit in wrong position
055 Barrel heating stop by weekly time switch
056 CPT maximal value monitoring for each injection profile point
057 No mould for demoulding
058 Pressure discharge for axis active
059 Error class 9
060 No release of safety gate bypass
061 No release of photoelectric barrier bypass
062 Stop envelope monitoring (e.g. demoulding, immediate stop, ...)
063 Mould closed but clamping force not built up and nozzle contact
064 Error Servo motor
065 BM head heating (max. temp.monitoring, OFF, learning)
066 Mould table / rotary unit must be referenced
067 Force not built up
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 22 0115MC
Diagnostic
068 No release of two-hand operation
069 Compression and degassing with equal start point
070 Error class 2
071 Mould full (already injected)
072 Automatic correction Mould open
073 Compression gap reached
074 Safety gate / photoelectric barrier interrupted during breathing sequence
075 Mould full by IP1 (injected)
076 Mould full by IP2 (injected)
077 Mould full by IP3 (injected)
078 No mould for IP1
079 No mould for IP2
080 No mould for IP3
081 Clamping force reduced, but cooling time IP1 still active
082 Clamping force reduced, but cooling time IP2 still active
083 Clamping force reduced, but cooling time IP2 still active
084 Airmould
085 Mould not closed or clamping force build-up active
086 Profile monitoring Holding pressure
087 Profile monitoring Metering
088 Nozzle contact point lost
089 Heating groups in automatic mode
090 StpUSE - Bit 0
091 StpUSE - Bit 1
092 StpUSE - Bit 2
093 StpUSE - Bit 3
094 StpUSE - Bit 4
095 StpUSE - Bit 5
096 StpUSE - Bit 6
097 StpUSE - Bit 7
098 Standard profile monitoring
099 Zerosing
100 StpAPS
101 Minimum demoulding time
102 Incorrect starting order for axis
103 No parts available
104 Clamping unit is blocked by another axis (CU requests pump)
105 External BY-PASS release missing
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 23
Diagnostic
106 Dummy mould: no valid mould for axis
107 StpUSE - Bit >= 8 aktive
108 Release of peripheral interface 1 (mould area free)
109 Release of peripheral interface 2 (mould area free)
110 Release of peripheral interface 3 (mould area free)
111 Block of magnet mounting platen
112 Block Decompression 2 of clamping unit (identical pump system), progr. Parallel metering
113 Error HW coding injection unit (ID check)
114 No release PQ valve
115 Interface for axis triggering not plugged in (NC)
116 Production stop by DZB interface (HMx)
117 Purging active
118 Safety mat (Er_[470])
119 Ejector chute open, rear safety gate open, rear safety gate not acknowledged
120 Table unit 1 not in position (rotary unit 1 -> TT1)
121 Table unit 2 not in position (rotary unit 2 -> TT2)
122 Table unit 1 not in position (external rotary unit 1 -> TX1)
123 Screw-off unit 1-x not in position
124 STD / UM ejector not in safety position
125 Tiebar pulling process not completed
126 Limit switch "Monitoring min. nozzle stroke A" (e.g. L-group in case of multicolour)
127 Limit switch "Monitoring min. nozzle stroke B" (e.g. L-group in case of multicolour)
128 Limit switch "Monitoring min. nozzle stroke C" (e.g. L-group in case of multicolour)
129 Monitoring safety gate block (Er_[478])
130 No release for special solution Argentina (moving the axis in the setting mode with open
safety gate)
131 Barrel heating (-tolerance, cooling ring, melt)
132 BM head (-tolerance)
133 Monitoring needle valve nozzle
134 Blocking Injection to avoid injection to the horizontal group until the horizontal one is not
completely back
135 Barrel maintenance program
136 Limit switch "Collision NU groups"
137 Limit switch "Hopper monitoring"
138 Clamping force built up and nozzle contact, but no nozzle contact pressure built up
139 Nozzle unit to rear mechanical stop
140 Ejector chute opened (Er_[303])
141 Rear safety gate not acknowledged (Er_[514]
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 24 0115MC
Diagnostic
142 Safety door handle pressed (TMS)
143 Fail safe monitoring time after hydraulic system ON
144 Block Injection if nozzle contact force not built up
145 Clamping force outside tolerance
146 Tiebar pulling device
147 Mould height adjustment stopped - Er_[709]
148 Determination of constant dimension stopped - Er_[710]
149 Rear safety gate opened
150 Rotary unit: No rotary unit switched on
151 Rotary unit: Ejector not in front position (rotary program = 20 index platen)
152 Rotary unit: Ejector not back (rotary program <> 20)
153 Rotary unit: Mould not open (rotary program = 21)
154 Rotary unit: Mould not open (rotary program = 22)
155 Rotary unit: Mould not open (rotary program = 24)
156 Rotary unit: Mould not open (rotary program > 24)
157 Rotary unit: Mould not open (rotary program < 20)
158 Mould safety device
159 Ejector platen HM - Er_[660], Er_[661]
160 DZB insider rear side of safety gate not ok
161 Reserve
162 HM2P: CU diff.pressure 12B02/12B03 > CU.PB.Pplim1 (3 bar) -> Sensor failure
163 HM2P: CU pressure 12B02/12B03 > max axis pressure, e.g. mould injected on
164 HM2P: PU1 ... PU4 in position "PU_S_ERR_END"
165 HM2P: PU forward diff.pressure 45B01/46B01 > PU.PU.Pplim1 (3 bar), stored
166 HM2P: PU forward diff.pressure 45B01/46B01 > PU.PU.Pplim2 (20 bar), stored
167 HM2P: PB forward max.pressure 45B01/46B01 deviation, stored
168 HM2P: PU forward diff.pressure 45B01/46B01 > PU.PU.Pplim1 (3 bar), stored
169 HM2P: PU back diff.pressure 46B02/46B02 > PU.PU.Pplim2 (20 bar), stored
170 HM2P: PU back max.pressure 46B02/46B02 deviation, stored
171 HM2P: PU_S_ACT < 0 and PU_S_ACT = TRUE
172 HM2P: Mould mounting height has changed, zero offset required
173 HM2P: Locking is not unlocked Er287
174 HM2P: Locking error acknowledgement received
175 HM2P: Unlocking error acknowledgement received
176 Tandem-Mould not in a def. position
177 HM2P: Opening stroke larger than max. opening stroke
178 HM2P: Locking cylinder not in locking position
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 25
Diagnostic
179 HM2P: Violation of max. opening force "+" tolerance limit
180 Electro-hydr. nozzle contact monitoring
181 Nozzle unit in absolute rear limit position
182 Oil level Injection spindle
183 Tandem-Mould not closed
184 Screw-off unit switched off
185 Part verification
186 Automatic referencing active
187 Rotary unit not plugged in
188 HM2P: Clamping cylinders are in unlocking position and build up clamping force
189 HM2P: Tiebars in the locking system
190 HM2P: Mould mounting height is in min. position
191 HM2P: Rear frame is in max. position for mould height adjustment
192 HM2P: Locking cylinders are in locking position
193 HM2P: Mould mounting height is in max. position
194 MicroPower: Injection plunger 1 is in the danger zone
195 MicroPower: Injection plunger 2 is in the danger zone
196 MicroPower: Injection plunger 3 is in the danger zone
197 MicroPower: Injection plunger not back
198 MicroPower: Clamping unit not completely open (mech. end)
199 MicroPower: Mould no >= release position (injection plunger forward)
200 Tandem-Mould
201 Block of pressure box
202 Time Close / open exceeded
203 Lateal safety gate open
204 Do not acknowledge safety device
205 Clamping unit is not in safety position (mould table, ...)
206 Index not moved in
207 Machine cycle stopped
208 Nozzle unit not in front position (nozzle contact point)
209 Lego: Peripheral release closing of good / reject part separation
210 Release of peripheral interface 4 (mould area free)
211 Release of peripheral interface 5 (mould area free)
212 Release of peripheral interface 1 (Release of closing)
213 Release of peripheral interface 2 (Release of closing)
214 Release of peripheral interface 3 (Release of closing)
215 Release of peripheral interface 4 (Release of closing)
216 Release of peripheral interface 5 (Release of closing)
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 26 0115MC
Diagnostic
217 Block Build up nozzle contact pressure, CU requires Master pump
218 Block Build up nozzle contact pressure, CU requires Slave pump
219 Block Build up nozzle contact pressure, EU requires Master pump
220 Screw-off unit 2 not in position
221 Block Ejector forward since pump is required by nozzle group 1 (priority)
222 Block Ejector forward since pump is required by nozzle group 2 (priority)
223 Block Ejector forward since pump is required by nozzle group 3 (priority)
224 Block Ejector forward since pump is required by injection plunger 1 (priority)
225 Block Ejector forward since pump is required by injection plunger 2 (priority)
226 Block Ejector forward since pump is required by injection plunger 3 (priority)
227 Block of WFC temperature monitoring
228 Block of WFC flow monitoring
229 Screw thorough-heating time barrel heating
230 External collision control
231 External injection group: Error
232 External injection group: Assembly not ready to start
233 External injection group: Incorrect operating mode
234 External injection process control / monitoring (Kistler, Piramus)
235 Safety doors are not acknowledged
236 Safety gate (safety door) safety device not acknowledged or acknowledgement error
237 Safety door safety device not acknowledged or acknowledgement error
238 Tandem Mould mould change active
239 Current injection volume too large
240 Current injection volume too small
241 Injection unit is started in safety position (e.g. Cellmould)
242 Block Injection plunger forward since pump is required by the nozzle group (build up
nozzle contact pressure) -> is required if IP comes to a stop during breathing sequence
243 Mech. skotch / clamping safety device Clamping 1 (HM series, OPT design)
244 Mech. skotch / clamping safety device Clamping 2 (HM series, OPT design)
245 Mech. skotch / clamping safety device (HM series, STD design)
246 Safety doors 3 x opened (safety gate drive - MacroPower)
247 Safety doors opened (safety gate drive - except for MacroPower)
248 Maintenance door open (safety gate drive)
249 EMERGENCY STOP triggered (safety gate drive)
250 No release variothermal process control (external / mobile)
251 Safety position Ejector back reached
252 External QS evaluation active
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 27
Diagnostic
253 EM Robot to clamping platen: Mould neither closed nor open
254 EM Robot to clamping platen: Mould not closed and injection cycle
255 EM Robot to clamping platen: Mould not closed and dummy mould active
256 EM Robot to clamping platen: Mould not open and no injection cycle
257 EM Robot to clamping platen: undefined STOP
258 Safety bar triggered
259 Maximum clamping force exceeded
260 Safety gate was not acknowledged
261 No position definition of the third mould platen (3-platen mould)
262 Wrong position of the third mould platen (3-platen mould)
263 Block of pressure 2K sandwich platen
264 Block injection plunger forward because nozzle contact force is built up first
265 Block injection plunger back because nozzle contact force is built up first
266 Rotary distributor head must be referenced
267 Rotary distributor head is not switched on
268 Rotary distributor head in undefined position
269 Rotary distributor head not plugged in
270 No valid injection channel on the rotary distributor head opened
271 Screw thorough-heating time dstributor head
272 Distributor head (max. temp. monitoring, OFF, learning. graduated heating-up, screw
thorough-heating time)
273 "-" tolerance error distributor head
274 Heating distributor head in automatic mode (max. "+" tolerance error)
275 Filling assembly stopped since shotpot assembly stopped
276 Shotpot assembly stopped since filling assembly stopped
277 NC servo unit in mechanical limit position
278 NC servo unit deactivated
279 Error continuous current utilisation
280 Mould height must be referenced
281 New zeroing of the clamping unit required
282 Wrong mould for Removal/Insertion
283 to 509 Reserve
510 External mould monitoring Block error status
511 External mould monitoring General block
512 to 530 Reserve
901 to 930 Order-specific stop number
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 28 0115MC
Diagnostic
Status 0-59 (Combobox selection)
The field index of the ocom[Axis number].Status[xx] variable can be selected here. The
respective status value will be displayed on the right of this value.
Status description:
0 Org-Task active
1 Org-Task waiting for pump consent
2 Org-Task Job finished
3 Home position reached (e.g. opened, is back, latched / unlatched position)
4 limit position reached (e.g. closed, is forward, active pulling position)
5 Movement in negative direction active (e.g. closing, turn rotary table cw)
6 Movement in positive direction active (e.g. opening, rotary table ccw)
7 Force build-up active
8 Force release active
9 Force is built up
10 Force is reduced
11 Switch-off Hydraulics
12 Minimum monitoring stroke reached (e.g. toggle min. mould height reached)
13 maximum monitoring stroke reached (e.g. toggle max. mould height reached)
14 Force too low
15 Force too high
16 Force ok
17 Mould safety triggered
18 pressure regulator active (holding pressure)
19 Decrease active
20 Increase active
21 Reset active
22 Rotation active (e.g. Metering)
23 Rotation Limit position reached (e.g. metering stroke end)
24 Limit position 1 reached (e.g. Decompression Stroke 1)
25 Limit position 2 reached (e.g. Decompression Stroke 2)
26 Rotation Limit position and Limit position 2 reached (Metering stroke and Dec.2 reached)
27 Limit position safety device ok
28 Time active (Cooling time, pause time)
29 Lockings moved in
30 Lockings moved out
31 Direction of rotation cw "overrev"
32 Direction of rotation ccw "over rev"
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 29
Diagnostic
40 Program activated (depending on the respective axis)
49 Job aborted
Controller active
Indicates whether the controller is still active.
0 offline, inactive
1 active
RPS Variable : ccom[Axis number].active
Controller Job
Display of the job which called up the controller.
RPS (PLC) variable (WORD): ccom[Axis number].job
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 30 0115MC
Diagnostic
10: Setting mode INJPL FWD / PURGE
11: Setting mode INJPL BACK
12: SERVICE SETTING INJ FWD
13: SERVICE SETTING INJ BACK
14: SETTING MODE metering piston negative direction (Micro)
15: SETTING MODE metering piston positive direction (Micro)
16: SERVICE SETTING MODE metering piston - negative direction (Micro)
17: SERVICE SETTING MODE metering piston - positive direction (Micro)
20: INJECTION WITH HOLDING PRESSURE
21: INJECTION WITHOUT HOLDING PRESSURE
22: HOLDING PRESSURE
24: DECOMPRESSION
30: SERVICE SETTING METERING
40: METERING WITHOUT BACK PRESSURE
41: METERING WITH BACK PRESSURE
50: Special function: Arrest injection plunger
51: Special function: PURGING OF COLD PLUG
100: STOP-Function, i.e. stop open or closed loop process with ramp
101: EMERGENCY STOP function Injection, Decompression, Holding pressure, i.e. stop open
or closed loop processwithout ramp
102: STOP-Function Service-Setting, i.e. stop open or closed loop process without ramp
103: STOP function Metering, back-pressure (with ramp)
104: EMERGENCY STOP-Function without ramp
402: Screw speed measurement (required for speed linearisation)
Controller control
Display of controller configuration, depending on machine type and equipment.
RPS (PLC) variable (WORD): ccom[Axis number].control
Axis type CU, EU, NU, RE:
Bit Function
Control bits for axis:
Bit 0: 0 =
1=
Bit 9: 0 = Switch digital directional valve to mid position at end of stroke
1= leave digital directional valve in selected position at end of stroke
Bit 10: 0 = Controller has control of digital outputs (directional valve) assigned to the axis.
1= SPC (PLC) controls axis-assigned digital outputs (directional valve)
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 31
Diagnostic
Bit 11: 0 = Controller controls axis-assigned analog outputs
1= SPC (PLC) controls axis-assigned analog outputs
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 32 0115MC
Diagnostic
Bit 25:
Bit 26:
Bit 27:
DOneg
Direction valve in negative direction, (actual stroke value decreases)
DOpos
Direction valve in positive direction, (actual stroke value inecreases)
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 33
Diagnostic
Uv
Output voltage to a proportional directional valve
SQ
Volume requirement of the axis to the pump
Sp
Pressure requirement of the axis to the pump
As
Current stroke in digit from an analog stroke transducer
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 34 0115MC
Diagnostic
F22-PLC-Logbuch_01
Here, the log of the control unit (PLC) is displayed. This aid may be applied in different
situations in case it is not possible to establish an online communication with the control unit via
the service computer.
This page enables faster diagnosis of problems.
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 35
Diagnostic
F22-PLC-Fehlerdiagnose_01
Here, the errors of the RPS are displayed. This aid may be applied in different situations in
case it is not possible to establish an online communication with the control unit via the service
computer.
This page enables faster diagnosis of problems.
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 36 0115MC
Diagnostic
22.4 Hardware
F22-Hardware_01
The modules used by the control unit will be indicated. This aid may be applied in different
situations in case it is not possible to establish an online communication with the control unit via
the service computer.
This page enables faster diagnosis of problems.
IO Forcing
IOs can be forced (compulsory setting of actual / set values for / of inputs / outputs). A certain IO
picture for diagnosis purposes can thus be created.
Caution: A change of the IOs can result in negative effects, therefore, this function is to be used
by experienced specialists.
Double click on the wished IO node to open another window where the wished behaviour
(forcing - forcing off - forcing of all IOs off) can be entered. According to the IO nodes, the
wished set value can be specified in the set value field. Forcing the IO node can also be
switched off again here.
When leaving the "Hardware" screen, forcing of all IOs will be deactivated!
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 37
Diagnostic
22.5 NC diagnosis
22.5.1 NC diagnosis / general
F22-NCDiagnose-Allgemein_GB04
CAUTION
In order to be able to empty the motor cooling circuit, enter a lower temperature value (e.g. 10
°C / 50 °F) in this field so that the cooling circuit valve will open, and switch off the cooling water.
NOTE
The "Cooling active" status is displayed to the right of the set values.
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 38 0115MC
Diagnostic
Temperature monitoring of the driving spindle (option)
Prewarning temperature driving spindle
Switch-off temperature driving spindle
The set prewarning or switch-off temperature for the temperature monitoring of the driving
spindle can be read here. These values are set in the factory and cannot be changed. An error
message is displayed when exceeding the respective temperature.
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 39
Diagnostic
F22-NCDiagnose-Seite1_02
Use the "NC diagnosis" menu to read the current motor temperatures of the individual axes.
Additionally, the nod number, drive utilization, intermediate circuit voltage, order designation,
and serial number for each axis with electrical drive will be displayed.
Node number
Display of the nod number assigned to this axis in the software. This number must correspond
to the nod number set at the drive (plug-in module AC110 at the ACOPOS).
Drive utilization
Display of the current utilization at the drive in [%]. The drive utilization must not be higher than
99 %. The actual value in the outer right of this line shows the current motor torque in [Nm] /
[lbfft].
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 40 0115MC
Diagnostic
Motor temperature
Display of the motor temperature of the respective axis in [°C] / [°F].
Run-up block
Displays the software release for a movement of the respective axis.
0, red No release for a movement of the respective axis (e.g. safety gate is open).
1, green Release for a movement of the respective axis available.
In the automatic moce (no safety devices open and drive started), the release is
immediately given.
In the manual mode, release is given only by operating the respective manual control key.
Quickstop
Indicates the hardware release of the safety chain (i.e.: EMERGENCY STOP, safety gate) of the
respective axis during drive operation.
0, green Release for a movement of the respective axis. Safety chain not interrupted and drive
on.
1, red No release for a movement of the respective axis available.
Safety chain interrupted or drive off.
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 41
Diagnostic
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 42 0115MC
Diagnostic
Node guarding The communication of the individual pumps is monitored by the nodeguarding. If
the value is changing between "0005" and =0085", the communication is in order. The following
values are possible:
• 0005 and 0085 - Communication correct.
• 0001 - Master starts slave (i.e., the control unit tries to start the pump)
• 007F and 00FF Pump is in preoperational mode
If the value "0001" appears and does not change back again to 5 and 85 after a short period of
time, it is very likely that a hardware error occurred. The following errors are possible:
• The 120 ohm terminal resistances are missing
• A shielding problem occurred
• The DFEC pump controller has no 24V voltage supply or is defective
• Cabling is defective
If the values 7F and FF appear and do not change back again to 5 and 85 after a short period of
time, a software problem is given on one page (pump controller or control system). You can try
here to solve the problem by switching the voltage off and on again. In this case, even a more
intensive error diagnosis with WINPED may be successful.
Manufacturer-specific data
These fields show the manufacturer, the hardware and software version of the pump controller.
Always state these specifications in the case of questions or error messages.
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 43
Diagnostic
ADO abort Error
If the communication is faulty, it will be aborted and an SDO abort telegram is sent by the
sensor.
Node number
Node number of the sensor which caused the error
Job number
Internal SPC parameter number
SDO status
For an explanation refer to table 2 or 3: SDO status
Error class
Error code
Display of error class and error code
Add code
For an explanation see table 1: SDO abort codes according to CanOpen standard
Obj. index
Index of the object according to CanOpen
Obj. subindex
Subindex of the object according to CanOpen
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 44 0115MC
Diagnostic
Table 1: SDO abort codes
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 45
Diagnostic
Table 2: SDO status
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 46 0115MC
Diagnostic
51327 Data buffer too small The delivered data buffer is too small for received LMT
message
51328 Function active LMT command is still active (no error)
51329 Invalide node ID The delivered node ID (.drv.Adr) is greater than the greatest
existing node ID in the project
51330 Array too small The structure array used for the PDO array configuration has
too less elements (one element is necessary for each slave)
51331 CANqueue() error FUB CANqueue() delivered error status (observe addInfo of the
coMaster structure, e.g.: cm.addInfo)
51332 No free port There is no free CANopen port for instantiation (max.8)
51333 Scaling factor is 0 A scaling factor of 0 is not permissible (division by 0)
51334 Name too long The given name of an API function is too long (max. 32)
51335 Function active The Consume Heart Beat function is busy (no error)
51336 CANxnode() error FUB CANxnode() delivered error status (observe error log). For the
time being it occurs only if the "Producer Heart Beat Protocol" is activated.
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 47
Diagnostic
Table 3: SDO status
Not standardized error numbers
This menu shows the connection between the individual pumps and the pumps systems. Here,
the following information is available under the respective pump number:
Master / Slave
If the abbreviation "Ma" is shown here, the pump is a master pump. If the abbreviation "Sla" is
shown here, the pump is a slave pump.
Slave of Master
If the pump is a slave pump, it is always the pump of a certain master. This field shows the
pump number (which must be a master) of which the pump is the slave. If the pump, however, is
a master, "0" is shown here since a master can never belong to another master
Pump system
A master pump always automatically represents a certain system. Here the system is shown,
which is represented by the corresponding master pump in the current configuration. In the case
of the slave pump, too, the system to which it belongs is displayed..
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 48 0115MC
Diagnostic
COBId Rx PDO3
This field shows the communication channel on which the pump is receiving messages.
COBId Tx PDO3
This field shows the communication channel on which the pump is sending. This sending
channel is only active if ther is another pump which has the same number as the receiving
channel.
Time
Time needed by the control unit to change over the configuration.
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 49
Diagnostic
Error code
All currently active emergency errors are here shown in the hex format in a time-based
order. Non-active errors are removed from the list either automatically or after having been
acknowledged.
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 50 0115MC
Diagnostic
Pump controller Temperature
The temperature of the pump electronics will be displayed here. The value is updated every 5
minutes. If the temperature exceeds the value of 85 degrees, error 113 is generated (warning).
If the temperature exceeds 95 degrees, the hydraulic system is switched off and error 689 is
generated.
Node number
Node guarding
The complete CAN network is shown here. Active participants are identified by the node
guarding signal and graphically shown by a "Tick".
HB6GB22H
0115MC
Chapter 22 - 51
Diagnostic
HB6GB22H
Chapter 22 - 52 0115MC
APS
23 APS (Option)
F23-APS Bedienung-Allgemein_01
No error analysis
No error signal if axis is stopped by the APS program.
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 1
APS
APS required for operation of the machine
Whether an APS program is necessary to operate the machine is saved in the product data set
(see section Data Set Management, Page Program Settings).
Product ID
The product ID is required for the identification of the product record (see chapter 23.3 „APS
program creation“, section „Record handling“).
Program ID
The program ID is required for the identification of the APS program. The program ID is entered
in the „APS program creation“ menu.
Status line
This indicates which mode of the APS program is active.
• Inactive
The APS program will not be carried out
• Active
The APS program will be carried out cyclically
• Single step mode active
The program will be carried out in steps.
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 2 0114WT
APS
Status line
This is located under the set value and indicates which mode of the APS program is active.
• Inactive The APS program will not be carried
out
• Active The APS program will be carried out
cyclically
• Single step mode active The program will be carried out in steps.
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 3
APS
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 4 0114WT
APS
Hydraulic system
4 different configurations can be fixed for the hydraulic system. Each configuration consists of
the following entries.
• Description text.
• Amount
Trigger speed of the the hydraulic drive (0 - 10000 mV).
• Pressure
Trigger pressure of the the hydraulic drive (0 - 10000 mV).
• Master pump
Input of the number of the drive which should be run as the master. If only one drive is
available a "1" has to be entered here.
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 5
APS
• Slave pumps
Activates the drives which should be operated as slaves. If only one drive is available a
"0" has to be entered for all 4 slave pumps (P1 to P4), otherwise an alarm message will
be issued.
• Parallel movements
If several axes require the same configuration of the hydraulic system, activation of this program
preselection will allow parallel movements.
In order to activate a configuration the corresponding variable (AP1hyd1 to AP1hyd4 in the APS
program) has to be set to "1" (see also example 2).
APS core
If this program preselection is activated the commands will be sent to the APS program (variable
"AP1 start"). This enables programming of the core puller according to its use (or individually).
Pr.No.
This program number corresponds to the sequence of the corresponding core puller program (in
Chapter 9). The commands will be transferred to the APS program accordingly (variable "AP1
start"). To obtain a better overview, an info text can be assigned to the APS core. This info text
can be entered in user level 20 only.
Priority
By means of the priorities you can set an order for the core pullers for the same start conditions.
The lower the value of the number = higher priority.
CAUTION
Priority "0" = highest priority.
Start
If you need a start value for the respective core puller (see Chapter 9) enter it here. Additionally,
the corresponding actual value is displayed.
Stop
If you need a stop value for the respective core puller (see Chapter 9) enter it here. Additionally,
the corresponding actual value is displayed.
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 6 0114WT
APS
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 7
APS
Unit
P2
P1
mV
0 10000
P1 Restart point 1
P2 Restart point 2
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 8 0114WT
APS
Analog outputs (AO1 to AO4)
The scaling of the analog outputs is made here. The value which is specified is that which has
to be written to the output in order to output 10 volts. The value to be output is in the variables
AP1ao1 to AP1ao4 (see menu APS Oper. 2). Due to the fact that internal calculations are only
made with whole numbers, the 10 fold value is in the variables mentioned above.
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 9
APS
F23-APS Programmerstellung_02
With the User Programming System (APS) customer specific programs can be created.
The APS program can contain up to 200 program lines.
It is possible to delete the entire APS program by means of function selection. In addition,
commands can be added anywhere in the program.
The APS Program can be saved and reloaded.
APS access opportunities(for maximum installation, option)
• 16 digital inputs
• 16 digital outputs
• 4 analog inputs with optional scaling
• 4 analog outputs with optional scaling.
• CAN keyboard.
• Stop movement of one axis (Stopbits in ORG Tasks)
• Specification of a pump pressure / speed.
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 10 0114WT
APS
• 10 error messages (one for each error class)
• 50 user variables
• 10 timers
• 5 program switches (operation via the visualisation)
• 20 set values and 20 actual values (entered from the visualisation)
• As many variables as required via the RPS software (by entry of the name)
Program ID
The "Program ID" is necessary for the indentification of the APS program (see section Data Set
Management, Page Program Settings).
Programming
By selecting a program line, the programming windows is displayed. The selection of the
command takes place via the left pull down menu. The 3 pull down menus to the right are used
to enter the operand.
The parameter can either be entered by hand or combined via three pull down menus (the first
of the three pull down menus is the axis entry, the second specifies the variable names and the
third an index).
In the input field on the right next to the pull down menu a variable or a constant can be entered
directly (if no parameter in the pull down menu has been set) or comments can be entered on
the command line set in the pull down menu.
CAUTION
If comments are entered, they have to begin with an exclamation point (!), otherwise they will be
recognised as parameters or constants.
By activating the function selection "Accept line" the selected program line will be added to the
APS program.
Assignments
LD Load the accumulator with the specified parameters.
LDN Load a 1 in the accumulator when the parameter is 0, otherwise 0 (load the negated
parameters in the accumulator).
ST Save the accumulator in the specified parameters.
STN Save a 1 in the parameter if the accumulator is 0, otherwise 0 (save in parameter the
negated accumulator contents).
S Set the accumulator.
R Reset the accumulator.
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 11
APS
Logical operations
AND Akku = Akku and Operand
ANDN Akku = Akku and (not Operand)
OR Akku = Akku or Operand
ORN Akku = Akku or (not Operand)
XOR Akku = Akku xor Operand
XORN Akku = Akku xor (not Operand)
NOT Akku = not Akku
CAUTION
Not linked by bit.
Arithmatical operations
ADD Akku = Akku + Operand
SUB Akku = Akku – Operand
MUL Akku = Akku * Operand
DIV Akku = Akku / Operand
CAUTION
Enter constants directly in the last parameter field.
Comparison commands
The accumulator will be 1 if the comparison has been fulfilled.
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 12 0114WT
APS
Miscellaneous
END
End of the program
CAUTION
The data type of the accumulator is INT32 (32 Bit Integer). For this reason, for the commands
LD, ADD, SUB, MUL and DIV inaccuracies or errors can occur if the value range is exceeded or
if decimal places after the decimal point are lost as a result of numbers with floating points.
Axis input
AP1 APS variable
CP1 Core puller 1
CP2 Core puller 2
CP3 Core puller 3
CP4 Core puller 4
CP5 Core puller 5
CP6 Core puller 6
CU1 Clamping unit
EU1 Ejector (upper parts ejector)
RE1 Station ejector 1 (rotary table machines only)
RE2 Station ejector 2 (rotary table machines only)
RE3 Station ejector 3 (rotary table machines only)
RT1 Rotary table (rotary table machines only)
NU1 Injection unit 1 (A)
NU2 Injection unit 2 (B)
IP1 Injection / Metering / Decompression (Injection unit 1 = A)
IP2 Injection / Metering / Decompression (Injection unit 2 = B)
HU1 Robot (option)
VU1 Vacuum valve (option)
PB1 Pressure box 1
PB2 Pressure box 2
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 13
APS
Variable name (APS variable)
T By setting this variable the timer specified in the index (T1 to T10) is started. If the timer
has come to an end the variable will be reset.
Tact This variable specifies the time which has already come to an end on the timer (T1 to
T10) in 1/100 sec. (see menu "APS Oper. 2").
Tset The set time of the timer is entered here (T1 to T10) in 1/100 sec. (see menu "APS Oper.
2").
active If this variable is set to 1, when a pump is released the set pump speed and pump
pressure is accepted. (see menu "APS oper. 2, hydraulic system)
actval The actual values of the APS program can be recorded here (saved). They will then be
displayed in the menu "APS operation 1" (column "ACTUAL") [1/100 units].
ai Scaled value of the analog input (see menu "APS Configuration 1", AI1 to AI4). The
display of these values takes place in menu "APS Oper. 2" (AI1 to AI4).
ao Scaled value of the analog output (see menu "APS Configuration 1", AO1 to AO4). The
display of these values takes place in menu "APS Oper. 2" (AO1 to AO4).
aut_mod Variable is not equal to 0 when the automatic operation mode is selected.
di Digital input
do Digital output
errcl With this variable the error messages can be displayed. In addition, the alarm "APS user
error class x" is displayed. The index of the variables specifies the following error classes:
0= Switch off machine immediately.
1= Only display error.
2= Stop cycle immediately, continue cycle with quit command.
3= Stop cycle at end of cycle, start new cycle with quit command.
4= Stop cycle at end of cycle and subsequently switch off the machine.
5= Switch off heating.
6= Stop cycle when all mouldings have been ejected.
7= Stop cycle when all mouldings have been ejected and then switch off machine.
8= Not defined.
9= Not defined.
hyd With this variable the pump configuration specified in the index is called up (see example
program 2).
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 14 0114WT
APS
init This variable is set to 1 for one APS cycle when starting the APS program, as well as
each time the control unit is booted up (when staring the APS program). This variable can
be used for the initialisation of the APS program.
man_mode Variable is not equal to 0 when the operation mode manual is selected.
nStp If this variable is set the self-programmed axis cannot move in a negative direction (see
example program 2).
pStp If this variable is set the self-programmed axis cannot move in a positive direction (see
example program 2).
pmpacc Here the APSprogram receives the confirmation that the pumps have been activated
(see example program 2).
progsw The preselection of the switches in the menu "APS Oper. 1, (P1 to P5)" are saved in
this variable.
drive_on If the drive is switched on the variable has a value not equal to 0.
set_mode Variable is not equal to 0 when the operation mode set is selected.
setval The set values in menu "APS Oper.1, (column SET)" are saved in this variable in 1/100
units.
sse_mode Variable is not equal to 0 when the operation mode service setting (only for
Battenfeld service technicians) is selected.
start If an own axis is programmed, the command transfer takes place here.
Content of the variables:
0 Command axis stop.
1 Command move axis in negative direction (operational mode manual, setting and
automatic).
2 Command move axis in positive direction (operational mode manual, setting and
automatic) (see also example program 2).
stat The status signal takes place here for self-programmed axes.
Explanation of the index:
0 Movement active.
1 Pumps not yet available (only readable).
2 Command implemented.
3 Axis is in positive limit position.
4 Axis is in negative limit position.
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 15
APS
5 Movement active in negative direction.
6 Movement active in positive direction.
11 If this variable is set to 1 the drive will be switched off.
40 Programmed axis is switched on (only readable).
41 Number of the core puller program for the movement in negative direction (only
readable).
42 Number of the core puller program for the movement in positive direction (only
readable). The remaining statuses are freely available (see also example program 2).
tabkey These variables are set as long as the respective CAN key is depressed (option).
tabled For set variables the LED of the CAN key specified by the index illuminates.
tot_init This variable is set to 1 during the start-up of the APS program for the duration of 1 APS
cycle. It can be used for initialisation in the APS program.
var There are 50 "32 bit interger variables" available for programming an APS program.
Index
Indicates a consecutive number for the variable.
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 16 0114WT
APS
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 17
APS
start MH1 (mould height adjustment)
0 Not active (idle)
1 Reduce mould height
2 Increase mould height
3 Automatic mould height readjustment
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 18 0114WT
APS
start VU1 (vacuum unit)
0 Not active (idle)
1 Vacuum Start with intermediate stop
2 Vacuum Start before clamping force build-up
3 Vacuum Start after clamping force build-up
4 Vacuum Start simultaneous to reaching the intermediate stop stroke
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 19
APS
9 Clamping force is built up
10 Clamping force is decreased
11 Switching off of the drive
13 Mould is completely open (maximum opeing stroke)
14 Clamping force too low
15 Clamping force too great
16 Clamping force OK
17 Mould safety device has responded
18 Number of mould safety strokes
19 Clamping force reduction active
20 Clamping force reduction inactive
21 Mould height adjustment active
22 Program clamping force reduction
32 Compression End / Clamping force is built up
33 Compression gap reached
34 Compression active (negative direction)
35 Start breathing (positive direction)
36 Breathing active
37 Breathing End / Clamping force is built up
42 Direction of the axis: 0 = horizontal, 1 = vertical, 2 = horizontal L
49 Job aborted
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 20 0114WT
APS
stat EU1 (ejector)
RE1 (station ejector 1)
RE2 (station ejector 2)
RE3 (station ejector 3)
0 Task is is active
1 Waiting for release of the pumps
2 Organisation task "Job finished"
3 Ejector is back (limit position negative direction)
4 Ejector is forward (limit position positive direction)
5 Movement ejector back active (negative direction)
6 Movement ejector forward active (positive direction)
11 Switching off of the drive
13 Ejector is completely back
27 Ejector limit position safety device is back
34 Hydraulic storage is loaded
39 Program eject from middle platen (0 = off, 1 = on)
40 Ejection program (0 = off, 1 = start with mould open, 2 = start with opening stroke
41 Jolt ejector stroke rate reached
42 Direction of the axis: 0 = horizontal, 1 = vertical, 2 = horizontal L
43 Actor type Ejector forward
49 Job aborted
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 21
APS
10 Nozzle contact force reduced
11 Switching off of the drive
12 Program injection unit (0 = contacting nozzle, 1 = injection unit back before metering, 2
injection unit back after metering)
13 Injection unit is completely back
14 Injection unit Stroke is greater than max. stroke + 10,
15 Injection unit calibration is completed / injection piston calibration released
16 Nozzle contact force OK
27 Safety position reached
28 Clamping force built up and operation mode automatic active or clamping force built up
and injection active
42 Direction of the axis: 0 = horizontal, 1 = vertical, 2 = horizontal L
49 Job aborted
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 22 0114WT
APS
31 Pre-extrusion active
32 Automatic valve calibration active
33 Program "Rapid injection" active
35 Compression gap reached
36 Air gap reached
39 Program "Purging cold plug"
40 Program dry operation active
42 Direction of the axis: 0 = horizontal, 1 = vertical, 2 = horizontal L
47 Injection started (even if pump release not yet available)
48 Injection delay active
49 Job aborted
0 Task is is active
1 Waiting for release of the pumps
2 Organisation task "Job finished"
3 Core puller is moved out (limit position positive direction)
4 Core puller is moved in (limit position negative direction)
5 Move in core puller active (negative direction)
6 Move out core puller active (positive direction)
11 Switching off of the drive
40 Program core puller out / in (0 = out, 1 = in)
41 Program number core puller move in
42 Program number core puller move out
49 Job aborted
Accept line
By activating this function selection, the programs set in the pull down menus are accepted in
the APS program.
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 23
APS
Inser blank line
By activating this function selection, a blank line is inserted into the APS program.
Delete line
By activating this function selection the current line of the APS program is deleted.
Delete program
By activating this function selection the complete APS program will be deleted.
CAUTION
An APS program can only be created when no APS program is running.
Start APS
By activating this function selection the APS program is started. Starting of the APS program is
only possible during "Motor stop".
Stop APS
By activating this function selection the APS program is stopped. Stopping of the APS program
is only possible during "Motor stop".
CAUTION
Risk of damage! If the single step mode is active while the machine is switched on this can lead
to machine damage for self-programmed axes, due to the fact that the lockings may not be run!
The single step mode, therefore, has to be used with great care.
By activating this function selection the APS program is started in single step mode. The single
step mode of the APS program is only possible during "Motor stop".
Following a successful test run of the program the single step mode has to be deactivated
again.
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 24 0114WT
APS
Start single step
By activating this function selection the next step of the APS program will always be carried out.
The line number of the next step is represented in the colour cyan. This function selection is
only active in single step mode.
Return to line 1
By activating this function selection the position moves to the first line of the APS program. This
key is only active in single step mode.
Accu
The contents of the accumulator after processing of the corresponding lines is represented in
the column "Accu".
Error messages are displayed in the field below the APS program. In addition, the line number
of the defective line is represented in red.
Listing of the status messages
• Program OK
• Command not recognised
• Parameter missing
• Too many parameters
• Entry of parameter not necessary
• Variable not available
• Numerical value not allowed for this command
• Parameter is not a valid character string
• Complex variables not allowed
• End command missing.
• Variablemay only be read
• Variable may only be written
• Max. number of floating point operations exceeded.
• Run time error: Division by 0
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 25
APS
The "Product ID" and the data of the APS program (see menu APS Operation 1 to Operation 4)
are saved in the product data record. Also saved in the product data record is whether an APS
program is necessary to operate the machine (see menu APS operation 4).
The APS program and the "Program ID" are saved in the APS program data set (*.r_7) (see
Chapter 25).
An APS program can be loaded with the user level 30. Saving and editing is only possible with
user level 20.
CAUTION
APS programs cn only be loaded when the APS is inactive.
Drive switched on
"Drive on" is possible in the following cases:
1 The program preselection "APS necessary for operation of the machine" is not activated
and the APS program is switched off.
2 The program preselection "APS necessary for operation of the machine" is activated,
"Product ID" and "Program ID" are identical and the APS program is started.
The "Program ID" and the "Product ID" may have a maximum of 9 alphanumeric characters.
When writing a program, e.g. for a brushing device the "Program ID" could be "BRUSH". In all
product data records requiring this program, the product ID must then be "BRUSH". In addition,
for all of these product data sets an entry is made that an APS program is necessary.
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 26 0114WT
APS
Sample APS program:
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 27
APS
LD AP1var01
LE 15
MUL AP1var01
ST AP1var01
LD AP1var01
EQ 0
ST AP1do01
LD AP1var01
EQ 1
ST AP1do02
LD AP1var01
EQ 2
ST AP1do03
LD AP1var01
EQ 3
ST AP1do04
LD AP1var01
EQ 4
ST AP1do05
LD AP1var01
EQ 5
ST AP1do06
LD AP1var01
EQ 6
ST AP1do07
LD AP1var01
EQ 7
ST AP1do08
LD AP1var01
EQ 8
ST AP1do09
LD AP1var01
EQ 9
ST AP1do10
LD AP1var01
EQ 10
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 28 0114WT
APS
ST AP1do11
LD AP1var01
EQ 11
ST AP1do12
LD AP1var01
EQ 12
ST AP1do13
LD AP1var01
EQ 13
ST AP1do14
LD AP1var01
EQ 14
ST AP1do15
LD AP1var01
EQ 15
ST AP1do16
END
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 29
APS
! and generate the
! stati
LD AP1di01
AND AP1stat40
ST AP1stat04
LD AP1di02
AND AP1stat40
ST AP1stat03
LD AP1stat03
AND AP1stat04
ST AP1errcl00
! reset step
! variables if
! no start
! command
LD AP1start
ST AP1var01
LD AP1var11
AND AP1var01
ST AP1var11
LD AP1var12
AND AP1var01
ST AP1var12
! determine active
! job
LD AP1var01 ! job 1
EQ 1
ANDNAP1var12
OR AP1var11
ST AP1var11
ANDNAP1nStp
AND AP1stat40
ST AP1var11
LD AP1var01 ! job 2
EQ 2
ANDNAP1var11
OR AP1var12
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 30 0114WT
APS
ST AP1var12
ANDNAP1pStp
AND AP1stat40
ST AP1var12
! execute job 1
LD AP1var11 ! job finished?
AND AP1stat04
ST AP1var21
LD AP1var11 ! get access to
! pump
ANDNAP1stat04
AND AP1progsw01
ST AP1hyd01
LDN AP1progsw01 ! set status neg.
! move act.
OR AP1pmpacc
AND AP1var11
ANDNAP1stat04
ST AP1stat05
! execute job 2
LD AP1var12 ! job finished?
AND AP1stat03
ST AP1var22
LD AP1var12 ! get access to
! pump
ANDNAP1stat03
AND AP1progsw01
ST AP1hyd02
LDN AP1progsw01 ! set status pos.
! move act.
OR AP1pmpacc
AND AP1var12
ANDNAP1stat03
ST AP1stat06
! test if a job is
! finished
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 31
APS
LD AP1var21
ANDNAP1var31
ST AP1var41
LD AP1var21
ST AP1var31
LD AP1var22
ANDNAP1var32
ST AP1var42
LD AP1var22
ST AP1var32
! set status job
! finished
LD AP1stat02
OR AP1var41
OR AP1var42
ST AP1stat02
! activate pump
LD AP1pmpacc
ST AP1active
! set/reset outputs
LD AP1stat05
AND AP1drive_on
ST AP1do01
LD AP1stat06
AND AP1drive_on
ST AP1do02
END
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 32 0114WT
APS
Example 3, Tilted slide monitoring
SLIDE
! Program tilted slide
! Up to one to be entered
! stroke has to have input
! or the clamping unit
! will be stopped.
LD AP1progsw01 ! Program selection 1
Load Program switch 1 (selection on APS Oper.)
AND AP1di01 ! Move out slide
and 1 APS input Comments
ST AP1var01 ! Help marker input
store 1 APS marker Comments
LD CU1As ! Actual stroke of the clamping unit
Load Clamping unit stroke Comments
LE AP1setval01 ! Set value stroke monitoring
smaller 1.APS set value (to be set on APS Oper. 1)
/ equal (Caution 300 mm has to be input with 30.00)
ST AP1var02 ! Marker monit. stroke fallen short of
store 2 APS marker Comments
LD AP1var01 ! Move out slide
load 1 APS marker Comments
OR AP1var02 ! Marker monit. stroke fallen short of
or 2 APS marker Comments
AND AP1progsw01 ! Program selection 1
and Program switch 1 (selection on APS Oper.)
ST AP1var03 ! Marker release close
store 3 APS marker Comments
LDN AP1var03 ! Marker release close
Loadnot 3 APS marker Comments
AND AP1progsw01 ! Program selection
and Program switch 1 (selection on APS Oper.)
ST CU1nStp ! Stop bit close
store Stop bit close Comments
ST AP1errcl01 ! DIAGNOSIS MESSAGE
store Error message cl.1 (only class 1 errors will be displayed)
HB6GB23D
0114WT
Chapter 23 - 33
APS
HB6GB23D
Chapter 23 - 34 0114WT
Userpage
24 Userpage (option)
24.1 General
F24_Userpage-Allgemein_01
With the userpage (USP), the user can create his own screen pages. It is possible to copy
objects (texts, set values, actual values, symbols, graphics) from existing screen pages to the
userpage. An individual user level can be assigned to the objects in the userpage. Furthermore,
you can create texts, lines, and frames in the userpage. The userpages can be stored, loaded
and printed.
Edit userpage
This program preselection must be activated to compose or change a userpage. The action
which is to be carried out in the userpage must be selected additionally below.
HB6GB24D
0114WT
Chapter 24 - 1
Userpage
Write text into userpage
When selecting this preselection, own texts can be written in the userpage.
Cancel USP1(2, 3)
Press this button and then acknowledge to cancel the respective user page and the name of the
userpage.
Procedure:
• Change over to the "Material data records" menu (see chapter 25).
• Select data carrier and type of data record "Userpage 1, 2, or 3 (*.usp).
• Select or enter the "Name of the data record".
• Load userpage:
Activate function selection "Load"
The userpage data record is loaded to the selected userpage The name of the userpage
data record is displayed in the userpage.
• Save userpage:
Activate function selection "Save"
The selected userpage is saved as a data record The name of the userpage data record
is displayed in the userpage. If changes in a userpage were not yet saved, this will be
shown by an * at the end of the userpage name.
CAUTION
Due to safety- or program reasons, some objects cannot be imported into the userpage.
In these cases, the complete menu can be blocked for an import into the userpage. This is
indicated by a symbol in the USP pad. It is, however, also possible that only the blocked objects
of a menu cannot be marked and, thus, cannot be imported into the userpage.
HB6GB24D
Chapter 24 - 2 0114WT
Userpage
The program preselection "Edit userpage" and "Transfer objects from image to userpage, edit
userpage" must be selected.
Procedure
• Change now to the image from which you wish to transfer objects to the userpage.
• The image is displayed with a yellow background. This means that the marker mode is
active. Additionally, an USP pad is displayed in the area of the status bar.
• Now, objects can be marked by clicking or drawing a frame. Objects of several pages can
be marked.
• If the wished objects were marked, change into one of the three userpages (USP1,
USP2, or USP3).
• Click on the user page in order to copy the marked objects into the userpage to the same
position as in the original image.
Exception: If only one object was marked, it is copied to the position where clicking was
made.
USP pad
Press this button to change from the marking mode to the normal entry
mode. This is, for instance, necessary to operate the "Pull Down menus
for changing pages" (e.g. core puller 1-4 is to be changed to core puller
5-8).
HB6GB24D
0114WT
Chapter 24 - 3
Userpage
Program selection "Edit userpage" and "Write texts in userpage" must be selected.
Procedure
• Now change into the userpage (USP1, USP2, or USP3) in which you want to write texts.
• The userpage is displayed with a yellow background. This means that the editing mode is
active. Additionally, an USP pad is displayed in the area of the status bar.
• Select the wished font and font colour in the USP pad.
• Click on the area in which the text is to be entered.
• The alphapad is opened. Now enter the wished text and acknowledge.
NOTE
The text can be shifted subsequently into the "Edit userpage" mode.
USP pad
Press the "Reset" button to change into the "Edit userpage" mode.
F24-USP_Menü Text_00
HB6GB24D
Chapter 24 - 4 0114WT
Userpage
Program selection "Edit userpage" and "Draw lines in userpage" must be selected.
Procedure
• Now change into the userpage (USP1, USP2, or USP3) in which you want to draw lines.
• The userpage is displayed with a yellow background. This means that the editing mode is
active. Additionally, an USP pad is displayed in the area of the status bar.
• Select the wished line width and line colour in the USP pad.
• Now click on the start point of the line and draw the wished length of the line. Only vertical
and horizontal lines can be drawn.
NOTE
The line can be shifted subsequently into the "Edit userpage" mode.
USP pad
Press the "Reset" button to change into the "Edit userpage" mode.
F24-USP_Menü Linie_00
HB6GB24D
0114WT
Chapter 24 - 5
Userpage
Program selection "Edit userpage" and "Draw frames in userpage" must be selected.
Procedure
• Now change into the userpage (USP1, USP2, or USP3) in which you want to draw
frames.
• The userpage is displayed with a yellow background. This means that the editing mode is
active. Additionally, an USP pad is displayed in the area of the status bar.
• Select the wished frame type in the USP pad.
• Now click on the start point of the frame and draw the wished size of the frame.
NOTE
The frame can be shifted subsequently into the "Edit userpage" mode.
USP pad
Press the "Reset" button to change into the "Edit userpage" mode.
F24-USP_Menü Rahmen_DE00
HB6GB24D
Chapter 24 - 6 0114WT
Userpage
The program preselection "Edit userpage" and "Transfer objects from image to userpage, edit
userpage" must be selected.
Procedure
• Now change into the userpage (USP1, USP2, or USP3) which you want to edit.
• The userpage is displayed with a yellow background. This means that the editing mode is
active. Additionally, an USP pad is displayed in the area of the status bar.
• Mark the objects you wish to edit by clicking on them or by drawing a frame.
• Now you can shift and delete the marked objects. A new user level can be assigned to the
marked input fields.
USP pad
The number of the objects marked in the USP is displayed in this field.
Press the button "Reset - edit" to cancel all markings again.
HB6GB24D
0114WT
Chapter 24 - 7
Userpage
HB6GB24D
Chapter 24 - 8 0114WT
Data records
25 Data records
F25-Datensätze_GB02
You may store the current values of the control parameters as a data record on an external data
carrier (e.g. USB stick) or internally (hard disk HD). You may reload stored files at any time to
work with the recorded control parameters.
Additionally, the created userpages and the configured status bars can be stored and reload.
CAUTION
Back up the data records on other data carriers, e.g. the hard disk of a PC, at regular intervals.
Thus you may possibly avoid data losses.
CAUTION
Never process the data records with other programs. The files may be modified so that the
control system may no longer be able to read them. Always save, load, delete files only by
means of the control system.
HB6GB25H
0115MC
Chapter 25 - 1
Data records
Selection of data carrier
Use this function to select where you get your data from and where you want to store them.
Internal memory
Hard disk (HD)
HB6GB25H
Chapter 25 - 2 0115MC
Data records
Core puller programs (*.coreprg)
The core puller programs are stored in this data record (see also chapter 9). The selection for
the core puller program is only possible in user level 20.
CAUTION
The data record types for UNIROB are visible and to be activated only with the option "Shared
data storage" and correct connection to the UNIROB.
In case difficulties occur during the transfer of robot data records, the procedure for loading /
saving may take even longer. It will be interrupted by a time out (after 2 minutes at the latest).
This will be signalled by the respective error message.
HB6GB25H
0115MC
Chapter 25 - 3
Data records
Service data UNIROB B2 (*.R25)
Service data UNIROB S (*.R45)
Service data UNIROB E (*.R26)
The axis parameters and the stop areas 6 to 10 of an UNIROB are stored in this data record.
CAUTION
If 2 Wittmann robot are on the machine, the identification 1 resp. 2 is automatically assigned to
the data record names.
RobDS.1.wip Teach program of Wittmann robot 1
RobDS.2.wip Teach program of Wittmann robot 2
HB6GB25H
Chapter 25 - 4 0115MC
Data records
Status of the data record management
The status of the action carried out is displayed below the buttons for data record management.
Last function:
Display of the last data record handling function.
CAUTION
The "General information" submenu contains an overview of all last loaded and stored data
records.
Available memory
The available memory on the selected data carrier is displayed in this field. The available
memory is displayed in kB.
HB6GB25H
0115MC
Chapter 25 - 5
Data records
Function Save data record
Use this function to save a data record.
Proceed as follows:
• Select data record type.
• Select data carrier.
• Enter or select the name of the data record (in case you want to overwrite an old data
record, you may select this record via the file selection box).
• Select storing.
CAUTION
The name of the data record must neither contain special characters nor blanks. Up to 29
characters may be used for the data record name.
HB6GB25H
Chapter 25 - 6 0115MC
Data records
Accept B4 data records.
B4 data records are shown in magenta. When loading a B4 data record, it is converted into B6
format and then loaded. After having loaded the data record, the settings of the individual data
record version must be checked and, if necessary, corrected (see alarm 479). Then the data
record must be stored under a new name. The data record which was converted into B6 format
should then be deleted.
HB6GB25H
0115MC
Chapter 25 - 7
Data records
25.2 General
F25-Allgemein_GB03
The last loaded and last stored data records of the different data record types will be displayed
in this menu.
HB6GB25H
Chapter 25 - 8 0115MC
Data records
F25-IntegrationWittmannPeripherie_GB00
This menu is used to define whether data of a Wittmann periphery (ROBOTER, TEMPRO,
GRAVIMAX, FLOWCON) are to be stored in the product data record and/or loaded. Data could
be stored if the additional information (ok) is displayed in the product data record information
(see data record menu, to the right of the input field "Name of the data record) of the respective
Wittmann device. The additional information (empty) indicates that the data are empty. In
this case, no data from the Wittmann device could be stored (possible causes: the device is
switched off, the settings of the IP address for the Wittmann device are not correct).
HB6GB25H
0115MC
Chapter 25 - 9
Data records
GRAVIMAX Data (option)
With activated program preselection, the data of the integrated Wittmann blender (GRAVIMAX)
are stored in the product data record or loaded together with the product data record (see also
chapter 7.5 GRAVIMAX integrated).
HB6GB25H
Chapter 25 - 10 0115MC
Intranet / Internet
F26-BDE-Seite1_01
Activate Euromap
If the program preselection is deactivated, the timer surching the session files is stopped. The
time is also stopped if the "Euromap settings" or the "Network settings BDE" are not correct.
If the program preselection is activated, the initialisation (network connection) is realised again
and the timer restarted.
If the path to the session file has not be found for 3 times in a row during operation, the timer
interval is set to 1 minute. (may be caused by a separated network). If the path is found again,
the interval is reset to 5 seconds.
Euromap setting
Machine name
Enter the machine name.
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 1
Intranet / Internet
Path to the file machine.ini
Enter the path where the machine.ini file is to be found.
The path describes the position where the machine.ini file has been stored on the master
computer’s hard disk.
Example:
The following directory is shared on the master computer (e.g. \\KTNW2120):
C:\Quality\monitoring\euromap
In this case you can see from any other Windows computer in the network environment that a
subdirectory called EUROMAP has been shared without having access to C:\ or C:\Quality.
NOTE
If the green status is not available for Euromap and network settings or if the machine.ini file
cannot be found, alternatively enter the IP address of the BFE server instead of the server name
(in this case the server name cannot be resolved correctly.
User name
User password
Entry of user name and password of the master computer.
Accept settings
If changes were made to the Euromap or network settings, these changes must be accepted by
pressing this button. After having accepted the changed settings, the connection to the master
computer is initialised again.
Log on jobs
When activating this program preselection, the jobs will also be recorded in the log (also refer to
chapter 28.3).
Errors and status information will be displayed in the lower left window. The lower right window
shows the currently present jobs.
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 2 0515MC
Intranet / Internet
F26-BDE-Seite2_01
You can use the product data acquisition system to call orders and data records from a host
computer.
Order no.
Enter the order number. When loading or finishing an order the order no. is required.
Staff ID
Enter the staff ID. When loading or finishing an order the staff ID is required. The machine
operator must communicate to the host computer who is loading or finishing the order.
Start job
By activating this button the machine operator communicates to the host computer that they are
loading an order.
Before activating this program selection, the desired order no. and the staff ID have to be
entered.
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 3
Intranet / Internet
The host computer sends the following production data:
• Order number.
• Article number.
• Mould number.
• material number.
• Set Number of parts.
These data will automatically be entered in the production data screen (please refer also to
chapter 18).
CAUTION
When loading or saving data records in connection with the host computer, the entry of the staff
ID is required additionally to the "Name of the data rcord".
In case difficulties occur during the transfer of data records, the procedure for loading / saving
may take even longer. It will be interrupted by a time out (after 5 minutes at the latest). This will
be signalled by the respective error message.
Procedure:
• Enter the name of the data record and staff ID.
• Press button Load or save data record.
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 4 0515MC
Intranet / Internet
F26-BDE-Status_01
Assistance required
By activating this program selection the machine operator communicates to the host computer
that they require assistance.
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 5
Intranet / Internet
Status displays
The following statuses are evaluated and displayed by the machine. These statuses are sent to
the host computer.
Machine status
• ? Undefined machine status
• 0 Machine is running (powered on)
• 1 Machine is not running (powered off)
Machine mode
• ? Undefined machine mode
• A Automatic mode is selected
• S Semiautomatic mode is selected
• M Manual mode is selected
• U Setting mode is selected
• H Hold to run mode selected
• C Equipping / Maintenance selected
• I Idle mode selected
The machine modes A, S, M, U and H will only be evaluated by the machine and sent to the
host computer, if "0: ..." has been set for "Enter Machine status".
Depending on the "Enter machine status" setting, the machine modes C and I will be evaluated
and sent to the host computer.
Assist call
• ? Undefined assistance call
• 0 No assistance is required
• 2 Assistance required
The status of the assistance call depends on whether the program selection "Assistance
required" has been activated.
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 6 0515MC
Intranet / Internet
Parts Status
• ? Undefined reject part status
• 0 Last cycle not bad
• 1 Last cycle bad
The parts status (good or reject part) of the last cycle will be communicated to the host
computer.
Alarm Status
• ? Undefined alarm status
• 0 No alarms active
• 1 Alarm(s) active
The currently present alarms will be used to communicate the alarm status to the host
computer.
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 7
Intranet / Internet
F26-BDE-Konfiguration_01
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 8 0515MC
Intranet / Internet
F26-Email-Allgemein_02
The machine must be connected to the E-mail server for being able to send E-mails. These
settings are in the configuration menu.
Enter the E-mail addresses, a "Reference" and, perhaps, an E-mail text. If the program
preselection "Annex: Interrupt list" was activated, the currently pending alarms are also entered
into the E-mail. After having sent the E-mail, a sending state is displayed below the E-mail text.
Send
Pressing the button will send the E-mail to the entered E-mail address.
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 9
Intranet / Internet
Example for an e-mail in the case of error
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 10 0515MC
Intranet / Internet
F26-Email-Konfiguration_01
In order to connect the machine to the E-mail server, enter the server name, the user name, and
the user password of the E-mail server.
The sending protocol after having sent an E-mail is displayed below the server configuration.
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 11
Intranet / Internet
26.3 Network
F26-Netzwerk_01
Accept settings
After having entered the network path, the user name and the user password, the new setting
must be accepted by means of this button. The correct connection of the network drive is shown
by the green tick.
CAUTION
Only network drives, which were activated by means of the program preselection, will be
connected. It is not possible to connect several users to one network path.
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 12 0515MC
Intranet / Internet
26.4 Diagnosis
F26-Diagnose_GB05
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 13
Intranet / Internet
Activate VNC
A VNC server is started when activating the program preselection Thus, access to the machine
can be made by a VNC client. To do so, you need the computer name or the IP address of the
machine (will be displayed on this page). When connecting the VNC client, enter the password
"2006".
Recommended with Windows operating systems: UltraVNC, RealVNC.
Recommended with Windows 7 operating systems: UltraVNC 1.0.9.6.1 with Vista AddOn
RealVNC 4.6.0
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 14 0515MC
Intranet / Internet
F26-WebService_01
Session number
The Battenfeld Hotline will be pleased to send you the session number (9-digit code). Press the
"Start" button to start the web service.
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 15
Intranet / Internet
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 16 0515MC
Intranet / Internet
Remote
maintenance
88.152.54.233
Port forwarding 5228 Port forwarding 5229 Port forwarding 5228
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 17
Intranet / Internet
VPN connection
88.152.54.223 212.88.189.98
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 18 0515MC
Intranet / Internet
Remote
maintenance
VPN tunnel
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 19
Intranet / Internet
F26-WilleSystem-K4_01
NOTE
In the “Mediacenter / status bar / page 4” menu, you have the option to insert a button in the
status bar for direct change to this menu screen (see chapter 21).
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 20 0515MC
Intranet / Internet
F26-K4Web-Konfiguration_01
K4Web address
The address of the K4Web server will be entered here. From user level 15 (IT-level customer
service), the address can be modified.
Machine ID K4Web
The machine ID is entered here. If this input field is empty, the overview page of the machines in
the K4Web is displayed.
Stop K4Web
Pressing this button stops the display of the K4Web on the machine, i.e. menu "K4" displays an
empty page.
Note:
If the K4Web is no longer required it may be better to stop it since the K4Web display needs
system resources which will be released again by stopping it.
Start K4Web
Pressing this button restarts the K4Web display.
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 21
Intranet / Internet
26.8 WebCam
26.8.1 WebCam / WebCam
F26-WebCam-WebCam_01
Note
In the “Mediacenter / status bar / page 3” menu, you have the option to insert a button in the
status bar for direct change to this menu screen (see chapter 21).
CAUTION
On this page, the WebCam may not be finished by the function „Exit“. Then it can only be
started by the main switch Off/On.
If the WebCam is no longer required, it can be finished by means of the button „Stop WebCam“
in the „Configuration“ menu.
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 22 0515MC
Intranet / Internet
F26-WebCam-Konfiguration_01
Address of WebCam
Enter here the address of the webcam. The address can only be edited from user level 15 (cus-
tomer service IT level).
Stop WebCam
Press this button to stop webcam recording. In this case, a blank page is shown in the „WebCam“
menu.
Note:
If the webcam is not needed any longer, we recommend stopping it, as its display uses system
resources that can be freed up.
Start WebCam
Press this button to start the WebCam.
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 23
Intranet / Internet
26.9 Browser
F26-Browser_01
The browser is a menu for viewing web pages, images, and text files (ASCII). Enter the weblink
or the wished file (including the file path) in the input line. If found, the web page or the file are
automatically displayed.
Pressing this button will stop the browser display, i.e. an empty page is displayed.
Pressing this button will start the browser again, i.e. the web page or file (see input line) is
displayed again.
Pressing this button activates a refresh of the web page or file.
NOTE
In the meny „Media Centre / Status bar / Page 4“, a symbol for direct image change to this
menu can be set in the status bar (see chapter 21).
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 24 0515MC
Intranet / Internet
F26-TIG-TIGweb_GB00
NOTE
In the menu "Media Centre / Status bar / Page 4", a symbol for direct image change to this
menu can be set in the status bar (see chapter 21).
HB6GB26K
0515MC
Chapter 26 - 25
Intranet / Internet
F26-TIG-Konfiguration_GB01
T.I.G.Web address
The address of the T.I.G.Web server will be entered here. From user level 15 (IT-level customer
service), the address can be modified.
Pressing this button activates a refresh of the T.I.G.Web display.
Stop T.I.G.Web
Pressing this button stops the display of the T.I.G.Web on the machine, i.e. menu "T.I.G.Web"
displays an empty page.
Note:
If the T.I.G.Web is no longer required it may be better to stop it since the T.I.G.Web display
needs system resources which will be released again by stopping it.
Start T.I.G.Web
Pressing this button restarts the T.I.G.Web display.
HB6GB26K
Chapter 26 - 26 0515MC
Printer
27 Printer
F27-Datenausdruck_01
NOTE
The job number entered in „Production data / page 2“ (see chapter 18.1.2) is printed in the
header of printouts for information purposes.
Page printout and data printout only contain data. No graphics, charts, symbols or bars will be
printed. If desired, use the screen photo function (see chapter A.4).
Page printout
This function provides a printout of the menus activated for "Page printout".
HB6GB27F
0114WT
Chapter 27 - 1
Printer
Data record printout
This function delivers a printout of all data of one data record type. Select the wished data
record type.
Format of output
Printer
Use this setting to send the printout to the set printer.
PDF
With this setting, the printout is stored into a PDF file. Clicking on the input field will preset the
data carrier and the file name.
Print
An activation of the function selection will print the recorded printout or write it into a file. The
continuation of the page printout is represented by the bar display in the lower part of the
picture.
HB6GB27F
Chapter 27 - 2 0114WT
Printer
F27-Datenausdruck_02
Interrupt list
A list with the currently present alarms is output.
Log
A list of the recorded log filter for a period of time is output. Preset the log filtering and the
wished period of time.
Format of output
Printer
Use this setting to send the printout to the set printer.
PDF
With this setting, the alarm list (log) is stored into a PDF file. Clicking on the input field will
preset the data carrier and the file name.
HB6GB27F
0114WT
Chapter 27 - 3
Printer
TXT
With this setting, the alarm list (log) is stored into a TEXT file. Clicking on the input field will
preset the data carrier and the file name.
Print
An activation of the function selection will output the alarm list (log). The progress of the printout
is shown in the bar display.
HB6GB27F
Chapter 27 - 4 0114WT
Printer
F27-Datenausdruck_01
In this menu you can output the quality table records and the calculated statistics in a table. The
output can be sent to a printer or to a file. The functions of this menu must be activated from
user level "40".
Evaluation only
The evaluation of the quality table is output.
HB6GB27F
0114WT
Chapter 27 - 5
Printer
Actual values and evaluation
The evaluation of the quality table and the "Number of actual value lines" recorded below are
output.
CAUTION
The evaluation, minimum value, and maximum value of the quality table is calculated when
printing via the "Number of actual value lines to be printed".
Sample
Please specify the number of machine cycles between two printouts or files in this field.
Tolerance error
For each violation of the quality table parameters’ tolerance while the "Evaluation" is active,
either a printout will be sent to the printer or a file will be created on disk.
CAUTION
The cycle has to be finished since the printout will only be started for the following shot (only
then will all actual values actually be available).
Format of output
Printer
Use this setting to send the printout to the set printer.
HB6GB27F
Chapter 27 - 6 0114WT
Printer
Excel
With this setting, the data of the quality table are stored into an Excel file. Clicking on the input
field will preset the data carrier and the file name.
CAUTION
Only the actual values of all 12 columns can be exported.
PDF
With this setting, the data of the quality table are stored into a PDF file. Clicking on the input
field will preset the data carrier and the file name.
Print
An activation of the button will start the output manually.
HB6GB27F
0114WT
Chapter 27 - 7
Printer
HB6GB27F
Chapter 27 - 8 0114WT
Alarms
28 Alarms
F28-Alarmliste_01
In case an error occurs at the machine, an alarm line will be displayed below the headline in
which the current error will be indicated.
When clicking on this alarm line, a change to the alarm list menu is made.
The currently present errors with the respective date and time will be entered into the interrupt
list. If an alarm has been reset, it will be deleted from the interrupt list.
When clicking on an alarm in the alarm list, the help of the respective alarm is displayed.
If you are not able to remedy the cause of error yourself, call a service technician, stating the
alarm message currently represented.
HB6GB28G
0114WT
Chapter 28 - 1
Alarms
Information contained in the alarm messages
The following information concerning an alarm will be recorded:
• No. (alarm number), the symbol of the error class is displayed before the alarm number.
• Date (date and time when an alarm occurs).
• Text (alarm text).
• Cat. (error class of the occurring alarm).
• Value
Display of additional information for a detailed description of an alarm. If "1" has been
entered in the Info field, there is no additional information available on this alarm. For a
detailed description of the information refer to the respective alarm description.
For many alarms, the additonal information is shown as a bit-coded value. Several information
bits can be set here. The additional information must then be evaluated as described in the
following example:
Additional information:
Bit 0, value 1: Settings Station ejectors 1
Bit 1, value 2: Settings Station ejectors 2
Bit 2, value 4: Settings Station ejectors 3
Example: Additional information = 5 means that the respective settings for station ejector 1
(bit 0, value 1) and station ejector 3 (bit 2, value 4) are erroneous.
Error classes
Each alarm message is assigned to an error class. The error class defines the effects on the
cycle and the machine when the alarm occurs. The list of all alarms also indicates the error
class for each individual alarm.
HB6GB28G
Chapter 28 - 2 0114WT
Alarms
HB6GB28G
0114WT
Chapter 28 - 3
Alarms
F28-Alarmstatistik_01
The 15 alarms which occurred most frequently are listed in the alarm statistics.
HB6GB28G
Chapter 28 - 4 0114WT
Alarms
28.3 Log
F28-Logbuch_01
The actions of the machine and the user are also recorded in the log. The entries in the log are
divided in groups which can be distinguished by colours.
HB6GB28G
0114WT
Chapter 28 - 5
Alarms
User management (text colour: green)
• Actions of user management, password system;
Ex.: Login of a user;
HB6GB28G
Chapter 28 - 6 0114WT
Alarms
F28-Logbuchfilter_02
In the log filter, the recorded log entries can be filtered according to the log groups. Select the
wished filterings by ticking them.
CAUTION
The log filter is a copy (bitmap) of the log. Press the refresh key to get the current state of the
log for filtering. Thus, you will receive a new bitmap of the log for the filtering.
If no filter was activated, all entries of the log are visible. Actualisation is then carried out
automatically.
When clicking on an alarm in the log filter, the help of the respective alarm is displayed.
HB6GB28G
0114WT
Chapter 28 - 7
Alarms
Explanation of the different filters (log groups):
Miscellaneous
HB6GB28G
Chapter 28 - 8 0114WT
Alarms
28.5 NC erros
28.5.1 NC error / overview
F28-NCFehler-Uebersicht_01
This menu shows all errors that were detected by the NC assemblies. If an error is detected,
a symbol is displayed beside the error number. Click this symbol to view detailed error
information.
HB6GB28G
0114WT
Chapter 28 - 9
Alarms
F28-NCFehler-Seite1_02
The errors recognised by the NC154 subassemblies are displayed in detail in this menu.
Quantity
The number of the errors recognised in the respective NC subassembly is displayed in this field.
When pressing the "NC error acknowledgement" key, the most recently occurring error will be
acknowledged.
HB6GB28G
Chapter 28 - 10 0114WT
System control information
29.1 Disclaimer
CAUTION: BEFORE MAKING ANY CHANGES TO THE SYSTEM CONTROL, CAREFULLY READ
THIS DOCUMENT!
DO NOT MAKE ANY CHANGES OTHER THAN THOSE DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT, AS
ADDITIONAL CHANGES COULD RESULT IN A SYSTEM FAILURE. WITTMANN BATTENFELD
REJECT ANY LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES CAUSED BY UNAUTHORISED CHANGES MADE TO
THE SYSTEM CONTROL.
HB6GB29B
0114WT
Chapter 29 - 1
System control information
• The „Local Area Connection Properties“ menu is opened. Scroll to item „Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP)“ and call up the properties.
• The „Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties“ menu is opened. In this menu, you can
change the „IP address“, the „Subnet mask“ and the „Default gateway“. If you wish to avail of
„Remote Service“, we recommend entering a fixed IP address.
HB6GB29B
Chapter 29 - 2 0114WT
System control information
• Press the „Change“ button to call up the „Computer Name Changes“ system control
menu.
• Enter the desired computer name in the „Computer Name“ field and confirm with „OK“
(note: the name of the computer must be unique within the network).
HB6GB29B
0114WT
Chapter 29 - 3
System control information
• You are now prompted to restart the computer. Confirm with „OK“.
• In the „System Properties / Computer Name“ system control menu, confirm the new
name of the computer with „OK“.
CAUTION
• You are now prompted to restart the computer. Press „No“ as you must first execute
„COMMIT“ before „RESTART“.
• After all changes in the system control have been made, execute “COMMIT and
RESTART system” (see chapter 29.5).
HB6GB29B
Chapter 29 - 4 0114WT
System control information
• Click the „LAN Settings“ button to call up the „Local Area Network (LAN) Settings“
system control menu.
• To change the settings of a proxy server, first check the box „Use a proxy server for
your LAN“. Enter the address and port and confirm with „OK“.
HB6GB29B
0114WT
Chapter 29 - 5
System control information
• In the „Internet Properties / Connections“ system control menu, confirm the new proxy
server settings with „OK“.
• After all changes in the system control have been made, execute „COMMIT and
RESTART system“ (see chapter 29.5).
HB6GB29B
Chapter 29 - 6 0114WT
System control information
Explanation:
The operating system including its settings are installed on a write-protected drive. To
permanently save changes made to the system control, you must execute COMMIT (transfer of
change to write-protected system) and RESTART the system.
Procedure:
• Press the “COMMIT and RESTART system” button in the “Machine general / general /
system control” menu (see chapter 1.1.5). The “COMMIT and RESTART” command is executed
automatically and the system is automatically restarted.
CAUTION
Never shut down the machine while „COMMIT and RESTART“ is being executed.
HB6GB29B
0114WT
Chapter 29 - 7
System control information
HB6GB29B
Chapter 29 - 8 0114WT
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 1
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 2 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 3
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 4 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 5
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 6 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 7
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 8 0515MC
List of alarms
Value 2: General production end (e.g. manual / automatic production end)
Value 3: Switch-off sequence active (automatic) -> error class 4,7,...
Value 4: Blocking demoulding (ejector forward, robot start).
Value 5: Manual production stop (at once).
Value 6: Cycle stopped by acknowledgeable error class 3.
Value 7: Cycle stopped by acknowledgeable error class 8.
Value 8: Cycle stopped by not acknowledgeable error class 2.
Value 9: Cycle stopped by temperature monitoring.
Value 10: Cycle stopped by safety position injection unit, ejector.
Value 11: Blocking device mould table (not release for mould table movement).
Value 12: Cycle stopped by purging
Value 13: Reserve
Value 14: Cycle stopped by clamping unit
Value 15: Cycle stopped by no release closing by robot
Value 16: Cycle stopped by WFC
Acknowledgement: Automatically, cycle start pulse or when automatic mode not preselected.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 9
List of alarms
Bit 0, value 1: Robot interface 1.
Bit 1, value 2: Robot interface 2.
Bit 2, value 4: Robot interface 3.
This note is displayed if the robot program is activated in the visualisation and the robot is,
however, switched off via the interface (DIopm) and the machine is switched to automatic
mode and the automatic mode should only be carried out with activated interface, i.e. the
machine would produce without robot. This message is used as note for the user.
Acknowledgement: Automatically, if the robot is activated again or the automatic mode of the
machine is left.
Additional information:
Bit 3, value 8: Robot interface 1.
Bit 6, value 64: Robot interface 2.
Bit 9, value 512: Robot interface 3.
This note is displayed if insert parts were still available in the mould at the "Injection
moulding removed" signal. The "Insert parts" status is reset and the lower mould is empty
again.
Acknowledgement: When inserting new insert parts or with release of the mould table
movement.
Additional information:
Bit 4, value 16: Robot interface 1.
Bit 7, value 128: Robot interface 2.
Bit 10, value 1024: Robot interface 3.
This note is displayed if injection mouldings were still available in the mould at the "Insert
part inserted" signal.
Acknowledgement: Remove injection mouldings and insert new insert parts.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 10 0515MC
List of alarms
Value 96: Timeout NET2000 driver.
Value 97: Timeout VIS Control command.
Value 98: Timeout by robot control.
Possible cause: Robot is in "Automatic" mode. It is not possible to load a robot data record in
the automatic mode.
Value 199: Timeout by robot control during data record transfer.
>2000: Error when dealing with the temp. data record in the RPS (please refer to the burtrap-
lib documentation).
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 11
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 12 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 13
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 14 0515MC
List of alarms
160 1 Motor protection Gear oil motor
This error message will occur if the motor protection switch has been triggered.
Possible cause:
• Motor defective.
• Incorrect motor protection switch setting.
Acknowledgement: Automatically after trouble-shooting.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 15
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 16 0515MC
List of alarms
This error message will be displayed if the contained Pressure Mouldfix Fixed platen falls
below the set pressure (50 bar / 725 psi).
Possible cause:
• Pressure switch either defective or incorrectly set.
• The key Release Mouldfix Fixed platen was triggered.
Acknowledgement: Eliminate the cause of the error and clamp the fixed plate
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 17
List of alarms
• Index valve defective.
This error occurs, if an auxiliary contactor for the interruption of the fan circuit has dropped
due to dangerous movements (auxiliary contactor of injection unit or clamping unit), despite
the fact that none of the safety devices and guards (e.g. injection guard, safety gate, light
barrier, EMERGENCY STOP) has been opened/triggered. This monitoring function is only
active if the drive is running.
Additional information (with 1-channel EMERGENCY STOP):
Value 1: Safety devices (safety gate, EMERGENCY STOP) are OK but auxiliary contactors
were not actuated.
Value 2: A safety device (safety gate of EMERGENCY STOP) has been triggered, but the
feedback signal from the auxiliary contactors is logical „0“ (auxiliary contactor energized).
Value 3: Barrel maintenance program.
Value 4: Barrel maintenance: Key-operated switch not in position.
Value 5: Barrel maintenance: Key-operated switch monitoring.
Value 6: Barrel maintenance: Cover injection assembly open.
Additional information (with 2-channel EMERGENCY STOP):
Bit -5 and 10: Contactor relays safety gate energized (NC contact of monitoring)
Bit 00, value 01: Safety circuit control circuit.
Bit 01, value 02: Safety circuit safety doors
Bit 02, value 04: Safety circuit safety gate
Bit 03, value 08: Safety circuit barrel maintenance program
Bit 04, value 16: Safety circuit magnetic mounting platens
Bit 10, value 1024: Safety circuit safety mat
Bit 5: Contactor relays safety gate deenergized (NC contact of monitoring)
Bit 05, value 32: Safety circuit ok
Bit 06, value 64: Barrel maintenance program
Bit 07, value 128: Barrel maintenance: Key-operated switch not in position
Bit 08, value 256: Barrel maintenance: Reserve
Bit 09, value 512: Barrel maintenance: Cover injection assembly open
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 18 0515MC
List of alarms
Additional information:
Bit 0, value 1: IO module 1.
Bit 1, value 2: IO module 2.
Bit 2, value 4: IO module 3.
Bit 3, value 8: IO module 4.
Bit 4, value 16: IO module 5.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 20 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 21
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 22 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 23
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 24 0515MC
List of alarms
230 1 Minimum mould height reached
The minimum mould height has been reached. Further reductions of the mould height are
not possible and will be disabled.
Acknowledgement: Automatically after leaving the limit switch Minimum mould height.
235 1 Injection unit A not in safety positionThis error will occur if the injection unit (A) is not
in the safety position when either starting another movement (clamping unit or mould table)
or starting the automatic cycle. The safety position is set on the Injection unit A page under
"Injection unit Safety stroke".
Acknowledgement: Move the nozzle further backward manually.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 25
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 26 0515MC
List of alarms
Acknowledgement:Automatically when changing over to the manual mode, or after the
clamping force build-up has been correctly performed.
Possible cause:
a) Toggle machines:
"Clamping force built up" limit switch defective or mould mounting height set too low.
b) Central hydraulic unit:
Clamping force has not been reached.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 27
List of alarms
Value 1: Limit switch monitoring Brush Brush not plugged and limit position or home position
set
Value 2: Limit switch monitoring Ejector middle platen: Ejector middle platend not plugged
and limit position or home position set
Value 3: Program active but no device plugged in
Value 4: Both devices plugged in
Value 5: Limit switch monitoring: Limit position and home position set at the same time
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 28 0515MC
List of alarms
249 2 UNIPICK P5: no home position
This error will occur if the UNIPICK P5 is not in its home position (all axes must be in home
position).
Additional information for horizontal machine:
Value 1: If the UNIPICK P5 is not in home position at Start closing.
Value 2: If the program UNIPICK P5 is not activated and the Y axis is not in home position.
Value 3: Limit switch monitoring Home position of Y axis.
Additional information for vertical machine:
If the UNIPICK P5 is not in home position at Cycle start.
Bit 0, value 1: Robot interface 1.
Bit 1, value 2: Robot interface 2.
Bit 2, value 4: Robot interface 3.
If the program UNIPICK P5 is not activated and the Y axis is not in home position.
Bit 3, value 8: Robot interface 1.
Bit 6, value 64: Robot interface 2.
Bit 9, value 512: Robot interface 3.
Limit switch monitoring Home position of Y axis.
Bit 4, value 16: Robot interface 1.
Bit 7, value 128: Robot interface 2.
Bit 10, value 1024: Robot interface 3.
Acknowledgement: Move robot to the home position.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 29
List of alarms
255 6 Barrel heating Stop Weekly time switch
If the "Weekly time switch" program is activated and "Heating unit to be triggered"
preselected, these errors will be signalled until reaching the starting time and activating the
barrel heating or the stop time switches off the barrel heating.
Acknowledgement: Automatically if the barrel heating is activated or when switching off the
program "Weekly time switch" or the program "Heating unit to be triggered".
Chapter AL - 30 0515MC
List of alarms
Bit 2, value 4: Cut-off delay for run-up block (safety circuit clamping unit) too low.
Bit 3, value 8: Cut-off delay for run-up block (safety circuit injection unit) too high.
Bit 5, value 32: Input "Drive ON" has wrong state.
Possible cause: Contactor defective, EMERGENCY STOP circuit open, catch diode at
auxiliary contactor defective (if installed).
Fault elimination: Replace contactor, check EMERGENCY STOP circuit, replace catch diode.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 31
List of alarms
performed in the setting mode.
Possible cause: The "Ejector forward" stroke is set too long or the zeroising stroke has been
incorrectly approached.
Trouble-shooting: Automatically after correctly performed zeroising in the setting mode or
after reducing the "Ejector forward" stroke.
270 1 Compressed air too lowThis error will occur if the compressed air supply has failed
or if there is not enough pressure available.
Additional information for vertical machine:
Bit 0, value 1: Compressed air Machine.
Bit 1, value 2: Compressed air Peripheral equipment 1 (robot 1).
Bit 2, value 4: Compressed air Peripheral equipment 2 (robot 2).
Bit 3, value 8: Compressed air Peripheral equipment 3 (robot 3).
Acknowledgement: Automatically after reaching the set pressure level.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 32 0515MC
List of alarms
272 1 EIS system outside tolerance
2 for vertical machine
This error will occur if the actual stroke value of the eccentric injection system is not within
the specified set value tolerance. All movements of the injection unit will be disabled until the
stroke value for the unit has been corrected.
Additional information:
Bit 0, value 1: Injection unit A.
Bit 1, value 2: Injection unit B.
Bit 2, value 4: Injection unit C.
Example: Additional information = 3 means that the respective settings for EIS injection unit
A (value 1) and EIS injection unit B (value 2) have to be checked.
Acknowledgement: Set value adjustment or moving the injection unit to the proper height
position.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 33
List of alarms
monitoring" program.
Acknowledgement: Automatically for the next clamping procedure or after changing over to
the manual mode.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 34 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 35
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 36 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 37
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 38 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 39
List of alarms
321 1 Tolerance QT column 6
This error will occur if the respective column in the qualilty table signals that a tolerance
has been exceeded. An evaluation for the reject parts will only be active if the program
"Evaluation active" is switched on.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 40 0515MC
List of alarms
been triggered.
Acknowledgement: Lock Mouldfix.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 41
List of alarms
Acknowledgement: Automatically if the mould preselection (passive) corresponds to the
mould coding (passive).
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 42 0515MC
List of alarms
Bit 11, value 2048: Start-up priority for injection unit not possible (Combiform)
Bit 12, value 4096: Start-up priority cannot be higher than injection priority
Bit 13, value 8192: Combiform program not possible since IPs are injecting into different
stations
Acknowledgement: Automatically after trouble-shooting.
Note: As an additional information, a five-digit number is displayed where the ejector number
is shown in the 10000's place ("X") and the station number in the 1000's and 100's place
("YY"). The 10's and 1's place ("FF") then declares the configuration error.
Additional information:
Value XYYFF: Station ejector "X" of station "YY" - has the configuration error "FF".
Value XYY01: Already assigned to station A (used twice)
Value XYY02: Already assigned to station B (used twice)
Value XYY03: Already assigned to station C (used twice)
Value XYY04: Already assigned to station D (used twice)
Value XYY05: Already assigned to station E (used twice)
Value XYY06: Already assigned to station F (used twice)
Value XYY07: Already assigned to station G (used twice)
Value XYY08: Already assigned to station H (used twice)
Value XYY09: Already assigned to station I (used twice)
Value XYY10: Already assigned to station J (used twice)
Value XYY11: Already assigned to station K (used twice)
Value XYY12: Already assigned to station L (used twice)
Value XYY13: No defintion of the ejector type.
Value XYY14: Ejector program switched off.
Value XYY15: Ejector program only possible with removal / insertion definition
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 43
List of alarms
Value XYY16: Ejector program only possible with multiple insertion option
Value XYY17: Ejector program only possible with intermediate stop insertion option
Value XYY18: Ejector program requires at least 2 insertion cycles
Value XYY90: Ejector with this number does not exist.
Note: As an additional information, a five-digit number is displayed where the number of the
assigned core is shown in the 10000's place ("X") and the mould number in the 1000's and
100's place ("YY"). The 10's and 1's place ("FF") then declares the configuration error.
Additional information:
Value XYYFF: „X“. Core puller for mould "YY" - has the configuration error "FF".
Value XYY00: Already assigned to upper mould (used twice)
Value XYY01: Already assigned to lower mould 1 (used twice)
Value XYY02: Already assigned to lower mould 2 (used twice)
Value XYY03: Already assigned to lower mould 3 (used twice)
Value XYY04: Already assigned to lower mould 4 (used twice)
Value XYY05: Already assigned to lower mould 5 (used twice)
Value XYY06: Already assigned to lower mould 6 (used twice)
Value XYY07: Already assigned to lower mould 7 (used twice)
Value XYY08: Already assigned to lower mould 8 (used twice)
Value XYY09: Already assigned to lower mould 9 (used twice)
Value XYY11: Already assigned to lower mould 10 (used twice)
Value XYY12: Already assigned to lower mould 11 (used twice)
Value XYY13: Already assigned to lower mould 12 (used twice)
Value XYY90: Core puller with this number does not exist.
Ex.: 20103-> Second core for lower mould 1 already assigned to lower mould 3.
Acknowledgement: Automatically after having remedied the error
Note: As an additional information, a five-digit number is displayed where the mould table
number is shown in the 10000's place ("X") and the station/mould number in the 1000's and
100's place ("YY/ZZ"). The 10's and 1's place ("FF") then declares the configuration error.
Additional information:
Value XYYFF: Mould table "X": Station "YY" - has the configuration error "FF".
Value XZZFF: Mould table "X": Mould "ZZ" - has the configuration error "FF".
Value XZZ01: Cannot reach a removal station
Value XZZ02: Cannot reach an insertion station
Value X003: No lower mould active
Value X004: No removal station activated
Value XYY05: Not defined as operator station or robot station 1
Value XYY06: Not defined as operator station or robot station 2
Value XYY07: Not defined as operator station or cleaning station 1
Value XZZ08: Order of insertion stations not possible
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 44 0515MC
List of alarms
Value XZZ09: To many insertion cycles (max. 9 insertion cycles possible)
Value XZZ10: Order of removal stations not possible
Value XZZ11: To many removal cycles (max. 9 removal cycles possible)
Value X012: With the option Magnetic mounting platen system, station A cannot be defined
as the removal station.
Value X013:With the option Magnetic mounting platen system, station A cannot be defined
as the insertion station.
Value XYY14: Cannot be defined as an additional removal station (used twice)
Value XYY15: Cannot be defined as an additional insertion station (used twice)
Value XYY16: Lower mould cannot be switched off completely.
Value XYY17: Lower mould 3 cannot produce with lower moulds 5 and 6.
Value XYY18: Not defined as operator station or robot station 3
Value XZZ19: Lower mould Z cannot produce with station E, F
Value XZZ20: Lower mould Z cannot produce with station B, D, D
Value XZZ21: Too many rotary units activated
Value XZZ22: Preremoval station cannot be an insertion station at the same time
Value XZZ23: An preremoval station was defined
Ex.: 10202-> mould table 1: Lower mould 2 cannot reach an insertion station
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 45
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 46 0515MC
List of alarms
injection parameters.
Bit 4, value 16: Injection units A and C inject into the same station, but have metered different
injection parameters.
Bit 5, value 32: Injection units B and C inject into the same station, but have metered
different injection parameters.
Bit 6, value 64: Additional metering for injection unit A not possible since metering volume
exceeded
Bit 7, value 128: Additional metering for injection unit B not possible since metering volume
exceeded
Bit 8, value 256: Additional metering for injection unit C not possible since metering volume
exceeded
Acknowledgement: Manual mode: Turn the corresponding lower mould into the injection
station. Automatic mode: Acknowledge via "Cycle Start," the appropriate lower mould will
automatically be turned in.
Acknowledgement Bit 6-8: The additionally metered volume must at least be ejected below
the new target position (new metering volume).
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 47
List of alarms
366 3 No mouldWill occur if the mould is to be closed and there is no lower mould in the clamping
station.
Will occur if the Ejector forward movement has been triggered and there is no lower mould in
the ejector station.
Additional information:
Bit 0, value 1: Injection unit A.
Bit 1, value 2: Injection unit B.
Bit 2, value 4: Injection unit C.
Bit 3, value 8: Station ejector 1.
Bit 4, value 16: Station ejector 2.
Bit 5, value 32: Station ejector 3.
Bit 6, value 64: Ejector 1 (upper parts ejector).
Bit 7, value 128: Core puller which is used as ejector (with tandem mould).
Possible cause: Incorrect mould table configuration (lower mould not selected.).
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 48 0515MC
List of alarms
Possible cause:
• Zerorising Ejector not correct.
• Limit switch for ejector plate protection.
Acknowledgement: Automatically after the limit switch has been triggered.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 49
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 50 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 51
List of alarms
however, be carried out by the limit switches 1 and 2 only.
Limit switch signal will be evaluated by the control to be valid if both input signals are either
activated or deactivated. All other states will activate this alarm.
Acknowledgement: Check limit switch and limit switch fixing. The acknowledgement will be
carried out automatically if both limit switch positions are correct (open / close safety door for
a check).
Additional information:
Bit 1, value 2: Error Safety door 1.
Bit 2, value 4: Error Safety door 2.
Bit 3, value 8: Error Safety door 3.
Bit 4, value 16: Error Safety door 4.
Bit 5, value 32: Error safety door 5
Bit 6, value 64: Error safety door 6
Bit 7, value 128: Error safety door 7
Bit 8, value 254: Error safety door 8
Example: Additional information 6 means that an "Error Safety door 1" (value 2) and an
"Error Safety door 2" (value 4) are present.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 52 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 53
List of alarms
Note: USA: Y0 means valve SOL 0
S134 means limit switch PRS 134
Acknowledgement: Checking of the hydraulic valve circuit, electrical wiring of the valve, limit
switch monitoring included.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 54 0515MC
List of alarms
422 1 Nozzle contact point lost
This error will occur if the injection unit has lost the nozzle contact point during the injection
procedure. The injection procedure will be stopped.
Additional information:
Bit 0, value 1: Injection unit A.
Bit 1, value 2: Injection unit B.
Bit 2, value 4: Injection unit C.
Example: Additional information = 3 means that the respective settings for injection unit A
(value 1) and injection unit B (value 2) have to be checked.
Possible cause:
• Nozzle contact point set too small.
• Frozen sprue channel (Hot runner not switched on).
Acknowledgement: Automatically when changing over to the manual mode.
424 1 Mech. clamping safety device Y55->S616 (right)This error will occur if the position
of the clamping safety cylinder (right) does not correspond to the valve control within the
inchangeably set times.
Note: USA: Y55 means valve SOL 55
S616 means limit switch PRS 616
Acknowledgement and note: Refer to error message 423.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 55
List of alarms
Additional information = 3 means that the respective settings for injection unit A (value 1) and
injection unit B (value 2) have to be checked.
Acknowledgement: Move the clamping unit manually to the "Nozzle contact point" position.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 56 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 57
List of alarms
Example: Additional information = 3 means that the respective settings for the injection
piston of injection unit A (value 1) and the injection piston of injection unit B (value 2) have to
be checked.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 58 0515MC
List of alarms
Possible cause:
• Air conditioning unit defective.
• Incorrect motor protection switch setting.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 59
List of alarms
0005hex - 005dec: Node guading failure.
0006hex - 006dec: No magnet in the measuring range or number or magnets incorrect.
0007hex - 007dec: Velocity at position sensor 1 too fast (invalid values).
0107hex - 263dec: Velocity at position sensor 2 too fast (invalid values).
0207hex - 519dec: Velocity at position sensor 3 too fast (invalid values).
0307hex - 775dec: Velocity at position sensor 4 too fast (invalid values).
0008hex - 008dec: Position sensor 1 outside the working area.
0108hex - 264dec: Position sensor 2 outside the working area.
0208hex - 520dec: Position sensor 3 outside the working area.
0308hex - 776dec: Position sensor 4 outside the working area.
Acknowledgement: The acknowledgement will be carried out automatically after trouble-
shooting and pressing the "Hydraulic system OFF" key.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 60 0515MC
List of alarms
Acknowledgement: Acknowledgement by pressing the "Drive Stop" key. The parameterising
process must be repeated.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 61
List of alarms
Value 2: Transmission error.
Value 3: Order not available.
Value 4: Order blocked.
Value 5: No current order.
Value 6: Data record available.
Value 7: Data record not available.
Value 8: Data record blocked.
Value 97: Timeout NET2000 driver.
Value 98: Timeout VIS Control command.
Value 99: Timeout BDE Control command.
>2000: Error when dealing with the temp. data record in the RPS (please refer to the burtrap-
lib documentation).
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 62 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 63
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 64 0515MC
List of alarms
Additional information:
Value 1: An older product data record version has been loaded.
Value 2: An older service data record version has been loaded.
Product data Version 1:
• Pressure monitoring profile during injection.
• Moving forces for Closing / Opening.
• Moving forces for Ejector forward / back.
Product data Version 2:
• Settings of quality table, actual value graphics, and envelope.
• Mould protection stroke.
Product data Version 3:
• Setting of mould protection
Product data Version 4:
• Adoption of the old mould protection data, check of mould protection
Product data Version 5:
• The settings of the old mould monitoring are not adopted by the new mould monitoring.
These settings must be checked in any case (if option "Mould monitoring" is available).
Service data Version 2 - 6:
Switch off and on machine. Copying of the service value is automatically reversed by this
procedure. The corrected service data record can now be stored.
Acknowledgement: Automatically after changing the operating modes.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 65
List of alarms
information please refer to chapter A.10 Program sequence.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 66 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 67
List of alarms
538 1 Mould dimension too large => new mould height
This error message will be displayed if the entered value of the mould height (tolerance > 10
mm) for the mould height adjustment (see menu "Machine in general / Zeroising / HM2P") is
too large.
Acknowledgement: The acknowledgement is carried out automatically after a restart of the
mould height adjustment.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 68 0515MC
List of alarms
Axis" menu.
Possible cause: Cable breakage, error in the safety chain.
Remedy: Automatically after trouble-shooting.
556 1 Belt conveyor Deposit position not freeThis error occurs if the deposit area of
the robot on the conveyor belt is not free (is monitored via the photoelectric barrier). The
robot does not deposit the part until the error is remedied.
Additional information:
Bit 0, value 1: Robot interface 1.
Bit 1, value 2: Robot interface 2.
Bit 2, value 4: Robot interface 3.
Acknowledgement: Empty conveyor belt.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 69
List of alarms
Value of the additional information <= 100: This error will occur if, during deactivation of a
safety gate or a light curtain, an error occurred in the position monitoring of the respective
contactor relays. When deactivating a safety device, the corresponding contactors must
be activated. This procedure switches off the hydraulic drive! The additional information
indicates the light curtain or safety gate concerned:
Bit 0, value 001: Light curtain / Safety gate 1.
Bit 1, value 002: Light curtain / Safety gate 2.
Bit 2, value 004: Light curtain / Safety gate 3.
Bit 3, value 008: Robot cell 1.
Bit 4, value 016: Robot cell 2.
Bit 5, value 032: Robot cell 3.
Acknowledgement: Automatically after recognition of a correct contactor relay position.
Value of the additional information > 100: This error occurs if a configuration error for the
by-pass connection of the safety device from the menu of the respective machine axis is
present. The hydraulic drive is thus switched off!
The machine axis concerned can be determined by the additional information.
Value information 200 - 299: A by-pass connection for the preseleted station is not possible
due to safety-relevant reasons.
The value of the additional information is comprised of the current axis number and the offset
value 200.
Example: Value information 215
Number of the axis = 15 (e.g.: Core puller 1)
Value information 100 - 199:
A by-pass connection for the preseleted direction of movement is not possible due to safety-
relevant reasons.
The value of the additional information is comprised of the current axis number and the offset
value 100.
Example: Value information 115. Number of the axis = 15 (e.g.: Core puller 1)
Acknowledgement: Remedy the configuration error in the respective axis menu.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 70 0515MC
List of alarms
This error occurs if an axis (clamping unit, injection unit)
carries out an important position change although it is not triggered actively.
This will immediately switch off the drive motor. Furthermore, position 0mm (toggle locked
out) will be monitored after clamping force build-up (additional information can only be seen
in the log).
Additional information: The addtional information indicates the corresponding axis number
(important for Battenfeld customer service technicians).
Additional information in the log:
An additional info number will be displayed in brackets in the log.
(1): Movement during axis inactive, drive is switched off
(2): When exceeding the tolerance position 2 mm; stop at cycle end
(3): When falling below the tolerance position 2 mm, cycle is interrupted (toggle can be
over-extended)
(4) The cycle is continued when falling below the tolerance positin 1 mm or exceeding the
tolerance position 1 mm.
Possible cause: Directional valve of an axis is not in idle position.
Acknowledgement: During the next start of the machine ("Drive start" key).
However, it is absolutely necessary to find out the cause of the problem before in order to
prevent possible damage to the mould or the robot systems!
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 71
List of alarms
doing so, the pressure box must be positioned once with the cover mounted and once with
the pot mounted.
When using the cover, the key-operated switch must send a "Low signal" at the input 8.6,
and a "High-signal when using the pot. This alarm is displayed for each time the key-
operated switch changes its state. The motor will be switched off.
Acknowledgement: By pressing the "Drive Stop" key.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 72 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 73
List of alarms
moved out pressed at the same time.
Additional information (servo-electrical rotary unit):
Bit 10, value 1024: Monitoring time "Move out index bolt" exceeded.
Bit 11, value 2048: Monitoring time "Move in index bolt" exceeded.
Bit 12, value 4096: Limit switch monitoring index bolt; limit switch for Index bolt is moved in
and moved out pressed at the same time.
Possible causes:
• Limit switch positions not correct or limit switch defective.
• Index bolt blocked.
Acknowledgement: The acknowledgement will be carried out automatically after trouble-
shooting and pressing the "Drive Start" key.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 74 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 75
List of alarms
• the Airmould mono- or pressure regulator modules have been properly connected to the
interfaces.
• the openings of the injection modules are blocked.
If these two items have not caused the alarm message, the pressure transducer might be
defective. This is illustrated by the fact that there is no nitrogen pressure displayed at the
pressure gauge of the respective Airmould mono- or pressure regulator module although an
actual value will be displayed in the "Airmould 1...4" menu.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 76 0515MC
List of alarms
Acknowledgement: Automatically, if the release signal from the Airmould is available.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 77
List of alarms
Additional information:
Bit 0, value 1: Error Voltage Measuring channel L1 of terminal 1. This error will occur if the
measuring voltage between L1 of the terminal 1 and N falls below the value of 10 V. The
error is automatically reset if the voltage has exceeded the value of 10 V.
Bit 1, value 2: Error Voltage Measuring channel L2 of terminal 1. Description see Bit 0.
Bit 2, value 4: Error Voltage Measuring channel L3 of terminal 1. Description see Bit 0.
Bit 3, value 8: Error Voltage Measuring channel L1 of terminal 2. Description see Bit 0.
Bit 4, value 16: Error Voltage Measuring channel L2 of terminal 2. Description see Bit 0.
Bit 5, value 32: Error Voltage Measuring channel L3 of terminal 2. Description see Bit 0.
Bit 7, value 128: Error Node Guarding (no communication to the terminal). The error occurs
with a missing Node Guarding signal and is automatically reset by a correct Node Guarding
signal.
Remedy: Check the bus line between RPS and terminal controller. Check the settings of the
node number and baud rate.
Bit 8, value 256: Error Register configuration. This error will occur if it was not possible to
write on the internal terminal register. The error is automatically reset after a restart of the
control system and after having successfully written on the register. The terminal must be
replaced if a new attempt has not been successful.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 78 0515MC
List of alarms
Acknowledgement: Automatically if the error was remedied (see chapter 5 of the Festo
Documentation SPC11SYS-D.pdf) or the teaching Y axis function in the VIS was switched
off.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 79
List of alarms
Additional information: 1-10: Node number of the pump.
Acknowledgement: The acknowledgement will be carried out automatically after trouble-
shooting and pressing the "Drive Stop" key.
651 1 Error INIT CanOpen SlaveThis error will occur if the CanOpen Slave could not be
initialized.
Additional information: The device which caused the error. (Node number)
Possible causes: Incorrect paramters, internal error in the device control.
Acknowledgement: Automatically after trouble-shooting.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 80 0515MC
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 81
List of alarms
position of the core puller (Core puller moved in / out) is faulty. The signal of the limit switch
must be active (1) for the "Core puller is moved in" position and inactive (0) for the "Core
puller is moved out" position.
Possible cause:
• Limit switch in the mould defective.
• Wrong core puller activated (see "Ejector plate protection" menu).
• Bridge in the plug not removed.
Acknowledgement: Automatically with correct signal development.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 82 0515MC
List of alarms
Measure:
• Check pressure sensor.
• Recalibrate or replace.
Acknowledgement: After trouble-shooting, the acknowledgement will be carried out
automatically.
666 3 Frequency converter safety gate / monting height torque greater max.
This error will occur if the frequency converter has reached the maximum torque. The
displayed value of this error message (1 - 3, see alarm list or alarm protocol) indicates the
function at which this error was created.
Value 1: Mould height adjustment.
Value 2: Safety gate 1 ("IMM side 1" = the clamping unit is at the left side and the injection
unit at the right side of the operator.
Value 3: Safety gate 2 ("IMM side 2" = the injection unit is at the left side and the clamping
unit at the right side of the operator.
Possible cause:
• Mould height adjustment or safety gate too sluggish.
• Drive motor or gear defective.
Acknowledgement: Autmatically when deactivating the function.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 83
List of alarms
• Pressure sensors not correctly calibrated or defective, check sensors, calibrate them if
necessary.
Acknowledgement: The acknowledgement will be carried out automatically after trouble-
shooting and pressing the "Drive Stop" key.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 84 0515MC
List of alarms
mould safety zone, if necessary, check the valves.
• Wiring faulty. One cable was possibly damaged. The signal of the limit switch is not
permanently "1". Check wiring.
Acknowledgement: Select „Setup mode“. Turn and hold the „EMERGENCY STOP bridging“
key switch. Actuate the „Drive start“ button (switching on hydraulics. Actuate the „Open
mould“ button (move pressure pad in direction „Nozzle plate clamping surface“). Open the
clamping plate a little.
Release the „EMERGENCY STOP bridging“ key switch. Select „Manual mode“. Move the
clamping plate to position „Mould opened“. Start a new cycle.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 85
List of alarms
3000: CanOpen Master could not be initialised (Master Task).
Acknowledgement: After trouble-shooting, the acknowledgement will be carried out
automatically. The control must be rebooted.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 86 0515MC
List of alarms
Additional information:
Standardized error numbers:
1: No error: The process was finished without error.
51300: CANopen() error: FUB CANopen() delivered error status (observe error log).
51301: Inv. data type: The type of a variable in the PDO configuration will not be accepted.
51302: Nil pointer: Pointer to pdoInf_s; structure of a drive is nil.
51303: Nil pointer: Pointer to drvInf_s; structure of a drive is nil.
51304: Inv. Job Id: Unknown job ordered.
51305: Timeout: No answer from slave (address is in .errorData).
51306: Nil pointer: Pointer to the data is nil.
51307: Inv. Request type: Unknown request ordered (only write and read).
51308: Function active: SDO request is still present (no error).
51309: Step error: Internal error: State machine malfunction.
51310: Config. stopped: Configuration was stopped by user intervention (no error).
51311: Function active: Configuration is still active (no error).
51312: Function active: NMT command is still active (no error).
51313: Function active: Sync telegram is still active (no error).
51314: PDO robot inactive: PDO robot is not active since the number of drives per cycle is
zero.
51315: Inv. PDO length: The total length of the TX-PDO mapping is greater than 8 bytes.
51316: Inv. PDO length: The total length of the RX-PDO mapping is greater than 8 bytes.
51317: Nil pointer: Pointer to the root table of the drives.
51318: Function active: Nodeguard request is still active (no error).
51319: PV error: Configurated PV cannot be used (make sure that the data type is correct).
51320: Inv. data format: The indicated data format is invalid (ev. 0); check configuration.
51321: Slave is busy: The addressed slave is busy and, for the time being, it is not available
for the parameter transfer.
51322: Error during busy: An error at the slave occurred during the busy request.
51323: Inv. PDO number: The number of the PDO which shall be ordered by means of RTR
is zero.
51324: Function active: RTR command is still active (no error).
51325: LMT error: Error code while LMT service received from slave; LMT error codes can
be found in the data.
51326: Incorrect LMT command specifier: The received command specifier from the slave
differs from the sent one.
51327: Data buffer too small: The delivered data buffer is too small for received LMT
message.
51328: Function active: LMT command is still active (no error).
51329: Invalide node ID: The delivered node ID (.drv.Adr) is greater than the greatest
existing node ID in the project.
51330: Array too small: The structure array used for the PDO array configuration has too less
elements (one element is necessary for each slave).
51331: CANqueue() error: FUB CANqueue() delivered error status (observe addInfo of the
coMaster structure, e.g.: cm.addInfo).
51332: No free port: There is no free CANopen port for instantiation (max.8).
51333: Scaling factor is 0: A scaling factor of 0 is not permissible (division by 0).
51334: Name too long: The given name of an API function is too long (max. 32).
51335: Function active: The Consume Heart Beat function is busy (no error).
51336: CANxnode() error: FUB CANxnode() delivered error status (observe error log). For
the time being it occurs only if the "Producer Heart Beat Protocol" is activated.
Not standardized error numbers:
10: Station busy: Slave is just being served.
11: Inv. length: Delivered data length is too small for the received telegram (check
.sizeOfData).
12: SDO acknowledge: Error by Receive SDO acknowledge.
13: SDO acknowledge: SDO acknowledge is invalid (ordering answer received from
second master).
14: SDO toggle bit: Error in the SDO toggle bit (send and receive).
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 87
List of alarms
15: Inv. length: Data length to be sent is greater than the actual data length.
17: TX-SDO: Delivered data length is too small for the received telegram (check
.sizeOfData).
65534: enable = 0: Function called with enable = 0.
Acknowledgement: The acknowledgement will be carried out automatically after trouble-
shooting and pressing the "Drive Stop" key. The network is initialised again.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 88 0515MC
List of alarms
• Cable breakage Supply voltage.
• Control error of the pump.
• Pump temperature too high.
• Communication error.
Additional information:
0x0000 00000dez: Error reset or no error.
0x3101 12545dez: Overvoltage (> 37 V).
0x3102 12546dez: Undervoltage (< 19 V).
0x4200 16896dez: Temperature warning (approx. 85 °C).
0x4201 1689 dez: Temperature limit value exceeded (approx. 95 °C).
0x8101 33025dez: CAN Overflow.
0x8102 33026dez: CAN Guard Fail.
0x8105 33029dec: CAN-Error-Passive
0xFF01 65281dez: Control error.
0xFF02 65282dez: Cable breakage valve.
0xFF03 65283dez: Cable breakage swash plate angle.
0xFF04 65284dez: Cable breakage DMU entry 1.
0xFF05 65285dez: Cable breakage DMU entry 2.
0xFF06 65286dez: Cable breakage DMU entry 3.
0xFF07 65287dez: Cable breakage DMU entry 4.
0xFF08 65288dec: Valve error
Acknowledgement: The acknowledgement will be carried out automatically after trouble-
shooting and pressing the "Drive Stop" key.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 89
List of alarms
Additional information
Bit 0, value 1: Injection unit A
Bit 1, value 2: Injection unit B
Bit 2, value 4: Injection unit C
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 90 0515MC
List of alarms
Acknowledgement: Automatically, after having corrected the assignment of the cavity
pressure transducers.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 91
List of alarms
mould" key was pressed.
Acknowledgement: Automatically, as soon as sthe "Start mould height adjustment" program
has been activated.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 92 0515MC
List of alarms
positions are activated at the same time. The motor will be switched off in case such an error
occurs.
Additional information:
Bit 0, value 1: Screw-off unit 1
Bit 1, value 2: Screw-off unit 2
Acknowledgement: Automatically after trouble-shooting.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 93
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 94 0515MC
List of alarms
Value 2001: Pump system 2 - pressure transducer 2. The actual pressure value of the
pressure transducer is <= 0. The hydraulic drive is switched off.
Possible cause:
• Pressure transducer defective.
• Analgo input defective.
• Cable breakage to the pressure transducer.
• Additionally at value 1003: Clamping block is separated by the robot via the hardware.
Acknowledgement: Acknowledgement will be carried out automatically by pressing the "Drive
Stop" key.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 95
List of alarms
758 1 Oil lubrication B393 not enough lubrication cycles
This error message will be displayed if, during the monitoring time, the sensor B393 ("IMM
page 1" clamping platen) carries out less lubrication cycles than the sensor B392 ("IMM page
2", clamping platen). The permissible difference of the lubrication cycles (of the two sensors)
is stored in the service setting mode (for Battenfeld servician technicians only).
"IMM side 1" = the operator is facing the operating elements of the IMM. The clamping unit is
at the left side and the injection unit at the right side.
Possible cause: One or several hoses between the lubricant distributor and the lubrication
point are clogged or squashed. The lubricant cannot or only very slowly be fed to the
lubrication point.
Acknowledgement: Start "Central oil lubrication" in the "Manual mode". Check lubrication
lines. Clean the clogged hose. Replace defective hose.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 96 0515MC
List of alarms
inputs do not switch properly within a consistently set time.
Value, Relay K681: The error message 271 ("Safety bar operates") appears for 1 second
the relay K681 is operated. The safety gate can be opened now; the safety bar becomes
free. At the same time (within 400 ms) the monitoring input of the relay K681 must change
its condition. This does not happen the error message 633 is indicated. Upon completion,
the relay drops again and the monitoring input of relay K681 must change its condition again
within 400 ms.
Value2, Relay K511: The relay K511 draws on must within 400 ms the monitoring input of
the relay K511 its condition change. The relay falls again off must the monitoring input of the
relay K511 again within 400 ms its condition change.
Possible cause:
• Check monitoring relay.
• Check monitoring inputs.
Acknowledgement: Acknowledgement will be carried out automatically by pressing the "Drive
Stop" key.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 97
List of alarms
This error message will occur if the oil level is below the prewarning level.
Acknowledgement: Refill oil in accordance with the specifications in the operating manual.
After trouble-shooting, the acknowledgement will be carried out automatically.
HB6GBALL
Chapter AL - 98 0515MC
List of alarms
793 1 Mould monitoring lower mould 3
794 1 Mould monitoring lower mould 4
795 1 Mould monitoring lower mould 5
796 1 Mould monitoring lower mould 6
This error message is displayed if a monitoring error of the mould monitoring option is active
for the respective lower mould.
Additional information:
Bit 4, value 01: Mould monitoring group 1
Bit 01, value 02: Mould monitoring group 2
Bit 02, value 04: Mould monitoring group 3
Bit 03, value 08: Mould monitoring group 4
Bit 04, value 16: Mould monitoring group 5
Bit 05, value 32: Mould monitoring group 6
Bit 06, value 64: One monitoring program was assigned to several limit switch groups in
the same lower mould.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 99
List of alarms
Additional information:
Bit 00, value 0001: Monitoring channel 1.
Bit 01, value 0002: Monitoring channel 2.
Bit 02, value 0004: Monitoring channel 3.
Bit 03, value 0008: Monitoring channel 4.
Bit 04, value 0016: Monitoring channel 5.
Bit 05, value 0032: Monitoring channel 6.
Bit 06, value 0064: Monitoring channel 7.
Bit 07, value 0128: Monitoring channel 8.
Information For more detailed information please refer to the integrated diagnosis monitor.
HB6GBALL
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 101
List of alarms
Opening" (see chapter 3.1.7).
Possible cause:
Mounting height too small.
Mechanism is jamming.
HB6GBALL
Ex.: 10304 -> 1. Temperature control zone for lower mould 3 already assigned to lower
mould 4
Acknowledgement: Automatically after having remedied the error
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 103
List of alarms
„Y“ Number of profile error
„FF“ Number of the mould shut-off nozzle
Value X0FF: unknown
Value X1FF: Stop stroke before start stroke (closing before opening)
Value X2FF: Stop time before start time (closing before opening)
Value X3FF: Start parameter depending on stroke (too small)
At least one mould shut-off nozzle must be open before start injection.
Value X4FF: Start parameter depending on time (too large ... > 0)
At least one mould shut-off nozzle must be open before start injection.
Value X5FF: Stop parameter depending on stroke (too large)
The mould shut-off nozzle may be closed only if at least one other nozzle is
opened
or is already open.
Value X6FF: Stop parameter depending on time (too small)
The mould shut-off nozzle may be closed only if at least one other nozzle is
opened
or is already open.
Value X7FF: Time holding pressure end before stop time
HB6GBALL
Note: As an additional information, a five-digit number is displayed where the number of the
assigned mould heating zone is shown in the 10000's place ("X") and the mould number
in the 1000's and 100's place ("YY"). The 10's and 1's place ("FF") then declares the
configuration error.
Additional information:
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 105
List of alarms
Value XYYFF: „X“. Mould heating zone for mould "YY" - has the configuration error "FF".
Value XYY00: ......... Already assigned to upper mould (used twice)
Value XYY01: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 1 (used twice)
Value XYY02: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 2 (used twice)
Value XYY03: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 3 (used twice)
Value XYY04: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 4 (used twice)
Value XYY05: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 5 (used twice)
Value XYY06: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 6 (used twice)
Value XYY07: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 7 (used twice)
Value XYY08: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 8 (used twice)
Value XYY09: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 9 (used twice)
Value XYY10: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 10 (used twice)
Value XYY11: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 11 (used twice)
Value XYY12: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 12 (used twice)
Value XYY90: ......... Mould heating zone with this number does not exist
Value XYY91: ......... Mould heating zone with this number not possible
Ex.: 10304 -> 1. Mould heating zone for lower mould 3 already assigned to lower mould 4
(used twice)
Acknowledgement: Automatically after having remedied the error
Additional information:
Value XYYFF: „X“. Temperature control unit for mould "YY" - has the configuration error
"FF".
Value XYY00 ......... Already assigned to upper mould (used twice)
Value XYY01: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 1 (used twice)
Value XYY02: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 2 (used twice)
Value XYY03: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 3 (used twice)
Value XYY04: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 4 (used twice)
Value XYY05: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 5 (used twice)
Value XYY06: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 6 (used twice)
Value XYY07: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 7 (used twice)
Value XYY08: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 8 (used twice)
Value XYY09: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 9 (used twice)
Value XYY10: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 10 (used twice)
Value XYY11: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 11 (used twice)
Value XYY12: ......... Already assigned to lower mould 12 (used twice)
Value XYY90: ......... Temperature control unit with this number does not exist
Value XYY91: ......... Temperature control unit with this number not possible
Ex.: 10304 -> 1. Temperature control unit for lower mould 3 already assigned to lower mould
4 (used twice)
Acknowledgement: Automatically after having remedied the error
HB6GBALL
Note: As an additional information, a five-digit number is displayed where the number of the
assigned injection unit is shown in the 10000's place ("X") and the mould number in the
1000's and 100's place ("YY"). The 10's and 1's place ("FF") then declares the configuration
error.
Additional information:
Value XYYFF: „X“. Injection unit for mould "YY" - has the configuration error "FF".
Value XYY01-49: FID 1-49 in mould "YY" injection unit "X" is already assigned (used twice)
Value XYY51-99: FID 1-49 in mould "YY" injection unit "X" does not exist (configuration error
- offset 50 results in the FID number
Ex.: 10304 -> FID 4 in the lower mould 3 of injection unit A is already assigned to another
mould (used twice)
Acknowledgement: Automatically after having remedied the error
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 107
List of alarms
operator station) has an insertion definition
Value XYY17: Second operator station defined as removal / insertion station - the two
operator stations (1, 3) by be operated only alternatively
Value XYY18: No definition for parts removal / insertion in station Y (3rd operator station)
Value XYY19: Pre-start was preselected; pre-start was activated for the third operator station
and has not the same station assignation as operator station 2
Value XYY20: Third operator station only defined as insertion station, however, station Y
(2nd operator station) has an insertion definition
Value XYY21: First or second operator station must have a clear station assignment (e.g.
"Table in position" was preselected for both stations)
Value XYY22: First or third operator station must have a clear station assignment (e.g. "Table
in position" was preselected for both stations)
Value XYY23: Second or third operator station must have a clear station assignment (e.g.
"Table in position" was preselected for both stations)
Ex.: 10302 -> Robot interface 1: Second operator station defined as insertion station,
however, station 3 has no insertion definition
Acknowledgement: Automatically after having remedied the error
Additional information:
Display of the maintenance interval of the machine maintenance to be carried out.
Additional information:
Display of the maintenance interval of the general maintenance to be carried out.
HB6GBALL
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 109
List of alarms
962 1 Envelope 13 monitoring responded
963 1 Envelope 14 monitoring responded
964 1 Envelope 15 monitoring responded
965 1 Envelope 16 monitoring responded
Refer to error message 228.
Acknowledgement: After having remedied and subsequently acknowledged the error. The
error can be reset in the menu "Barrel heating / Monitoring".
HB6GBALL
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 111
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 113
List of alarms
Additional information (standard):
Bit 0, value 1: Robot interface 1
Bit 1, value 2: Robot interface 2
Bit 2, value 4: Robot interface 3
Bit 3, value 8: Robot interface 4
Bit 4, value 16: Robot interface 5
Bit 5, value 32: "External reject part" signal from robot 1 must change to HIGH level for a
short time (life sign)
Bit 6, value 64: "External reject part" signal from robot 2 must change to HIGH level for a
short time (life sign)
Bit 7, value 128: "External reject part" signal from robot 3 must change to HIGH level for a
short time (life sign)
Bit 8, value 254: "External reject part" signal from robot 4 must change to HIGH level for a
short time (life sign)
Bit 9, value 512: "External reject part" signal from robot 5 must change to HIGH level for a
short time (life sign)
Acknowledgement: Automatically, after the release signal being available.
HB6GBALL
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 115
List of alarms
1026 1 Motor protection Central grease lubrication 2 triggered
Description see alarm 157.
HB6GBALL
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 117
List of alarms
1041 3 Process control: Error signal ready for measuring
This error message occurs if the signal "Ready for measurement" of the external process
control unit (e.g. PRIAMUS BlueLine system) is not correctly functioning. In the automatic
cycle, the machine is stopped with the mould open.
Acknowledgement: At the next injection process, change of operating mode, or in the
automatic mode
When pressing the cycle start key or switching off the external holding pressure change-over.
HB6GBALL
Acknowledgement: The additionally metered volume must at least be ejected below the new
target position (new metering volume)
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 119
List of alarms
1xx03: Injection station X (E/F=5/6) with mould 3 not possible
1xx04: Injection station X (E/F=5/6) with mould 4 not possible
1xx05: Injection station X (B/C/D=2/3/4) with mould 5 not possible
1xx06: Injection station X (B/C/D=2/3/4) with mould 6 not possible
1xx07: Injection station X is not a clamping station
Ex.: 12005 -> Injection station 2 with mould 5 not possible
Acknowledgement: Automatically after having remedied the error
1054 3 Machine cycle is stopped - since no injection cycle has been started
Will occur if the mould is to be closed and there is no lower mould in the clamping station.
Additional information:
Bit 0, value 1: No valid mould for the next machine cycle found
Bit 1, value 2: No valid mould was found for the metered injection parameter record
Possible cause: Incorrect mould table configuration (lower mould not selected.).
HB6GBALL
1066 6 Delay for start decrease mode barrel heating for material monitoring active
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 121
List of alarms
1067 6 Delay for start decrease mode mould heating for material monitoring active
1068 6 Delay for start decrease mode temoerature control unit for material monitoring
active
The delay until the start of the decrease mode of the barrel heating (mould heating,
temperature control unit) is running. For settings and description refer to chapter 5.4.2
"Purging / Configuration".
HB6GBALL
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 123
List of alarms
Bit 06, value 64: LB1: Safety circuit deactivation of the photoelectric barrier (robot cell 1)
Bit 07, value 128: LB2: Safety circuit deactivation of the photoelectric barrier (robot cell 2)
Bit 08, value 256: LB3: Safety circuit deactivation of the photoelectric barrier (robot cell 3)
Bit 09, value 512: LBx: Safety circuit photoelectric barrier before clamping unit (flexible safety
zell)
Bit 15: Contactor relays photoelectric barrier deenergized (NC contact of monitoring)
Bit 15, value 32768: Safety circuit ok (reserved)
1080 1 Start volume Flow figure recording greater than metering volume
The "Start volume Flow figure recording" (see chapter 5.3) is greater than the metering
volume.
Acknowledgement: Automatically, after having adapted the corresponding set values.
HB6GBALL
1081 1 Start volume Injection integral recording greater than metering volume
The "Start volume Integral recording" for injection (see chapter 5.2) is greater than the
metering volume.
Acknowledgement: Automatically, after having adapted the corresponding set values.
1082 1 Start volume Metering integral recording greater than metering volume
The "Start volume Integral recording" for metering (see chapter 7.2) is greater than the
metering volume.
Acknowledgement: Automatically, after having adapted the corresponding set values.
1083 1 Stop volume Flow figure recording greater than / equal to start volume
The "Stop volume Flow figure recording" (see chapter 7.2) is greater than or equal to the
metering volume.
Acknowledgement: Automatically, after having adapted the corresponding set values.
1084 1 Stop volume Injection integral recording greater than / equal to start volume
The "Stop volume Integra recording" for injection is greater than the "Start volume Integra
recording" for injection see chapter 5.2).
Acknowledgement: Automatically, after having adapted the corresponding set values.
1085 1 Stop volume Metering integral recording greater than / equal to start volume
The "Stop volume Integral recording" for metering is greater than the "Start volume Integral
recording" for metering see chapter 7.2).
Acknowledgement: Automatically, after having adapted the corresponding set values.
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 125
List of alarms
Bit 1, value 2: Injection unit B.
Bit 2, value 4: Injection unit C.
HB6GBALL
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 127
List of alarms
1124 1 Automatic mould height determination active
Occurs if the "Automatic mould height determination" has been activated (for the description
refer to chapter 3.2 "Toggle").
HB6GBALL
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 129
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 131
List of alarms
HB6GBALL
HB6GBALL
0515MC
Chapter AL - 133
List of alarms
ROB
Alarm from Wittmann robot (a description of these alarms can be found in the Wittmann
robot manual)
System alarm
Here a system alarm is given. Please contact the BATTENFELD customer service.
List of alarms
END
HB6GBALL